Home

User Manual

1. iS IDLE 0 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu 2 Touch Z Folded original 3 Select additional copying features as desired NOTE To cancel the change before returning to the Basic Screen touch CANCEL To recall the standard setting of the Special Originals touch RECALL STANDARD 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Make other compatible selections 6 Position Z folded original s in the EDH NOTE Normal originals can also be loaded at the same time 7 Press Start After copying is completed press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 8 8 Special Original Original Form The copier usually detects the standard size of originals fed through EDH or positioned on the platen glass STD size mode Use Non STD size mode to specify the scanning area manually for copying or printing special size originals Use the Tab paper mode
2. ORIGINAL COUNT 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu 2 Touch to highlight the desired binding direction key 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 4 Make other compatible selections 5 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad 6 Position originals in the EDH or on the platen glass 7 Press Start 8 3 Special Original Text Photo Enhance Use this function to enhance the reproducibility of half tone and produce an image closer to that of the original Text Mode Use the Text mode when copying a text original In this mode text is improved in comparison to using the general mode Photo Mode Use the Photo mode to reproduce a half tone photo image The copy will closely represent the half tones of the original image Increase Contrast Mode Select Increase Contrast to darken lightly printed images e g pencil without changing background exposure I
3. ode 1S 0 mT EXIT TRAY BINDING OUTPUT lt SUB TRAY gt HDD RIGHT STORE BINDING a FACEUP B TANDEM UP nn STANDARD croup CANCEL OK 7 10
4. 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu 2 Touch SUB TRAY to display the popup menu OUTPUT lt SUB TRAY gt 3 Touch the desired key s on the popup menu to specify one of the four output modes To select Non sort and face down exit touch FACE DOWN To select Non sort and face up exit touch FACE UP To select Group and face down exit touch GROUP and FACE DOWN To select Group and face up exit touch GROUP and FACE UP 4 Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen The selection made in output mode using secondary sub tray will be reflected in the OUTPUT icon area of the Basic Screen 5 Enter the desired print quantity 6 Position originals in the EDH and make copying selections as required When using Store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 37 7 Press Start A CAUTION When the selected print quantity exceeds the Finishers maximum capacity remove the printed sheets while paper is exiting to avoid paper mishandling 7 11 Output Mod
5. Basic Screen to stop printing PRINT on OTP Lon sos 02 STATUS output py M PY DEN LEN eons APPL ROTATION _ STORE
6. Wa EXIT TRAY BINDING STAPLE OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt HDD RIGHT Fs OEF j Sine SUB al BINDING al E crouer eee U TANDEM TRAY BINDING Bl E SORT E PUNCH g RECALL STANDARD al STAPLING Ag Z ee Y ERI ia Z5 cancer TRAY z E E Fomm ane L OK iS IDLE 0 Cover Sheet Insert Selection Screen e ove ee ode and o J001 0 ove en pre 0 OUTPUT APPLI L cover sheet FRONT COYER BACK CO YER INSERT S PAGE SETTING Enter by keypad lt 1 15 gt LOWER TRAY LOWER TRAY LOWER TRAY FRONT sack DELETE SET CHANGE OF THE CHANGE OF THE CHANGE OF THE SACEL oi FRON
7. 8 5x14 8 5x11R 8 5x11 A3 B4 AAR Tab A4 B5 CANCEL paper 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu 2 Touch Non STD Size or Tab paper 8 9 Special Original Original Form continued 3 Touch the desired size key When selecting WHOLE AREA on the Non STD size mode menu the copier scans the whole area of the platen glass and copies with the paper size or magnification ratio currently selected 4 Touch OK on the popup menu of the size keys 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen NOTE To cancel the change before returning to the Basic Screen touch CANCEL To recall the standard setting of the Special Originals touch RECALL STANDARD 6 Make other compatible selections 7 Position original s FACE UP in the EDH or FACE DOWN on the platen glass 8 Press Start After copying is completed press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 8 10 Section 9 Applications Application Function Menu 9 2 Sheet Cover Insertion 9 3 Chapter 9 8 Combination 9 10 Booklet 9 12
8. Applications Sheet Cover Insertion continued 6 The page setting area of the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen displays 15 keys to designate each insertion location The first upper left key displays the Front Cover icon if selected The Back Cover icon appears if selected as the last fixed key with one active blank key preceding it See the previous page Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of each insertion location Touch SET after each entry to move to the next key Example If p 4 is entered in blank mode a blank sheet will be inserted between p 4 and p 5 in copy mode a copied sheet is inserted at p 4 To clear an incorrect entry touch DELETE or press C clear The insertion location will be deleted When setting more than 15 locations touch the arrow key to move to the next page NOTES 1 The page numbers entered at random will be sorted automatically 2 Entering 0 or the same page number twice will be ignored on the screen 3 When a page number entered is larger than the total original page count it will be ignored 7 The tray sources for covers and insertions currently selected are displayed on the
9. gn original o D Ae 0 FREE Jog01 STATUS OUTPUT copy MODE COPYDENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION z m 1 000 i rearen AMS AA Sree al STAPLE ROTATION SORT The Basic Screen displays after warm up Initial settings are shown on the next page Except for Print Quantity all initial settings can be changed by the Key Operator The following modes can be accessed from this screen Copy Mode Copy Density Lens Mode Copy Size Special Original Application Output 3 20 Machine Information Initial Settings Initial settings represent the initial condition when power is turned on when ECM password is set or when Panel Reset mode is restored either manually or automatically Print Quantity 1 Magnification Ratio 1 000 Key Operator setting EDH ON Key Operator setting Copy mode 1 1 mode Key Operator setting AES Automatic Exposure Selection ON Key Operator setting APS Automatic Paper Selection ON Key Operator setting Panel Reset Mode The Panel Reset function can be set for OFF 30 seconds 1 minute 1 5 minutes 2 minutes 2 5 minutes 3 minutes 3 5 minutes 4 minutes 4 5 minutes 5 minutes by the
10. 0 NO NAME COPY PRINTER NO NAME COPY PRINTER 1 2 3 I D D o 6 o 5 6 SC SC YES NO 9 ALL PEINER SCANNER CANCEL 8 9 L cal a SET a 0 SET Add COUNT RESET RETURN Add COUNT reser RETURN To Delete ECM Data 1 Touch A or key on the right side of the list to highlight the ECM data to be deleted then touch Delete The Delete Confirmation Screen will be displayed 2 Touch YES to delete or NO to cancel 13 20 Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 continued E C M Data Edit 1 continued To Clear ECM Count 1 Touch A or Y key on the right side of the list to highlight the desired ECM data then touch COUNT RESET The Reset Confirmation Screen will be displayed 2 Touch COPY PRINTER to clear the copy print count SCANNER to clear the scan count or ALL to reset both counters of the selected ECM data Touch CANCEL to cancel this function 5 Touch RETURN on the ECM Data Edit Screen to return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen If other ECM setting changes are required touch the desired key from 1 8 6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 7 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying op
11. 1 Touch to highlight SCAN JOB or PRINT JOB to be suspended 2 Press Stop The current machine operation of the selected job will be suspended and the popup menu will display on the Basic Screen to ask you to continue or cancel the job 3 Touch EXIT to cancel the job and delete the data or CONTINUE to complete the job 6 5 Basic Operations How to Make a Basic Copy continued Recalling Previous Job Settings Follow the procedure below to copy with a previous job s settings NOTES 1 Only the last completed output job settings can be recalled as the previous job settings Non com plete job or reserve job settings cannot be recalled even if the setting operations have been made last 2 The previous job settings can be recalled even after the machine power is turned off then on Job No Selection Screen ff 1 ABC CORPORATION 2 3 4 TEST COPY 5 gt 1 Press Program Memory on the control panel to display the Job No Selection Screen 2 Touch PRE JOB RECALL then touch JOB CHECK displayed on the left side of the PRE JOB RECALL key Check the settings recalled on the screen 3 When all settings are acceptable touch OK to return to the Basic screen 4 Position original s in the EDH or on the platen glass then press Sta
12. NO MODE status Pedele PASS MUIS TANDEM CONNDGTED OPY SIZE EEIE 1 COPIER PRINTING 20 100 2 OPERATING 2 PRINTER RESERVE g Sees cones Tray 1 55x85HR 3 COPIER PRINTING 20 Tray2 55x85HR ROTATION RESERYE JOB DOES NOT EXIST stale a W EE RESERVE JOB DOES NOT EXIST Bypass 55x85HR a J ei ole EE EN MED Coc J NO Displays the number 01 99 for each job assigned to the machine MODE Displays the machine s current mode of operation Three modes are listed below COPIER PRINTER SCANNER STATUS Displays the current status of the machine for each job Indication Meaning READY Ready to use in each mode INTERRUPT Interrupting the previous job ERROR Error in each mode PRINTING Printing in each mode NO PAPER No paper in copy print mode STOP Stop in each mode RESERVE Setting reserve job JAM Jam in each mode TOTAL PAGE s Displays the number of scanned pages for each job 0 to 9999 6 30 Basic Operations Reserve continued Job Status Screen continued PAGE s TO GO MINUTE s TO GO Other Displays the remaining copy count of the job 0 to 9999 The number exceeding 9999 will be displayed as 99997 Copy count No of scanned pages x Print quantity Displays the time in minutes required for completing the
13. THREE FOLDING q FOLDING L OK o scan origina Please pre O ORE b a g complete E 1S yop 01 STATUS OUTPUT lt r FUNCTION FREE 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu then touch the desired original direction key to highlight it Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 2 Touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Output Mode popup menu then touch the desired binding mode key to highlight it Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen NOTE Selecting UP BINDING will make copies upside down on the reverse side while the RIGHT amp LEFT BINDING copies normally 3 Open the EDH Place original FACE DOWN on the platen glass according to the original direction specified in step 1 then close the EDH IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF PAGINATION 4 Touch 1 2 The STORE key is automatically highlighted on the screen 6 9 Basic Oper
14. RELEASE PROOF aaa COPY EXIT 1 Touch the desired special original key or application function key on the Mode Check Screen to highlight it 2 Touch RELEASE SETTING 3 Touch YES to cancel the application function or NO to restore When YES is touched the selected function will be released and the key will disappear from the Mode Check Screen 6 45 Basic Operations Help Mode Use the Help key to access information about the current screen mode and to learn about setting procedures The Help key can be pressed from any screen except Program Memory and Key Operator Screens The Help Screen also includes the Help menu icon in the center When the HELP MENU key is touched the Help Menu Screen displays a list of all of the copier functions When a function item is touched the Help Screen displays information specific to that topic The KEY OPERATOR MODE key is also provided in the lower left position of the Help Screen When touched the Key Operator Password Entry Screen will be displayed to access the Key operator mode See p 13 2 Control panel contrast key Weekly timer key Help Screen P HOD g FOR ASSISTANCE PAPER SUPPLY HELP MENU TEL STAPLE SUPPLY TELEPHONE PUNCH PAPER f PAPER SUPPLY SUPPLY PAPER SUPPLY PAPER SUPPLY fee 119 PAPER SUPPLY EXIT KEY
15. S IDLE 0 2 Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu The Basic Screen will be restored with the OUTPUT APPLI highlighted 9 13 Applications Booklet continued 11 Enter the desired print quantity 12 Position originals FACE UP onto the EDH When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 NOTE When loading originals heed the following limits on capacity Folding mode 12 pages or less for simplex originals 6 pages or less for duplex originals Stapling amp Folding mode 80 pages or less for simplex originals 40 pages or less for duplex originals Exceeding the above limits on capacity may cause misfeeds in the finisher Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 13 Press Start After copying is completed touch Booklet on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine A CAUTION The roller drive unit is located inside the Booklet tray of the finisher DO NOT put your hand into the roller drive unit when removing folded or stapled amp folded sheets otherwise you may be injured 9 14 Applications Transparency Interleave Use the Transparency interleave function in 1 1 or 2 1 mode to copy onto overhead projection transpar
16. STATUS OUTPUT COPY MODE COPYDENSITY LENS MODE FUNCTION 2 Touch the Bypass key then touch PAPER TYPE SIZE The Paper Type Size popup menu will be displayed 3 Touch the desired key ze popup menu pape p Paper Type Si TYPE SIZE i i E Itis auto detect ae STD size i size Thin Trace special Non STD gt size CANCEL Wide paper User Tab paper S IDLE 0 e When Thick Thin Tab paper OHP Trace or User is highlighted a print job will conform to the selected paper type If no paper type indication is needed touch the highlighted key to clear the selection in the TYPE area The selection will be reflected on the Basic Screen when restored NOTE When selecting Tab paper AMS is automatically selected 6 24 Basic Operations Copy Size continued Selecting Paper Type Size for Multi sheet Bypass Tray continued Paper Type Size popup menu OF Bypass tray oe Ae TYPE SIZE STATUS OHP STD size ss F4 Thin Trace Bro size BER ASR Tab Non STD paper User size CANCEL Wide paper e When STD size special is highlighted the popup menu will appear Use arrows to scroll to the desired size In this case both the copy size and type selected
17. 2 5 7 8 9 e QO SET RETURN Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen Stapling amp Folding stopper adj 5 2 positions staple pitch adj Folding stopper adjustment Punch adjustment Z Folding position adjustment Three Folding position adj Folding Stopper Position Adjustment Screen Punch Kit Vertical Position Adjustment Screen Punch Unit Vertical Position Adjustment Screen RETURN SET RETURN 9 SET RETURN RETURN 13 52 Key Operator Mode Finisher Adjustment 17 continued Punch Unit Horizontal Position Adjustment Screen Z Folding Position Adjustment Menu Screen w 1st Z Folding position adj 2 2nd Z Folding position adj SET RETURN RETURN 1st Folding Position Adjustment Screen 2nd Folding Position Adjustment Screen 0 8 0 1 4 7 ter 1 4 7 dan NEXT BACK RETURN NEXT BACK RETURN Three Folding Position Adjustment Screen 2 Positions Staple Pitch Adjustment Screen 6 9 SET RETURN RETURN a4 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password To display menus 11 to 20 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch the Lower arrow key Touch 17 Finisher adjustment to display the Finisher Adj
18. FN 115 Finisher Upper lever opens upward to remove mishandled paper Upper knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper Right lever opens to remove mishandled paper Left lever opens to remove mishandled paper Stacker unit holds stapler Stacker unit handle withdraws unit to allow removal of mishandled paper and replacement of staple cartridge Cartridge housing holds staple cartridge and is to be replaced when supplying staples 3 11 Machine Information Machine Configuration continued Optional Equipment continued 3 Upper tray guide plates 4 Upper tray a et 2 Upper unit release lever 5 Lower tray 6 Lower tray SOs guide plates 1 Cover inserter E control panel Cover inserter E Cover inserter E control panel controls cover inserter operations Upper unit release lever can be moved to slide the upper unit of cover inserter for removal of mishandled paper Upper tray guide plates hold cover sheets to fix the position Upper tray holds cover sheets for use in cover sheet output mode Lower tray holds cover sheets for use in cover sheet output mode or a copied set in manual stapling punching three folding mode 6 Lower tray guide plates hold cover sheets to fix the position N a E amp 3 12 Machine Information Machine Configuration continued Optional Equipment continued ouhAWN
19. S IDLE Paper Type Size popup menu pape p TYPE SIZE STATUS INPUT SIZE Thick OHP stosie gt T i 2t Sh Ecce _ STD size special Thin Trace User Non ST Joj 4432mm ETA Select S IDLE 0 p CANCEL Tab paper When Wide paper is highlighted the popup menu will appear Use arrows to scroll to the desired wide size then specify the precise dimensions of paper to be used following the procedure below 1 Touch Input size The Size Input popup menu will appear 2 Touch the vertical size key to highlight it then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the vertical size or use arrows to scroll to that number The entered number should fall within the range from the vertical size of the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size to a maximum of 314 mm 3 Similarly touch the horizontal size key to highlight it then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the horizontal size or use arrows to scroll that number The entered number should fall within the range from the horizontal size of the standard size corresponding to the selected wide size to a maximum of 459 mm 4 Touch Select size to
20. Copy Quantity 1 Exit Tray Main tray Duplex Mode 1 1 Enhance Mode Photo Mode Copy Density AES Special Orig Normal Mode Lens Mode 1 000 Original Non STD 43 Copy Size APS Paper_Type Output Mode AA Staple Sort Job Name Registration Screen 1 1 CHARACTER DELETE 10 2 Program Memory Job Store continued 1 Make job selections from the Basic Screen Application Selection Screen Special Original popup menu and or Output Mode popup menu 2 When all selections are made press Program Memory on the Control panel to display the Job No Selection Screen 3 Touch STORE The Job Store Check Screen displays to enable you to review the settings See sample Job Store Check Screen previous page 4 If settings are correct touch OK to restore the Job No Selection Screen Otherwise touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen and make new selections 5 When the Job No Selection Screen is restored touch one of the keys numbered from 1 30 to store the job under that number The key with a lock icon displayed is locked and cannot be selected Arrow keys can be used to scroll to the next previous page The selected number key will be highlighted 6 Touch OK on the Job No Selection Screen to display the Job Name Registration Screen If you do not wish to enter a name touch OK 7 Enter a job name up to 16 characters using the touch screen alphabet keypad To correct
21. FrametFold S tamp raft Erasure 1 aie verlay ALL CHANGE OF THE CHANGE OF THE clear caNCEL COVERS TRAY BINDING MODE CANCEL oK Applications Booklet continued 1 Load the desired copy paper size in a tray When selecting cover sheet mode COVER WITH COPY SHEET or COVER WITH BLANK SHEET load the same size paper in any tray unless it is specified as Thick or Tab Paper paper type in the Key Operator mode 2 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 3 Touch Booklet to enter the Booklet Mode Selection Screen 4 Touch NO COVER SHEET COVER WITH COPY SHEET or COVER WITH BLANK SHEET as required When a cover sheet is required touch CHANGE OF THE COVERS TRAY to select the cover sheet tray source Touch CHANGE OF THE OUTPUT MODE if you want to change the binding mode 5 Touch OK 6 Select additional copying features as desired NOTE Key Operator can set the machine to position the page numbers automatically on the outside edges of the copy when using Booklet with Page Numbering in Stamp See p 13 41 to p 13 48 7 Touch OK on the Application Selection Screen to complete the selections and return to the Basic Screen 8 Select the 1 2 or 2 2 copy mode 9 AMS is
22. Basic Mode keys Status key Messages and Basic Screen l y _Count Set i Align original on ED indi Copier Status EJE amp o 4000 indicator Folder keys gt Ekri STATUS OUTPUT COPY MODE COPYDENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION o EDH ese 1 000 peeo _ Special Original Output icon ENP Cea ere MRM J so CGR a MOY oor DE eo orn zoom BEXTIRO LI E E _APPLI Application key SE py ge p ee Par oy Ye FREON Rotation Off key SORT gt i Acs Vl APS STORE lt Store key Notice message gt 2ESERVE JOB O ORIGINAL COUN fata e Memory indicator Output Mode keys Reserve job count Original count NOTE The original count displayed in the center of the message area counts the original pages placed in the EDH as they are scanned A duplex original as well as a simplex original count as 1 When scanning from the platen glass the counter increases by 1 for every image scanned The popup menu appears on the Basic Screen to select the basic copying conditions NOTE During the process of successive copying jobs the message Warming up may be displayed in the message area of the Basic Screen to maintain the copy image quality Basic Operations How to Make a Basic Copy continued The Basic Screen continued 1 Position the original document in the EDH or on the platen glass 2 Press Start to start copying with initial settings or make other sel
23. 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu 2 Touch Z FOLDING to highlight it 3 Touch OK on the popup menu to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen The Z FOLDING icon will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area 4 Select additional copying features as required 5 Enter the desired print quantity 6 Position originals in the EDH When using Store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 37 7 Press Start A CAUTION When the selected print quantity exceeds the Finishers maximum capacity remove the printed sheets while paper is exiting to avoid paper mishandling 7 21 Output Modes Three Folding Mode The Three Folding mode is available only when the FN 10 Finisher option is installed In this mode the original image is copied on 8 5 x11 R copy paper and output to the Booklet tray of the finisher O Copy paper size 8 5 x11 R A4R 20 Ib paper recommended O Max number of folded sheets 20 Ib Bond 3 sheets O Paper weight 16 24 Ib Special stock 20 Ib paper is recommended O Booklet tray capacity 50 sets max of 1 sheet folded set 50 sheets O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Sort Staple sort Group Output modes using secondary tray Folding Stapling amp Folding Punch Z Folding O Incompatible Special Originals None O Incompatible Applications Transparency Interleave Book Copy Program Job Reverse Image i gt lt aaae
24. Cleaning the Document Glass and Inner Surface of the EDH The platen glass and the inner surface of the EDH should be kept clean Otherwise soil marks may be copied Raise the EDH and clean the glass and inner surface of the EDH with a clean soft cloth NOTES 1 The glass may also be cleaned with a soft cloth dampened slightly with water or with an antistatic cleaner recommended by your service representative 2 Never use paint solvents such as benzene or thinners to clean any portion of the copier 14 15 Section 15 Troubleshooting Call for Service 15 2 Memory Overflow 15 4 Power OFF ON Screen 15 5 Clearing Mishandled Paper 15 6 Copying Hints 15 8 15 1 Troubleshooting Call for Service A CAUTION A Call for Service message indicates a machine condition that requires the attention of your service representative Call for Service Screen TEL 0123 456 7890 FAX 987 654 3210 1 Immediately make note of the Report code number indicated in the upper portion of the screen 2 Turn OFF the main switch and main power switch 3 Unplug the machine 4 Contact your service representative and report the condition and code number 15 2 Troubleshooting Call for Service continued Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble If
25. Display the Entry List of the desired Adress E Htp 1011 32 21 eta F eco item as described in step 5 Click on the entry name to be changed Maximum 18 Characters Maximum 200 Characters I Registered as daily use when checked The window for changing the selectd item will be displayed ou Change the contents as desired then click on Registration The registered ei OB a oe ae oes I SBF content will be displayed Click on Back to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window 7 Delete the registered contents Display the Entry List of the desired item as described in step 5 Click on the check box in the Delete column of the item to be deleted then click on Delete If all the items are to be deleted click on SelectAll then click on Delete Registered as follows Fle Edt view es Tools Help Favor Het e gt O a Asean Gyrevortes Gun S 30 fess ET Fte 07 32201 eotorn pscar enh Email Delete The window for deleting the selected item will be displayed NOTE Click on the check box again to release the selection Confirm the registered name to be deleted then click on Yes Click on Back on the web browser to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window 11 32 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Setting Scan Transmission Function continued 8 To use gr
26. oN Frame Frame erasure N hg gt l PE let erasure Set original Frame Fold Frame erasure erasure erasure General copying Frame Erasure Fold Erasure Frame Fold Erasure copying copying copying 9 29 Applications Frame Fold Erasure continued 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Frame Fold Erasure to display the Frame Fold Erasure Selection Screen 3 Touch Frame Erasure All sides or Frame Erasure Each side Touch Fold Erasure to use the Fold erasure mode e Touch Frame Erasure All sides to enter the frame erasure amount of the up down right and left sides collectively using the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key from 1 300 mm e Touch Frame Erasure Each side to enter the frame erasure amount of the up down right or left side individually Touch UP SIDE RIGHT SIDE DOWN SIDE or LEFT SIDE then use the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key to enter the desired amount from 1 300 mm e To enter the fold erasure amount touch Fold Erasure then touch FOLD Use the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key to enter the desired amount from 1 99 mm Frame Fold Erasure Selection Screen Frame Fold Erasure Selection Screen with Each side selected with FOLD selected LFram e Fold 00 eK o 99 MARK Application LFrame Fold 2 5 lt FRAME gt UP 2 3 5 6 UP Frame Erasure FRAME Sipe All sides andor fold
27. 1 Touch the desired copying condition key on the Mode Check Screen to highlight it NOTES Any key that cannot be highlighted indicates that the copying condition cannot be changed from the Mode Check Screen e Although the following application functions can be highlighted they cannot be changed but only released by touching RELEASE SETTING Overlay Non image area erase Reverse image AUTO layout All lmage Area 2 Touch CHANGE SETTING The LCD will display the appropriate screen to change the copying condition selected MEMORY STORE J 100 96 e Selecting a basic copying condition key will display the Basic Screen e Selecting Enhance Mode Special Orig or Original key will display the Special Original popup menu See Section 8 e Selecting an application function key will display the Change Application Selection Screen When BOOK MARK has been checked on a subsequent screen selecting the application function key will jump to that screen See p 9 2 for details 6 44 Basic Operations Check Mode and Proof Copy continued 3 Change the setting as desired then restore the Mode Check Screen to return to the checking steps or to the Basic Screen to start copying To release the settings Mode Check Screen CHECK MODE E APPLICATION MODE 1 ON Reverse image is cancel This JOB
28. ect one of following ite System initial setting 5 Paper type Special size set 1 ICHINOSE Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting E C M function setting 3 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment 5 10 RETURN DELETE 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 5 Lock delete program memory to display the Lock Delete Program Memory Screen BRK KRRKERKKERERE To lock unlock a Program memory 1 Touch the key on the left side of the desired Job number Use arrow keys to scroll to the desired Job number if required 2 The lock icon will appear on the touched key to show that the selected job is locked The previously locked Job will be unlocked when selected and the lock icon on the touched key will disappear To delete a Program memory 1 Touch the Job number you want to delete Use arrow keys to scroll to the desired Job number if required 2 Touch DELETE Selected programs and the name will be deleted from the Program memory 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen 4 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 24 Key Operator Mode Pap
29. 8 6 Special Original Special Original continued Mixed Original continued Mixed size originals APS mode ee 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu 2 Touch Mixed Original 3 Select additional copying features as desired NOTE To cancel the change before returning to the Basic Screen touch CANCEL To recall the standard setting of the Special Originals touch RECALL STANDARD 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and to return to the Basic Screen 5 Select APS mode to copy each original size to a matching copy size in 1 1 mode or select AMS mode to copy all originals to the same paper size with a ratio selected automatically APS is automatically selected To select AMS touch the tray key on the Basic Screen to select the desired copy size 6 Enter the desired print quantity 7 Position mixed originals FACE UP in the EDH 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 and 5 5 x8 5 mixed or 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 and 5 5 x8 5 mixed When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make the Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 8 Press Start After copying is completed press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 8 7 Special Original Special Original continued Z Folded
30. Image store password Eos a 9 MANUAL aje D Kjt N pepene u v x SCANNER 0 1 2 3 a c HDD gt pc 1 CHARACTER DELETE PREVIOUS CHANGE DATA SEND SYSTEM SEREEN CANCEL Job Name Entry Screen Scanner Setting Screen o name a Align original o D 0 JOB NAME DATE STATUS ABCD 1111 2003 08 03 OUTPUT COPY MODE COPY DENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION TA A EDH ise 1 000 e ey a B p EFGH3333 2003 08 19 A oF 22 ARS SBat 85t z USN 2 gt 1 3 Nornai 200m J ie S APPLI SANE 752 E pam RE anaro Wal TORT MALA io oe oo 1 Press Mode to light up the Scan LED The Scan Server Setting Menu Screen will display 2 Touch IMAGE STORE DELETE to display the Image Data Store Delete Site Selection Screen 3 Enter the desired image data password in up to 8 characters from the touch screen keypad To correct an entry touch 1 CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character then enter the correct password 4 If the password is correct touch OK to display the Job Name Entry Screen Enter the desired job name in up to 8 characters from the touch screen
31. NOTES 1 The APPLI key on the Basic Screen will be highlighted when application selections have been made 2 When incompatible selections are made the last key touched will be selected 3 To cancel individual functions in application mode touch the highlighted key To cancel all application selections touch ALL CLEAR key on the Application Selection Screen 9 2 Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Use Sheet Cover Insertion in copy mode or blank mode to insert chapter sheets or separator sheets into the finished set as well as front and back covers Specifications for Sheet Cover Insertion Scan and store originals into memory then print all the pages collectively Max insert sheets 30 locations from 1 999 including front and back covers Original paper 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 13 Ib 34 Ib AMS Automatic Magnification Selection Functions when a different copy size is selected Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions APS Group Cover Sheet mode Rotation Sort Rotation Group Punch using PK 2 Punch kit Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Tab Paper Incompatible Applications Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat except 2 4 8 Repeat AUTO Layout Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory aaan OU Sheet Cover Insertion Screen overs and o BOOK pce01 0 Dp en pre 0 MARK Jf Application L S C Insertion COYERS INSERT
32. ORY 100 In this case you can still continue the reserve job setting 1 Touch ADD PAPER to display the Basic Screen for the print job When the arrow key flashes touch the key to scroll to the ADD PAPER key then touch it to display the Basic Screen for the print job 2 Confirm the empty tray and supply the paper When paper supply is completed ADD PAPER changes to STOP 3 Press Start The print job will be reprocessed 4 Touch FREE JOB to continue setting the reserve job 6 34 Basic Operations Store Mode Store mode allows you to scan multiple originals by touching the STORE key on the Basic Screen after setting copying conditions and then outputting the complete set by pressing Start Platen store mode scan originals from the platen glass EDH store mode scan originals from the EDH Platen Store Mode Use Platen store mode for originals that cannot be fed through the EDH due to thickness size or condition When scanning thick originals that require keeping the EDH open select Non image area erase to prevent exposure of the glass area around the border of the original This feature ensures a clean copy result and reduces toner consumption The Non image area erase mode automatically releases after the original for which it is selected is scanned Additional images may be scanned g Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions None O Incompatible Special Originals None O Incompatible Applications Storing
33. Density Shift Text 2 0 5 To select the Photo mode touch Photo to highlight it then press Utility The following message will be displayed Density Shift Photo 2 0 5 To select the Increase contrast mode touch Increase Contrast to highlight it then press Utility The following message will be displayed Density Shift Increase contrast 3 0 5 3 Press any key from 0 5 using the keypad to determine the Density shift 4 Touch OK on the Special Original popup menu Density shift is determined 6 15 Basic Operations Lens Mode Automatic Paper Selection APS APS detects the size of originals placed on the EDH or platen glass and automatically selects and feeds copy paper of the same size or selects an appropriate size according to the magnification ratio selected If the appropriate copy paper is not loaded in any tray no copying will be performed and a message will prompt you to load the appropriate paper O Original sizes detected are 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R Wide paper sizes cannot be detected O Incompatible AMS The relation of original size magnification ratio and copy paper size is shown below Copy size Original size Copy size 11x17 8 5x14 8 5x11 8 5x11R 5 5x8 5 5 5x8 5R 0 250 0 500 5 5x8 5 0 250 0 500 OXO SSSI 0 510
34. c ccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeseneeeseaeeessaeessaes 7 5 Staple Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray cc ccccsceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeeeesaes 7 6 Group Mode Using Primary Main Tray 0 cececcceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeea 7 9 Output Modes Using Secondary Sub Tray cccccccceceeeeeeseeeeeseneeeseneeeteneeeeeeeees 7 10 Output Mode for Machine with Shift Tray cccccecccceeeceeeseneeeseeeeeseneeeseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeaes 7 12 Folding and Stapling amp Folding Modes cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeseaaeeseaeeseaeeeeeneeeeaas 7 14 Punch Mode sasiore cere reece ieee ee i eens elise geen 7 17 Z FOIGING ModE na A RA A EAE aE i TAT 7 20 Three Folding Mode crearii ereina aE eia EAEE EE ea EAN EEE ATAA ATAKEA 7 22 Cover Inserter Ess aireeniicnai enoei annonis ha meirinne aadisa ndase iei aanb n ttin oaia ki naina 7 24 Manual FISHING arosi edie etn EEOAE EEEN EE A 7 27 Output Mode for Machine without Finisher ssseeessseseesresereesirserrserrerrrrsrirsrrrrsrrnserns 7 30 Face Down Exits aci isa ois GA ne AOE AEE S E ities TEEN A A AE 7 31 Face Up E a eaka aE ARATAI AREA EEA eee ate ee i ee ASAA 7 34 Section 8 Special Original Original DireGtion A E E E EETA A T 8 2 Original Binding MOC isitar iea a aaa ae p Re ete eae aa iS 8 3 Text Photo Enhance ai aa aaas aaa cg ac aa a eaa Naaa aa eee esdete nade deece de caseacesieapes 8 4 SPeCial Original aaeeei einde manana aa aea
35. ccceseceeeneceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeseeneeeseneees 3 22 HDD Management Password ecceecceeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaeeeeestaeeeeena 3 23 Section 4 Paper Information Positioning Originals on the Platen Glass 0 cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneeeeeeeeseaeeesaaes 4 2 Positioning an Original for Manual Copying ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseaeees 4 2 Using the Electronic Document Handler EDH 00 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaes 4 3 Positioning Originals airn i a a aee esia iie aeda Teea Ea aiaia ye iae 4 4 Positioning Mixed Originals ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseaeeeeeeeseseeeeseaeeseeeeeeieeeesnees 4 5 Paper in Main Body TrayS cccccsecceeeseseeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesnaeeeeessaeeeeestaaeeeeeneaaees 4 6 Paper in C 403 Large Capacity Cassette Option c cccscceeseeeeeeeeeeteeseneeeeeneeeeeaees 4 7 Paper in C 404 Large Capacity Cassette Option c cccecceseeeeeeeeeeeseeseneeetsneeeeeaees 4 7 Paper in Automatic Duplex Unit ec eeeennee eee eeenee eee eenaaeeeeeeesaeeeeeeesaaeesenenieeeeeeneaaes 4 8 Paper in Multi Sheet Bypass Tray cccccccecesceeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeaeesesaeeseaaeeseaaeeseaeeeteneeeeeaees 4 8 Paper in FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher Option 0 ccccceceseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeeeseaees 4 9 FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher Primary Main Tray oseere 4 9 FN 121 FN 10 FN 115
36. O HELP is unavailable in the Key Operator mode Help Screen Key Operator Password Entry Screen P MOD gt e ey Ope EDH a FOR ASSISTANCE PAPER SUPPLY f HELP MENU TEL STAPLE SORELY SUPPLY Key operator password 4 PUNCH PAPER PAPER SUPPLY SUPPLY PAPER SUPPLY PAPER SUPPLY PAPER SUPPLY KEY OPERATOR CANCEL Key Operator Mode Screen 1 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 one of follo one of follo Tray auto select setting Side 2 lens adjustment Energy saver setting Finisher adjustment Memory switch setting HOD management setting System initial setting 5 Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting E C M function setting 3 Weekly timer Machine management list print Scan transmission setting Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment Call remote center 20 Non image area erase setting y RETURN elle RETURN Key Operator Mode Screen 3 21 Background adjustment 22 Timing adjustment 23 Centering adjustment 2 RETURN 13 2 Key Operator Mode To the Key Operator continued How to Access the Key Operator Mode 1 Press the Help button on the Control panel to display the Help Screen 2 Touch the Key Operator Mode on the Help Screen The Key Operator Password Entry Screen displays when the 4 digit Key Operator password is set by your service representative Otherwise
37. ja caution lA PRECAUCION 2 PRECAUCION ja cuvano A A CAUTION FN 121 FN 10 Finisher A ATTENTION A CAUTION A N CAUTION A ATTENTION A VORSICHT NPRECAUCION NATTENZIONE _ To avoid injury DO NOT put your hand on top of the printed sheets Be sure to hold both sides of the printed sheets when A CAUTION A ATTENTION A PRECAUCION A CUIDADO ACAUTION FN 10 Finisher only CAUTION N Inside the lower paper FN 121 FN 10 Finisher exit outlet is the roller drive unit DO NOT put A CAUTION your hand into it Use care after opening the eeu youlmiay pe paper exit outlet DO NOT put J removing them and DO NOT leave your hand on the printed sheets while the primary main tray goes up your hand into it otherwise you may be injured Safety Information Machine Labels continued Label Locations continued JacauTion amp CAUTION A ATTENTION JAATTENTION A voRSICHT 4 PRECAUCION PRECAUCION ATTENZIONE lacuavo nae ne CAUTIO To avoid injury DO NOT put your hand on top of the printed sheets Be sure to hold both sides of the printed sheets when removing them and DO NOT leave your hand on the pr
38. c ceeeeccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeseaeeeseaeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneaeeesags 14 2 Using the HELP Key ss cc aane A teense tetas AS 14 2 Loading Paper in Tray 1 and 2 0 eeecceee cee eeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaes 14 3 Loading Paper in Tray 3 And 4 cc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaaeeeeeteaeeeeeeseneaeeeeeneaaes 14 4 Loading Paper in LCC C 403 C 404 c eeecceceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseneeeseaaeeseneeesseeeeeneeeeaas 14 5 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 3 OF 4 cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeas 14 6 Loading Tabbed Sheets in LCC C 403 C 404 eececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseneeeteaeeees 14 7 Changing Paper Size of Tray 3 And 4 0 cceeesceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeesenaeeeneaeeee 14 8 Adding Toner asoini iS ieee edie ede ttl end eel AEA eee reeves 14 9 Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN 121 FN 10 Finisher 14 10 Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN 115 Finisher 14 11 Empty Trash Basket of PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch Kit 14 12 Empty Trash Basket of ZK 3 Z Fold Kit 0 ee cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeees 14 13 Preventive Maintenance ccccecsceeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeencaaeeeeeesaaaeeeeneeaeeeeee 14 14 Reading the PM Counter 0 c ccccccceceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaeeseaeeeeseaeesteaeeeseaeeeseaeeess 14 14 Printing the PM Counter cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeseaaeeseaeeseaeeeeneaeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeaee
39. 6 28 Store Mode 6 35 Interrupt Mode 6 38 Rotation 6 40 Check Mode and Proof Copy 6 43 Help Mode 6 46 on EDH unit FREE op OUTPUT copy MODE coPYDENSITY LENS MODE PAPER ta 85x11 85x sre B 5x11RO _ Arru PORTER Basic Operations How to Make a Basic Copy The Basic Screen When power is turned on the Basic Screen displays after warm up when Energy saver mode is activated when ECM password is set when Key counter is used or when Panel Reset mode is manually or automatically restored All copying selections can be initiated from the Basic Screen whether selected with screen keys or conventional keys such as Program Memory When the Electronic Copy Monitor ECM is activated a valid 8 digit ECM password assigned by the Key Operator must be entered before copying can be performed See p 5 4 All of the initial settings in the Basic Screen except Print Quantity can be changed by the Key Operator in the Initial Setting Menu Screen Master Sub HDD Original direction Rotation icon
40. E K C function settin Cancel Click on E K C function setting The Enter Network Password dialog box will be displayed Enter ekc in the User Name text box and an 8 digit master key code in the Password text box then click on OK The E C M Function Setting menu window will be displayed 4 Add an E C M data Click on E K C data add The E C M Data Setting window will be displayed Enter the following items to register a new E C M data then click on Apply Number Automatically assigned Password 8 digits max Name 8 characters max Limit 999 999 copies max NOTE To clear the text boxes click on Reset To cancel adding a new E C M data click on Back or any E C M Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window E C M Data Setting Window file Edt Vew Favorites Tock Hep oak gt gt O A a Geach Garavortes Guin G B SO a Address E htp ADT 82001 ecform eksturs onbtrI PaesTyporadd es Up 0 8 digid Upto 8 characters ABC 20 1 Up to p099 11 23 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Setting E C M Function Environment Setup continued NOTES Error Message e A duplicate password or name will be rejected with an error message However duplicating a pass word is possible using the Key Operator setting Refer to p 13 19 e The Name entry box accepts letters capital let
41. Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x11 Paper weight 16 45 Ib Number of holes 3 holes Hole diameter 0 315 0 020 8 mm 0 5 mm Hole pitch 4 252 0 020 108 mm 0 5 mm Weight PK 2 4 4 Ib 2 kg PK 5 6 6 Ib 3 kg Power source Finisher Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5R Paper weight 16 45 Ib Number of holes 2 holes Hole diameter 0 315 0 020 8 mm 0 5 mm Hole pitch 2 756 0 020 70 mm 0 5 mm Weight 6 6lb 3kg Power source Finisher Paper size Punching 11 x17 8 5 x11 Z Folding 11 x17 8 5 x14 Paper weight 16 45 Ib 16 24 Ib for Z Folding mode Punching mode Number of holes 3 holes Hole diameter 0 315 0 020 8 mm 0 5 mm Hole pitch 4 252 0 020 108 mm 0 5 mm Z Folding mode Folding type Z folding for 11 x17 double folding for 8 5 x14 Folded width 215 mm or less for 11 x17 261 6 mm or less for 8 5 x14 Weight 83 6 Ib 38 kg Power source supply from outlet Paper type Plain paper 13 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Paper size 8 5 x11 A4 Dimensions Width 16 9 in 430 mm Depth 25 2 in 639 mm Height 27 2 in 690 mm Weight 66 Ib 30 kg Power source supply from main body Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice 16 7 Specifications Large Capacity Cassette C 404 Paper type Plain paper 13 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x1
42. The Weekly Timer is a copier management function that shuts down power to the machine on a daily or hourly basis and can be programmed specifically for lunch breaks weekends and holidays or any time the copier is not required In addition Timer Interrupt can be enabled with or without a password requirement to allow temporary use of the machine during periods when power is shut down by the Timer function Conditions required to use the Weekly Timer e The power plug is inserted into the socket e The power switch is turned on e The current date and time are correctly set If the Weekly Timer needs to be activated on your machine contact your service representative The following Weekly Timer settings can be made 1 Weekly timer ON OFF setting Enable and disable the Timer function 2 Timer Setting Specify the times that the copier will turn ON and OFF for each day of the week or the entire week 3 Timer action ON OFF Setting Specify the working days of the machine by the Timer for all Mondays through Sundays and or individually for each day of the specified month 4 Lunch hour off setting Specify the lunch time interval during which the copier will turn off and on 5 Timer interrupt password set Require Password entry for the Timer off function and establish the amount of usage time NOTES 1 The time is set in terms of the 24 hour clock where hour 1 is the first hour after midnight and hour 24 is mid
43. The window now provides the paper tray configuration engine configuration and option information NOTES The same information will be provided also in the Job Status window See p 11 21 e Click on REFRESH in the window to update the information 11 14 Network Function Job Status Mode Follow the procedure below to display the current job status job list including reserved jobs and job information and information on up to 16 previous jobs Web Utilities Window Fie Edt view Favorites Tools Help ok 9 OA Al Orah rws Grew GS a Ar a Address het 10 11 32 20 coformsiobstatus_en hl pm Fri E Web Utilities oe Dim210 Print ready eae Jobs Waiting Remain Time Minute 3 2 osonese BRE Ereish AEE Job Job Job Eriorityl Eriority2 Priority3 Job 101 Job 102 Job 103 Job 104 Job 105 Job 106 Job 107 Job 108 Job 1D9 Job 1010 Job 1011 Job 1012 Job 1013 Job 1014 Job 1015 Job IDE 1 Open the Web Utilities window Japenese EFIR English3 Engine Status D210 Print ready Jobs Waiting Remain Time Minute Job A Job Priority PJ ority2 Priority3 Job 01 Job 102 Job 103 Job 104 Job 105 Job 106 Job 107 Job 108 Job 109 Jab 1010 Job 1011 Job ID Job 1013 Job 1014 Job 1015 Joh 1D16 NOTE See p 11 18 for detailed procedure to access the Web Utilities 2 Click on Job Status Job Priority 1 Job Number f Job Attribute Copier Job
44. 2 E C M all count reset 3 E C M function setting LARGE SIZE 000000 000000 SET RETURN Change Add COUNT RESET RETURN ECM Data Change Screen ECM Data Add Screen 0001 0006 00000000 00000000 010000 000000 CANCEL CANCEL Password Duplication Screen Name Duplication Screen 0006 Fionuni iu 0007 Password Pfaff RE SET Password 000 Name VES No Name T Limit ooo is Os Ge OS Limit CANCEL OK CANCEL 13 18 Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 continued E C M Data Edit 1 continued 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 4 E C M function setting The ECM Master Key Code Screen displays if a code is required 3 Enter your 8 digit ECM master key code then touch OK t
45. AON 10 5 Program Memory Program Memory Form Make a copy of this form to record frequently used copy jobs stored in Program Memory Update the information when changes are made Make additional copies as needed JOB NUMBER NAME JOB DESCRIPTION Program Memory Program Memory Form continued JOB NUMBER NAME JOB DESCRIPTION 10 7 Section 11 Network Function To Use Server Function 11 2 Image Store Delete Mode 11 4 Image Store amp Output Mode 11 8 Image Recall Mode 11 10 To Use Web Utilities 11 12 Machine Information Mode 11 14 Job Status Mode 11 15 HDD Job Information Mode 11 16 Environment Setup Mode 11 20 Scan Server setting menu Select one ot tollowing mo IMAGE ORE DELETE 11 1 Network Function To Use Server Function Use Server function to accumulate scanned images into built in DIMM memory then store the image data in HDD option so that the data can be recalled to DIMM and output as needed This function also allows you to store the image data for normal copying procedures NOTE Installation of the optional HDD HDD 2 is required for the Server function with HDD Server Function The Server function provides the following four modes 1 Image Store
46. Noncomplete Job List Screen NON COMPLETE JOB LIST DISPLAY NO USER NAME FILE NAME FACTOR NON COMPLETE JOB DOES NOT EXIST 1 USERNAME 12345678 FILENAME 12345678 USER ID DIFFER CANCEL 2 USERNAME1234 FILENAME 1234 3 USERNAME 1 FILENAME 1 MEMORY FULL 4 To return to the Basic Screen touch OK on the Job Status Screen 6 32 Basic Operations Reserve continued Mishandled Paper During the Reserve Setting If a misfeed occurs with the print scan job in progress while you are setting a reserve job the PRINT SCAN JOB key on the screen will change to flashing JAM key When more than four jobs have been specified and the key of the print scan job in trouble is not currently displayed on the screen the arrow key to scroll to than job will flash Basic Screen id 2 a origina Please pre Q ORE b a g complete a oi JAM Jog01 STATUS OUTPUT ciPY MODE COPYDENSITY LENS MODE FUNCTION SPECIAL OUTPUT yi APPL STAPLE a ROTATION sont sre If originals of the reserve job are already scanned when the misfeed occurs the reserve job printing can be performed after the jam is cleared and the cleared job is completed 1 Touch JAM to display the Jam Position Scree
47. Output Modes Output Mode for Machine with Finisher continued Output Modes Using Secondary Sub Tray continued Output Mode popup menu Group Face up ode Q 0 ary EXIT TRAY BINDING OUTPUT lt SUB TRAY gt HDD STORE RIGHT p amp LEFT BINDING al TANDEM UP BINDING FACEDOWN RECALL STANDARD GROUP CANCEL OK
48. 0 610 5x11R 5 5x8 5 5 5x8 5 0 510 0 610 e 0 620 0 650 6911 0 620 0 650 2 z AE 5 5x8 5 5 5x8 5 _ F 0 660 0 70 8 5x14 5044 0 660 0 770 lt 2 5x11R maaan s 0 780 0 790 Gaal ETT 0 780 0 790 amp 0 800 1 000 8 5x14 0 800 1 000 E 8 5x11 8 5x11A S 1 010 1 290 11x17 Badin 82x11 1 010 1 290 1 300 1 550 11x17 11x17 11x17 ia 8 5x14 1 300 1 550 eh X 1 560 4 000 11x17 1 560 4 000 Rotation functions Basic Operations Lens Mode continued Automatic Magnification Selection AMS AMS is one of the initial settings that functions when the EDH is used and Copy Size is selected manually O Incompatible APS Change magnification Book Copy Overlay Non Image Area Erase Repeat AUTO Layout Storing Image in Overlay Memory An appropriate reduction or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically and applied to the image on the copy size AMS automatically calculates and selects the correct ratio Wide paper size can be specified when the AMS is in use In this case the same magnification ratio as that of the standard size will be selected automatically AMS ratios are shown in the table below ORIGINAL SIZE AMS TABLE 14 17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R A4 11 x17 ary 1 000 1 214 1 000 1 294 1 294 2 000 0 941 8 5 x14 0 773 1 000 0 773 1
49. 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper O Bypass tray paper capacity up to 100 sheets 20 Ib O Bypass tray Transparency film capacity 1 sheet 1 Open the Multi sheet bypass tray located on the right side of the copier When loading 11 x17 or 8 5 x14 paper withdraw the right edge of the Multi sheet bypass tray 2 Load copy paper and align the paper guides to the paper size Load Transparency film one sheet at a time or stack paper up to 100 sheets 20 Ib Bond 6 11 Basic Operations Using the Multi Sheet Bypass Tray continued Load offset tabbed sheets so that the tab extensions are on the right at the rear not front of the tray The top sheet is designated face up as the first tab of the finished set Subsequent offset tab sheets follow in sequence The tab extension width should be 0 5 12 5 mm or less When loading tabbed sheets in the Multi sheet bypass tray be sure to specify the paper type as Tab paper on the Paper Type Size Setting Screen otherwise mishandled paper may occur See p 6 24 to p 6 26 Example 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set 1st TAB 1st TAB Section 1 eer ied 2nd TAB Introduction 2nd TAB Printed side 3rd TAB 3rd TAB ONE FINISHED SET Example 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets 1st TABS 1stTAB 2nd TAB Section 1 Section 1 Section 1 Caza
50. 20 21 22 23 LCC Large capacity cassette C 404 option holds 4 000 sheets ZK 3 Z Fold kit option punches file holes and or Z folds the output copies FN 10 Finisher option sorts staple sorts and groups into finished sets folds or staple amp folds copies into booklet styled sets and also folds max 3 copies in three With PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punching kit option installed file holes can be punched in the output copies Cover Inserter E option loads cover sheet paper and feeds the sheet as cover 3 4 Machine Information Machine Configuration continued Internal Machine 7 Total counter hee gt 1 Toner cartridge 2 Toner cartridge holder lever 6 Fixing unit 3 Conveyance Fixing unit 4 LeverA 5 Drum unit O O Internal Machine Call outs NO o1 Toner cartridge holds toner and is to be replaced when supplying toner Toner cartridge holder lever can be pulled forward to withdraw the toner cartridge holder for replacing the toner cartridge Conveyance Fixing unit passes the paper through the drum unit and fuses the toner onto the copy paper and is to be withdrawn for removal of mishandled paper Lever A can be moved to withdraw the conveyance fixing uni
51. 3 Touch OK on each screen to complete the setting and restore the Scan Transmission Setting Screen 5 Touch OK to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 6 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 57 Key Operator Mode Non Image Area Erase Setting 20 Select the mode of Non Image Area Erase function to be in effect when this feature is selected on the Application Selection Screen after power is turned on or after Panel Reset occurs Key Operator Mode Screen 2 Non Image Area Erase Setting Screen ERASE MODE ORIGINAL DENS elect one of following ite Tray auto select setting Side 2 lens adjustment Energy saver setting Finisher adjustment Memory switch setting HDD management setting Dark Dark Norma Light Machine management list print Scan transmission setting Call remote center Non image area erase setting J Oblique erase Rectangle erase Light 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 To display menus 11 to 20 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch the Lower arrow key 2 Touch 20 Non image area erase setting to display the Non Ilmage Area Erase Setting Screen 3 Select the desired erase mode and original density level Touch AUTO to let the machine select the erase mode and density level automati
52. FINISHER STAPLE RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED The 2 staple position functions only on copy paper that is loaded vertically portrait style COPIES SKEW IN THE STAPLED SETS Check to see if copy paper is excessively curled in the tray Reload the copy paper upside down USING PUNCH COPIES CANNOT BE PUNCHED Check to see if the message Trash basket of Punch kit Z Fold kit is full is displayed Empty the trash basket of Punch kit or Z Fold kit COPIES CANNOT BE STAPLED OR PUNCHD IN POSITION Check to make sure the side guide plates are securely aligned to the copy paper in the paper tray to be used Check to see if copy paper is excessively curled in the tray Reload the copy paper upside down 15 10 Section 16 Machine Specifications Specifications 16 2 16 1 Specifications Product Name Configuration Photoreceptor Method Toner Recommended Operating Environment Warm Up Panel Reset First Copy Out Time Copy Rate Continuous Copy Voltage Grounding Power Consumption Noise Level main body Automatic Modes Magnification Di5510 Di7210 Console with stationary platen OPC drum Laser Electrostatic Black cartridge type 50 86 F 10 30 C 10 80 RH Di5510 Approx 5 0 min 68 20 C 50 RH Di7210 Approx 6 0 min 68 20 C 50 RH Off 30 sec 1 min 1 5 min 2 min 2 5 min 3 min 3 5 min 4 min 4 5 min 5 min From Platen Glass Di5510 Approx 3 4 sec for 8 5
53. File Pass zzz afrfsftfufyvyf f x Login Anonymous yjz Poy J j jJ Password xx Delete Capran Sign S Tea 2 13 56 Key Operator Mode Scan Transmission Setting 19 continued k Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password To display menus 11 to 20 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch the Lower arrow key 2 Touch 19 Scan transmission setting to display the Scan Transmission Setting Screen 3 Select the desired address type Touch E Mail HDD or FTP to display the registered name keys on each page NOTE Change E Mail Address Screen is provided with the GROUP key Touch the key to change the group name if desired 4 Select the name key to be changed or deleted Touch the Lower arrow key to scroll or Upper arrow key to return To delete the address Touch to highlight the desired name key then touch DELETE The selected key will be deleted from the screen To change the address 1 Touch to highlight the desired name key then touch CHANGE The subsequent screen according to the address type will be displayed See previous page 2 Touch to highlight the registered item key on the left then change the information under that key using the alphabet keys on the screen
54. However the copier will become available if you perform the following procedure Print Copy Scan a fo Nya Saver 3 CE Cm Interrupt SO Stop Panel Reset lt a A d 2 1 Press Energy Saver The Basic Screen will be displayed along with the messages shown below Please wait Copier is warming up Timer interrupt mode Enter password NOTE The Timer Interrupt password is not factory set and must be entered by the Key Operator see p 13 37 in Section 13 Key Operator Mode In the event the Timer Interrupt password has not been entered by the Key Operator the message shown in Step 3 will display instead 5 5 Copier Management Weekly Timer Function continued Timer Interrupt continued 2 Enter a 4 digit number Timer Interrupt password using the keypad on the control panel If an invalid password is entered enter a valid 4 digit password Timer interrupt mode Enter password xx gt 3 Press Start Input copy time O hour s 05 minute s 4 Enter a 1 digit hour ex 3 o clock is 3 using the keypad on the control panel 0 9 5 Press Start Input copy time is 3 hour s 05 minute s 6 Enter a 2 digit minutes ex 7 minutes is 07 using the keypad on the control panel 05 60 Input copy time is 3 hour s 07 minute s 7 Press Start Copying is available until the set time is up Align original on
55. Input Password ian E Japanese AGE Engbsh 3858 BFH hE 3 Display the E Mail Transmission Setting window Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then click on Apply Click on E Mail transmission setting The E Mail Transmission Setting window will be displayed NOTE The Extension for maintenance option will be exclusively used by your service representative 11 20 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Setting E Mail Transmission Function continued E Mail Transmission Setting Window Bile Edit View Favorites Tools Help E eek gt OA A Rah Favorites fristory Gh amp Address htip 10 11 2129 g0form copier jahtml z eco in E Mail transmission setting E Mail Transmission Sending Setting ft kctsc com Characters 10 a m2 138 option 900 Minimum 1200 Maximum 1200 10 mise 25 Default 25 Minimum 1 Maximum 99999 5 minute D second Minimum 30 seconds Maximum 5 minutes rainina ketse com Maximum 64 Characters F Service call JAM T Paper supply T Toner supply T PM call F Complete Job I Non Complete Job E Mail transmission T Staple cartridge supply T Finisher tray full T Dispose of trash Punch Apply Reset Sending test Sending test mail to Manager Back Main Page 4 Perform the setting Enter the IP address of the mail server IP address
56. KONICA MINOLTA User Man ual www konicaminolta net Di5510 Di7210 Recycled paper is used for the inside pages of this book Di5510 Di7210 User Manual ENERGY STAR Program The ENERGY STAR Program has been established to encourage the widespread and voluntary use of energy efficient technologies that reduce energy consumption and prevent pollution As an ENERGY STAR Partner we have determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency based on the following features Auto Low Power This function conserves energy by lowering the set temperature of the fixing unit In the standard setting Auto Low Power operates automatically when 15 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy with the copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time The time period for the Auto Low Power function can be set for 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes 120 minutes or 240 minutes See p 5 2 for details Automatic Shut Off This function achieves further energy conservation by partially turning the power supply OFF thereby reducing energy consumption to 20W or less In the standard setting Automatic Shut Off follows Auto Low Power operating automatically when 90 minutes have elapsed after completion of the last copy with the copier remaining in the ready to copy state during that time The time period for the Autom
57. Original Direction 8 2 Original Binding Mode 8 3 Text Photo Enhance 8 4 Special Original 8 6 Original Form 8 9 8 1 Special Original Original Direction Specify the direction of the originals placed on EDH or platen glass This setting is required to obtain copy results as expected when making double sided copies with binding position specified or when staple position is specified Originals on EDH Originals on platen glass mZ ial Eg i M ali s 2 2 ll OM HMM E DUPLEX SPECIAL BINDING ENHANCE ORIGINAL ORIGINAL eree T Normal FUNCTION UP o Increase Mixed Non STDP BINDING Contrast Original size RECALL FETT Tab STANDARD Folde al Photo Original lt 8 paper O canceL Text 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original pop
58. Setting E C M Function Environment Setup continued e Example E C M data list stored as a file The Another user count will be stored by the name of UNKNOWN in the last line 6 Set the E C M function Click on E K C function setting in the E C M Function Setting menu window see p 11 29 or from the menu in any subsequent window The E C M Function Setting window will be displayed Click on the radio button white circle of the desired selection item s so that a black dot appears in it Click on Apply The change made in the settings will be transmitted immediately for the user operations NOTES NUMBER PASSWORD NAME DUPLEXCOUNT COUNT LIMIT S CANLARGECOUNT SCANCOUNT 0001 00000001 KITA 000000 000000 000010 000000 000000 0002 00000002 TANAKA 000000 000000 000020 000000 000000 0003 00000003 YUZU 000000 000000 000030 000000 000000 0004 00000004 1S AMI 000000 000000 000040 000000 000000 0005 00000005 SUZUE 000000 000000 000060 000000 000000 0006 00000006 REAL 000000 000000 000070 000000 000000 0007 00000007 ISHII 000000 000000 000080 000000 000000 1001 00000000 UNKNOWN 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 Fie Git tion Favarkes Tode Hap Pek gt QB A search fairovertes Meda 4 G a Address E tp 10 11 92 201faoformjekcfune_en teni PeceTya fre ade EK C Function Setting ths curent job is completed Fie Edt vien Fatos Tods Hap Heko o O A A Asah Faot Bed
59. e All the image data stored in HDD will be checked and those having the same image data password will be listed e The printer data stored in HDD will also be listed 4 Search the desired image data To search a specific image data enter the job name of the desired image data in the Job Search text box then click on Search The result will be displayed as a list NOTES The search will be performed over the jobs having the same image data password collected in step 3 You cannot make a search of all the jobs for the given job name e The printer data stored in HDD will also be listed 11 16 Network Function HDD Job Information Mode continued Image Data Information Output Setting Dialogue Box Fie Edt view Favorites Tools Help tack gt O A A Osea Geiravertes Gree 4 3 5 3 Fees E itv 71011 32001 FeoformAhanb enh Output Setting Back Save ano Date Page Count 1 5 Check the image data information Click on Image on the right side of the desired job name to view the contents The reduced image of the first page of the selected data and detailed information will be displayed Click on Output to print the image data Proceed to step 6 Choosing Back will resume the searched job list 6 Output the image data Click on Output on the right side of the desired job name to print out the image data The Output Setting dialogue b
60. e To stop scanning press Stop 8 After scanning the overlaying original the Overlaying Image Data Storing Screen will be displayed The machine automatically starts to store the overlaying image data in the HDD The Overlaying Image Selection Screen will resume when the storing function is completed To continue to store the overlaying image data return to step 4 9 Touch OK to return to the Stamp Overlay Selection Screen 10 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen 11 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 9 48 Applications Overlay Memory continued To Overlay Image Stored in HDD The following procedure describes how to overlay the image stored in HDD onto each page copied in the job APS and AMS are automatically released Magnification is initially set to 1 1 This setting is changeable Original Copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions None Incompatible Special Originals None Incompatible Applications Reverse Image STAMP SET NUMBERING WATERMARK WATERMARK NUMBERING in Stamp aaau Application Selection Screen Stamp Overlay Selection Screen ele Appl icatio 0 elect desired AMP OVERLA o o 299K 30810 MARK Jf Application JoB 01 d press O L Stamp Overlay STAMP WATERMARK OYERLAY FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT GENT PAGE k STAMP NUMBERING WATERMARK R OVERLAY a ca 7 SET WATERMARK OVERLAY NUMBERING DATEL TIME
61. 1 008 files HDD Box No max 48 files FTP FTP server address max 48 files NOTES e The machine setting file can be stored in a PC so that it may be returned to the machine at any time and is available for common use if you have two or more machines The file transmitted to a PC being converted to a file type for batch processing can be edited effi ciently and returned to the machine e The file transmitted to a PC normally contains the four data types mentioned above however each data type can be made into a file and transmitted separately For details of E C M data see p 13 18 For details of Scan Transmission Setting see p 13 56 e The E C M Electronic Copy Monitor appears as E K C Electronic Key Counter in the Web Utilities windows e The exported setting file of this machine can be imported to another model and vice versa For details contact your service representative Web Utilities Window Fle Edt view Favorites SHE ee fess E htof10 11 ees J t0 11 32 20acomicone_e ae 8 Web Utilities a Environment Setup Taput Password EE Enik HH Japanece E 1 Open the Web Utilities window Web Utilities Environment Setup E Mail tran ettin Environment Setup T F a E NOTE See p 11 18 for detailed procedure to access the Web Utilities 2 Click on Environment Setup 3 Display the Setting File Import Export window Enter the
62. 20 lb paper with a thick paper cover O Output tray Booklet tray Specifications for Three Folding mode O Paper size 8 5 x11 R A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mm x 297mm O Paper weight 16 24 Ib 20 Ib paper is recommended O Folding capacity 3 sheets max 20 Ib paper O Output tray Booklet tray _ J Start Stop button a mM J S J A Stapling amp Folding 1 oblique staple 2 parallel staples Three Folding Punching 7 28 Output Modes Manual Finishing continued 1 Place a set of paper to be finished into the lower tray of the Cover Inserter E as described below for each mode then align the guide plate The Lower indicator light of Start Stop button will turn green tray e 1 oblique staple 2 parallel staples FACE UP e Punch FACE UP e Stapling amp Folding FACE UP for the outside of the finished set e Three Folding FACE UP for the outside of the folded set NOTE Refer to the specifications on previous page for available paper size and capacity in each mode 2 Press Staple Mode Selection button and or Punch button to select the desired mode NOTE Punch mode is compatible with 1 oblique staple 2 parallel staples or Stapling amp Folding mode 3 Press Start Stop button Finished sheets will be delivered to the appropriate tray according to the selected mode Guide plate NOTE If you want to stop
63. 5 Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting A 2 SIF o Sla 5x1 85x11 Ore B A IRE N SE 11x17 D E C M function setting 3 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment RETURN 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 2 Copier initial setting to display the Copier Initial Setting Screen 3 Make a selection for each mode as initial settings Touch EDH to select or deselect it NOTE The machine will restore the initial settings specified as above unless the Memory switch No 4 Program memory 30 auto recall is turned ON with the Program memory No 30 registered 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen 5 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 12 Key Operator Mode User Setting Mode 3 Set two user set density levels and three USERSETs of magnification User Density Level 1 Setting 1 Output copying samples from 16 density levels from Lighter to Normal or Normal to Darker then select the desired exposure and program it as USER
64. 8 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 9 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 33 Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued Timer Action On Off Setting 3 Use this function to set the On Off condition of the copier for a given month Set the On Off condition for specific days or collectively for all Mondays through Sundays of the given month The default setting is collective On for Mondays through Saturdays and Off for Sundays Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Timer Action On Off Setting Screen 1 Weekly timer ON OFF setting 12 C2 C3 e Block setting by day of the week 7 DEDO 13 on OFF J Fri OFF 20 Tue OFF Sat oN 2 Timer setting Timer action ON OFF setting 4 4 Lunch hour off setting 21 a 23 24 E B27 e OFF Sun ON Timer interrupt password set 28 29 30 31 Thu OFF RETURN CANCEL OK Timer Action Change Confirmation Screen Block setting by day of the week Fri QS or Sat ON Sun ON 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 9 Weekly timer Enter your 4 digit Weekly Timer master key code then touch OK to display t
65. APS AMS Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Special Originals Mixed Original Z Folded Original Applications Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Non Image Area Erase Reverse Image Frame Fold Erasure AUTO Layout Reduce amp Shift in Image Shift Overlay O Incompatible Conditions with Auto Detection Mode Basic copying conditions Using EDH Rotation 2 2 2 1 APS AMS Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Special Originals Mixed Original Z folded Original Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Reverse Image Frame Fold Erasure AUTO Layout All lmage Area Reduce amp Shift in Image Shift Stamp Overlay O Incompatible Conditions with Repeat Mode Basic copying conditions Rotation when magnification is changed from 1 000 APS AMS Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Special Originals Mixed Original Z folded Original Applications Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Non image Area Erase Reverse Image Frame Fold Erasure AUTO Layout Reduce amp Shift in Image Shift Overlay Overlay Memory 9 26 Applications Repeat Image continued NOTE The Auto Detection and Repeat mode of the Repeat image function may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass In this case consult your service representative about an ap
66. Knob Dil IP 2 Right lever eae ON 1 Z Fold kit front door ZK 3 Z Fold Kit Z Fole kit front door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper or waste paper Right lever opens to allow removal of mishandled paper Knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper Handle can be withdrawn to allow removal of mishandled paper Left lever opens to allow removal of mishandled paper Trash basket holds waste paper punched out 3 13 Machine Information Machine Configuration continued Optional Equipment continued 2 Top cover 1 Exit tray ie a a ee N 3 N oe ee OT 104 Shift tray 1 Exit tray holds sets output in Non sort mode Sort mode offset or Group mode offset 2 Top cover opens to allow clearing mishandled paper 3 14 Machine Information Site Requirements Unit inches mm Li i AT 18 7 h 25 6 de 157 37 4 30 2 ERO 18 9 475 650 400 950 766 AN 480 AN oh TS l F ae 63 8 h 44 9 i g 1140 A x l 5 Y O lol y 60 0 72 3 p 1525 1836 gt i Di5510 Di7210 Unit inches mm ry 3 9 x 47 100 gas A ida CO 193 86
67. MARK fApplication L Stamp Overlay CHARACTER eae URGENT LARGER STAMP TOP SECRET FOR YOUR INFORMATION PRINTING POSITION CHARACTER SIZE AA mio picur 20pt SET NUMBERING PRINTING POSITION AA mio picur ER CONFIDENTIAL IMPORTANT mio PRINTED PAGE aryr DRAFT DO NOT COPY ALL PAGES 0001 0002 0003 PRINTED PAGE ALL PAGES fag 000171000 0002 1000 1 1000 2 1000 STARTING No Lower LEFT CHARACTER PRINTED FINE Add OF CANCEL Page Numb ering Type Selection Screen 0 BOOK 2201 MARK J Application L stamp Overla PRINTING POSITION PAGE NUMBERING oF 1 5 2 5 3 5 orat acid sisia oR CHARACTER SIZE 14 pt TYPE GOTHIC PL P2 P3 COYER PRINT FRONT amp BACK PRINT ON 123 STARTING No PAGE 1 14 2018 ower CHAPTER 1 LET FINE ADJ OF POSITION CHARACTER PRINTED SIZE TYPE PAGE STARTING No CANCEL Watermark Selection Screen R MAR o BOOK 0610 MARK f Application L Stamp Overlat DENSITY WATER MARK FOR YOUR Kila CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION DO NOT COPY PLEASE DRAFT REPLY LIGHT NORMAL DARK FOR YOUR URGENT COMMENTS Darke FINE ADJ OF POSITION CANCEL OK Lower 1 LEFT FINE ADJ OF POSITION PRINTED STARTING No CHARACTER i CANCEL Date Time Type Selection Scr
68. Page number will not be printed or counted BLANK INSERT Print OFF Page number will not be printed but will be counted Skip page Page number will not be printed or counted O When Chapter is already selected Set numbering Page numbering and Watermark numbering each allow you to print chapter number on each chapter page in addition to each numbering function When used in duplex copying specified right left printing position will be automatically reversed on back pages When used in duplex copying and top bottom staple position is selected specified top bottom printing position will be automatically reversed on back pages O Image cutoff width leading end 5 mm trailing end 4 mm top and bottom 2 mm 9 39 Applications Stamp continued O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Tandem mode with SET NUMBERING and WATERMARK NUMBERING O Incompatible Special Originals None Incompatible Applications Reverse image Repeat except 2 4 8 Repeat Overlay with STAMP SET NUMBERING WATERMARK and WATERMARK NUMBERING Overlay Memory NOTE STAMP and WATERMARK are available only with the opthional HDD HDD 2 installed in the machine Without HDD these function keys will be grayed out to show inactivity Top Left T Middle T Right TOP SECRET a a ne aa ea oer STAMP f 03 10 10 10 30AM Middlg Left Middle M Right WATERMARK O C3 CD DATE TIME 0001 1000 2 5 0001 1000 0001 1000 00
69. Three Folding copy Output Mode popup menu gi He 0 BINDING STAPLE OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt HDD RIGHT lt amp LEFT al BINDING UP Pa BINDING Fy STORE TANDEM SORT alll PUNCH i croup COYER f STANDARD STAPLII vi ZDZ XFOLDING CANCEL aaam a agge FOLDING TFOLDING OK 7 22 Output Modes Three Folding Mode continued 1 Load 8 5 x11 R or A4R copy paper in a tray 2 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu 3 Touch THREE FOLDING to highlight it 4 Touch OK on the popup menu to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen The THREE FOLDING icon will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area 5 Select additional copying features as required Touch to highlight the 8 5 x11 R or A4R tray key if not already highlighted 6 Enter the desired print quantity 7 Position originals in the EDH When using Store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 37 NOTE Up to 3 originals can be three folded 8 Press Start 7 23 Output Modes Cover Inserter E The Cover Inserter E is available as an option on the FN 121 FN 10 finisher Load cover sheet paper into this device and use the sheets as front back covers and or insertions for copied sets output to the Main tray or use the sheets as booklet type covers for copied sets output
70. Use this function in conjunction with the Reserve function to increase efficiency of the copying job g Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions None O Incompatible Special Originals None g Incompatible Applications Image insert Book copy Storing image in Overlay Memory Basic Screen a 0 a Q g ad gn original o D E R FREE Jog01 STATUS OUTPUT COPY MODE COPYDENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION Hn USERSET a i I crilecos SPECII oor Da Ped CRAFTER pd 1 Touch STORE on the Basic Screen to highlight it 2 Make the desired copying selections 3 Position originals FACE UP on EDH If the number of originals exceeds 100 divide them into blocks not exceeding 100 sheets and load them in sequential order 4 Enter the print quantity using the keypad The entered quantity will be displayed on the upper right message area of the Basic Screen To change the print quantity press C clear and re enter the correct quantity 5 Press Start to scan the originals 6 Repeat steps 3 and 5 until all originals are scanned To delete the scanned data without printing press Stop then touch CANCEL on the popup menu to ensure that you delete the data 7 Touch STORE to exit the Sto
71. an appropriate measure for the current job situation Memory Overflow Management Screen OD Gj Droge Ale 0 100 SCAN son 01 STATUS OUTPUT capy mone copuncucmry pee mone l Copy cise FUNCTION Select management for memory full r i R A RJA This JOB is stopped eRIGINAL APPLI SCAN STOP Scan is stopped scanned data is output CONTINUE f memory is free scan is continued sont When memory overflow occurs while scanning the first job the machine stops immediately and the screen provides JOB STOP and SCAN STOP as the only two available options NOTE If the job settings include Booklet mode SCAN STOP will disappear To delete all the scanned data and discontinue the job touch JOB STOP To stop further scanning but print out all the data already scanned into memory touch SCAN STOP When memory overflow occurs during the reserve operation CONTINUE also appears on the active screen In this case the machine will not stop until all the jobs on standby for printing are completed To delete the scanned data and discontinue the last reserve job touch JOB STOP To stop further scanning but print out the data already scanned for the last reserve job touch SCAN STOP NOTE If the job settings include Booklet mode SCAN STOP will
72. or NO to create a duplicate name If the popup menu with OK key is displayed the entered name is duplicated Touch OK then enter a new name If the IMAGE DELETE key is displayed on the Overlay Image Selection Screen you can delete the stored image and name Select the image name using up down arrow key to scroll then touch IMAGE DELETE NOTE Changing the popup menu for duplicate name and displaying the IMAGE DELETE key is available in the Memory switch No 41 of the Key Operator setting See p 13 41 p 13 48 1 CHARACTER DELETE com 9 47 Applications Overlay Memory continued To Store Overlaying Image Data in HDD continued Image Name Entry Screen Image Name Entry Screen B09 20810 MARK JJ Application L Stamp Overlay peog oero MARK JJ Application LStemp Overlay G H I J E G H I J a R S T a R S T F F P P IMAGEOO1 z IMAGEOO1 z 5 5 6 7 8 3 1 CHARACTER DELETE com Basic Screen to store overlaying image FREE JopO1 OUTPUT _ copy MODE altel 0 OPY DENSITY LENS MODE STATUS COPY SIZE FUNCTION T OUTPUT En Overlaying Image Data Storing Screen D a ood STABLE fr z 7 Position the overlaying original on the platen glass then press Start to scan NOTES The EDH cannot be used for storing the overlaying image
73. will be required for maintaining optimal performance When preventive maintenance is due a message will prompt you to contact your service representative for maintenance Reading the PM Counter Control Panel Counter List Screen Help Program Memory i Serial Number 564400001 mS E O ART DA Total counter 12345678 03 08 20 i Counter list Copier counter 12345678 output Printer counter 12345678 Scanner counter 12345678 PM counter 002943 250000 03 08 18 1 Press Utility to display the Counter List Screen 2 Press Mode Check to display the PM count on the Counter List Screen 3 Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen Printing the PM Counter 1 Press Utility to display the Counter List Screen 2 Press Mode Check to display the PM counter on the Counter List Screen 3 Touch Counter list output The Basic Screen will be displayed 4 Touch the desired tray key to select the copy size 5 Press Start The counter list will be printed out and the list print mode will be released 14 14 Maintenance amp Supplies Cleaning the Left Partition Glass The glass partition at the far left of the platen glass is designed for real time scanning from the EDH Keep this glass clean otherwise soil marks may be copied resulting in dark lines on the copies NE 7 aan Raise the EDH and clean the left partition glass a with a clean soft cloth 0 22A
74. 0 4 Rotation and AMS Basic Operations Rotation continued Rotation and AMS continued When the 5 5 x8 5 tray is selected and the copier detects that the original is placed in portrait orientation Rotation rotates the original image by 90 and the copy is made with the appropriate AMS ratio to fit the portrait style of the copy paper Original Copy paper Rotation and AMS AMS only gt W O s To Release Automatic Rotation The copier is initially set to activate the Rotation function automatically To release automatic Rotation Basic Screen gn original on ED Ele O on 01 STATUS OUTPUT copy MODE COPYDENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION alll J STAPLE SORT FREE mE Touch ROTATION OFF on the Basic Screen to highlight it The Rotation icon will go out and the Rotation function will be canceled To resume automatic Rotation Touch ROTATION OFF on the Basic Screen to deselect it The Rotation icon will be displayed and the Rotation function will be reactivated 6 42 Basic Operations Check Mode and Proof Copy Use the C
75. 15 10 0mm ge 0 250 p 209K ection Screen Image Shift mode eTo MARK fApplication Limage Shift g range 0 0 FRONT sMieT 2 3 Back Shir 5j 6 a o SHIFT Aj Vv CoS Image Shift Reduce amp Shift 9 34 Applications Image Shift continued To Adjust Position of Copy Image continued Right gt AB CDT ABCD ry KLIP EFGH FE wis PQR TUV PQR S pown ABCD wz YZ TUV EFGH a wzyzit MNO gt lt Left Right gt PQRS ABCD TUV up EF GH ABCD wzyz IJKL EFGH HE T igi PQRS Original TU v Down x aP wZzyz dlw zyz Copies lt Left 1 Select the copy mode and copy size from the Basic Screen as required 2 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to enter the Application Selection Screen 3 Touch Image Shift to display the Image Shift Selection Screen 4 Touch Image Shift To set shift amount in Image Shift 1 Touch FRONT BACK or BOTH SIDES When BOTH SIDES is selected the entered shift direction and amount will be reflected immediately in the FRONT and BACK Images on the screen Touch FRONT or BACK to specify the shift direction and amount individually 2 Touch UP SHIFT DOWN SHIFT RIGHT SHIFT or LEFT SHIFT to specify the shift direction then use the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key to select the desired shift amount available range 0 250mm Keep touching the arrow key to increase or decrease the
76. 200 sheets max 12 36 x18 08 314 mm x 459 mm min 3 94 x5 83 100 mm x 148 mm A CAUTION When the finisher capacity is exceeded due to the print quantity selected remove the copied sets while the paper is exiting otherwise mishandled paper will occur FN 10 Finisher Booklet Tray Folding mode Standard Paper Size gt 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A3 B4 A4R Wide Paper Size 11 x17 W 8 5 x11 WR A3W B4W A4WR Paper Weight 16 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Number of Folded Sheets 3 sheets max Booklet Tray Capacity Approx 100 sheets max 11 x17 8 5 x14 A3 B4 33 sets max of 3 sheet folded booklet 33 x 3 99 sheets 50 sets max of 2 sheet folded booklet 50 x 2 100 sheets Approx 75 sheets max 8 5 x11 R A4R 25 sets max of 3 sheet folded booklet 25 x 3 75 sheets 37 sets max of 2 sheet folded booklet 37 x 2 74 sheets Stapling amp Folding mode Standard Paper Size gt 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A3 B4 A4R Wide Paper Size 11 x17 W 8 5 x11 WR A3W B4W A4WR Paper Weight 16 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Number of Folded Sheets 20 sheets max using 20Ib paper only 19 sheets max a thick cover paper included 4 10 Paper Information Paper in FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher Option continued FN 10 Finisher Booklet Tray continued Booklet Tray Capacity Approx 100 sheets max 11 x17 8 5 x14 A3 B4 20 sets max of 5 sheet folded booklet 20 x 5
77. 3 2 2 1 1 Insertion originals Place originals onto EDH gt Application Selection Screen Image Insertion No Setting Screen age insert mode BOOK 2810 er page number by keypad O MAn application Limage Insert JOB 01 FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT PAGE SETTING Enter by keypad lt 1 15 gt ADDITIONAL FUNCTION ps jes EEB Reverse Al image Image Area Booklet Image Shift FramelFold Stamp Booklet S77 Eeue Overlay z DELETE SET Applications Image Insert continued 1 Review pages to be scanned from the EDH and note the page number locations for inserting images scanned from the platen glass To insert more than one sheet at the same location enter the page number repeatedly For example if insertion locations are 2 2 6 scanned platen images will be inserted as follows e The first scanned platen image will be inserted after page 2 e The second scanned platen image will be inserted directly after the first scanned Image insertion e The third scanned platen image will be inserted after page 6 2 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 3 Touch Image Insert to display the Image Insertion No Setting Screen 4 Use the keypad to enter the page numbers for up to 30 inse
78. 4 Date amp Time Setting 1 cccccccccccsnseeeeesssneeeeessneeeesseneeeesseseeeeesseneeeeesssieeeeenss 13 4 Language Select Setting 2 eccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeseaeeeseeeeseaeeeteeeeseaees 13 6 IP Address Setting 3 ceccesevesivetesssciccicssakischisssesccedeaisied EKAA ah ad Anean baie EA anani RKA ananasi 13 7 E Mail Transmission Setting 4 ccccccccsssceceessssceeeeeceneeeeesseaeeesseeneeeeesseseeess 13 9 Copier Initial Setting 2 c cccccceceeeeeeenee eters eeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseieeeeeneeeeas 13 11 User Setting Mode 3 nesnenin nian a S a a a A a 13 13 User Density Level 1 Setting 1 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeee secre eeeeeeseaeeseeaeeseaeeeteaeeee 13 13 User Density Level 2 Setting 2 ccceeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenaeeeseaeeess 13 14 User Lens Mode Ratio Setting 8 cccccsccccssseseeeeeeseseeeesesneeeeeseeeneeeeesseseeeess 13 15 ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneees 13 16 How to Access the ECM Setting Mode ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteceeeseneeteneeeeeeeees 13 17 E C M Data Edit 1 sccvcitn de oh a ea eben ite iii ead 13 18 E C M All Count Reset 2 ccccccccsssseeesssseeeeeeesneeeeescsneeeeesessneeeeesesneeeeeseseaaes 13 22 E C M Function Setting P ennan aae a NT eE EEAS 13 23 Lock Delete Program Memory 5 ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeee
79. 4 000 sheets Large Capacity Cassette C 404 4 000 sheets Expanded Memory Unit 64MB M64 1 128MB M128 1 256MB M256 1 512MB M512 1 Printer Controller Pi7200e HDD HDD 2 1 14 Introduction Copier Features continued Optional Equipment continued Incompatible Conditions with Punch Mode Using PK 2 Punch Kit The following copy conditions are incompatible with Punch mode using PK 2 Punch Kit If selected the message mode unavailable for punch mode will be displayed in the message area of the Basic Screen and printing job will become unavailable However these are available when PK 5 Punch Kit or ZK 3 Z Fold Kit is installed Cover Sheet Mode Mixed Original when APS mode is selected Sheet Cover Insertion Copy insertion mode in Chapter Cover mode in Booklet Program Job NOTE The ATS functioning during Punch mode may cause punched holes to shift 1 15 Section 2 Safety Information User Instructions 2 2 Machine Labels 2 3 Machine Installation and Power Requirements 2 8 Machine Handling and Care 2 10 Routine Safety 2 11 Regulations 2 12 Finisher Capacity Requirements 2 18 2 1 Safety Information User Instructions The following pages include important safety information which you must read and understand before you attempt to operate the machine If you have any concerns about safety matters plea
80. 4 digit Key Operator password then click on Apply Click on Setting data Import Export The Enter Network Password dialog box will be displayed 11 35 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Transmitting Editing Machine Setting File Environment Setup continued File Edt View Favorites Tools Help Setting File Import Export Window File Edt view varo GANA ranes Gren Gl SO a e 1S 60 8 Adress Bt 0 11 92 201jgofrmccper_en he Weh Utilities ea Es m Environment Setup dJapanese AE English 3838 taza Setting data Import Export Import You transmit a file and can register setting data e push import button a setting file will be recognized automatically I EENE Import Export e You can save setting data in file Please choose a data type to save and push an export button EKC data TAB separated F Scan transmission E mail data TAB separated Scan transmission HDD data TAB separated Scan transmission FTP data TAB separated ronment SETUP mem Main Page Enter ekc in the User Name text box and an 8 digit master key code in the Password text box then click on OK The Setting File Import Export window will be displayed 4 Export the machine setting file Select the desired file type from the pull down menu then click on Export NOTE The data format cannot be changed from TAB sepa
81. 6 35 to p 6 37 4 Press Start A caution When the selected print quantity exceeds the Finishers maximum capacity remove the printed sheets while paper is exiting to avoid paper mishandling 7 5 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine with Finisher continued Staple Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray Use this mode when you want to offset and staple each copied set Stapling position and number of staples 1 or 2 can be designated on the Output Mode popup menu Each finished set will be offset from the next copied set With the Primary main tray initially selected on the Output Mode popup menu FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 outputs the printed sheets FACE DOWN in the proper order g g Stapled paper at 1 position 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 is available in portrait orientation only Stapled paper at 2 positions only 8 5 x11 paper loaded with larger vertical dimension 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 paper loaded with larger horizontal dimension Paper capacity for 20 Ib 1 000 sheets Variable according to the number of pages to be stapled See p 4 9 for details Staple capacity FN 121 FN 10 Max 50 sheets 20 Ib 5 0mm thick or less FN 115 Max 100 sheets 20 Ib 10mm thick or less Max 50 sheets 20 Ib for 11 x17 Staple position 1 oblique staple 2 parallel staples Oblique staple may change to parallel staple when using some copy sizes Incompatible Copy Conditions Using p
82. 8 peered A B D K L N u v x 0 1 3 IMAGE STOREIDELETE 1 CHARACTER DELETE Recall Job Selection Screen 1 Press Mode to light up the Scan LED The Scan Server Setting Menu Screen will be displayed 2 Touch IMAGE RECALL to display the Image Data Password Entry Screen fl FEEN other 3 Enter your Image data password from the touch screen keypad To correct an entry touch 1 CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character then enter the correct password 4 If the password is correct touch OK to display the Recall Job Selection Screen 5 Touch the desired job name key to highlight it then touch to move it to the recall list on the right side ABCD2222 2002 08 17 EFGH3333 2002 08 19 NOTES e To cancel the job moved to the recall list touch the job name in the list to highlight it then touch to return it to the left side key e Touch JOB CHECK to display the Mode Check Screen to view all the feature selections made for the job moved and highlighted in the recall list on the right side 11 10 Network Function Image Recall Mode continued 6 If the desired job name is displayed in the recall list touch WAIT OUTPUT PROOF OUTPUT or AUTO OUTPUT as desired Follow the procedure below according to the selected output mode key to complete the image recall and output operation Selecting WAIT OUTPUT 1 Touch OK The Image Data Recalling Screen will be displayed to show the cu
83. Adjustment Screen L 280 LS172 5 SET SET RETURN RETURN Printer Pre regist Adjustment Screen Printer Erasure Amount Adjustment Screen RETURN RETURN 13 60 Key Operator Mode Timing Adjustment 22 continued Scanner Platen Restart Timing Adjustment Screen EDH Restart Timing Adjustment Screen D 60 ep 0 3 6 6 9 SET 9 SET NEXT BACK RETURN NEXT BACK RETURN EDH Regist Loop Adjustment Screen 6 9 SET NEXT BACK RETURN a4 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password To display menus 11 to 20 and 21 to 23 touch the Lower arrow key Touch 22 Timing adjustment to display the Timing Adjustment Menu Screen Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function Make fine adjustment on the screen Touch lt gt to select or as desired enter the value then touch SET Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area If provided touch NEXT or BACK to move to the next or previous adjustment item Touch RETURN to restore the Timing Adjustment Menu Screen 5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 6 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations AUN 13 61
84. Copy Density Lens Mode Copy Size Paper_Type Output Mode AA Staple Sort CANCEL J OK 11 12 13 14 DEF COMPANY 15 Main tray Photo Mode Normal Mode Non STD A3 10 4 Program Memory Job Recall continued 1 Place original s as required for the job you are about to recall 2 Press Program Memory to display the Job No Selection Screen See sample screen previous page 3 Touch a Job No key to select a job you want to recall and to highlight the key If required scroll with the arrow keys to reach the desired Job No key 1 30 To cancel the recall mode touch CANCEL to return to the Basic Screen 4 Touch JOB CHECK The Job Recall Check Screen displays to enable you to review the settings Touching CANCEL on the Job Recall Check Screen returns to the Job No Selection Screen See sample Job Recall Check Screen previous page 5 When the desired Job No key is highlighted touch OK to read the settings of the selected job and to return to the Basic Screen To cancel the job press Panel Reset 6 Press Start NOTES A locked job is indicated by a lock icon on the Job key number Only the key operator can lock a job A locked job cannot be overwritten unless it is unlocked by the Key Operator A blank key indicates that no job is stored under that key Program Memory entries can be recorded on the Program Memory Form included at the end of this section
85. Delete mode Store the image data scanned from originals in HDD or delete the data stored in HDD SCAN SERYER gt aug IMAGE STORE DELETE RECALL 11 2 Network Function To Use Server Function continued 2 Image Store amp Output mode Store the scanned image data in HDD after copying is completed ode 19 0 mr EXIT TRAY BINDING OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt Wee A aA STORE sub f eal GROUP Z SHEET TANDEM TRAY UP BINDING lL SORT fall punch f RECALL PETA STANDARD STAPLII vi l MAIN Yl arOuDING Ej Z CANCEL TRAY THREE rowwine J relic L OK fo IDLE 0 3 Image Recall mode Recall the image data stored in
86. HDD to built in DIMM for printing SERYER P aaa STOREIDELETE RECALL 11 3 Network Function Image Store Delete Mode When the original image is stored into DIMM use this function to store the image data into HDD In the event data is already stored in HDD use this function delete it from HDD NOTE Installation of the optional HDD HDD 2 is required for storing data in HDD To Store Image Data in HDD Specify your password when storing the data in HDD for protection Image data can be given an alphabetical job name O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions 1 2 2 2 AMS Selecting output mode Selecting copy size APS is automatically selected Setting print quantity Rotation O Incompatible Special Originals WHOLE AREA in Non STD Size O Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job available in Image Store amp Output Mode only Non Image Area Erase Reverse Image Repeat AUTO Layout Image Shift Stamp Overlay Control Panel Scanner Server Setting Menu Screen SCAN SERYER gt aug Print Copy Ay S amp E Energy Saver Timer Interrupt Panel Reset IMAGE IMAGE STOREIDELETE RECALL 11 4 Network Function Image Store Delete Mode continued To Store Image Data in HDD continued Image Data Store Delete Site Selection Screen Image Data Password Entry Screen
87. Hl suns sunvevors ail ag Originals Copies BACK COVER COPIED 10 e ae r Originals Copies survevor s siavcvors REPORT REPORT FRONT amp BACK COVERS COPIED AND COPY SHEET INSERTION gt Originals Copies n a 9 BACK COVER BLANK SURVEYORS 9 sunvevors T anel Ahl FERONT SURVEYORS Originals Copies gt FRONT amp BACK COVERS BLANK Originals Copies AND BLANK SHEET INSERTION COPY SHEET INSERTION z 0 9 P a4 7 SURVEYOR S 5 112 SURVEYOR S REPORT REPORT gt Originals Copies BLANK SHEET INSERTION 9 5 Applications Sheet Cover Insertion continued Application Selecftion Screen Sheet Cover Insertion Screen elect Applicatio 0 ed E E a 0 CE ie S C Insertion FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Sheet Cover Insertion Reverse Al image Chapter image Al area Image Shift COYERS INSERT S f PAGE SETTING Enter by keypad lt 1 15 gt Tray 1 THICK1 Tray2 THIN FRONT BACK copy copy EAB copy B Insert FRONT BACK 5 BLANK BLANK BLANK Q E A mser DELETE SET a CHANGE OF THE CHANGE OF THE COVERS TRAY INSERTION TRAY CANCEL FrametFold S tamp l Erasure verlay ug Sheet Cover Insertion Screen with FRONT COPY BACK COPY and COPY INSERT selected overs and o BOOK pce01 0 oe on pre 0 MARK JJ Applic
88. Information ID 2 The current job status number of jobs in waiting and remaining time to elapse before completing the print job NOTES Clicking on Di7210 will display the machine information See p 11 20 e Click on REFRESH to update the information 3 Display the current job or reserved job information Click on the desired Job Priority No under the Job List The information on the specified job will appear in the second Job List area NOTE If no print job or reserved job exists Job Empty will be displayed in the first Job List area 4 Display the previous job information Click on the desired Job ID No under the Job Status The information on the specified previous job will appear in the second Job Status area NOTE If no print job has been made after the machine is powered on no indication will appear in the first Job Status area Number of Job 0 Job Information ID 1 Job Number 1 Number of Pages 2 Print Quantity 1 Output Time o Job Attribute Copier Job Status Tob end successfully Current print quantity count 1 Remaining Time Current page number 2 Job Number Number of Pages Print Quantity Output Time Job Attribute Job Status Job Information ID 2 Copier Tob end success 11 15 Network Function HDD Job Information Mode Use the web browser to s
89. Introduction Introduction I p atroduction eee 2nd TABS Printed j side 3rd TABS 3rd TAB 3 FINISHED SETS 6 12 Basic Operations Copy Density Automatic Exposure Selection AES AES operates with the initial settings It detects the density of the original image and automatically selects the appropriate exposure for the copy Manual Mode Lighter Normal Darker Select manual copy density to adjust exposure density when originals are too light or too dark Manual adjustments can be made in 9 levels simply by touching LIGHTER NORMAL or DARKER to highlight the desired exposure level indicator Basic Screen gn original o D le O TD STATUS OUTPUT Sart gt COPY SIZE FUNCTION 4 p ze PoE STORE ORY 100 Light original Normal Dark original 6 13 Basic Operations Copy Density continued Density Shift Density shift divides each of nine density levels into three levels of lighter and three levels of darker Density shift can be used in 4 Text Photo Enhance modes Auto Text photo Text Photo and Increase contrast Density shift O gt Density shift 1 Density shi
90. Key Operator Initially the mode is set to function after 1 minute of copier inactivity The Panel Reset key function also re displays the Basic Screen unless these settings are changed by the Key Operator in the Copier Initial Setting Screen See p 13 11 to p 13 12 Automatic Paper Selection APS When APS is highlighted on the touch screen the appropriate copy paper size is automatically selected When copying from the platen glass or EDH APS detects the sizes indicated below For Key Operator settings of APS see p 13 41 to p 13 48 PLATEN GLASS 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 EDH 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R A4 8 27 x11 69 210mmx297mm Automatic Magnification Selection AMS AMS functions automatically An appropriate ratio is selected based on the relationship of copy size to original size Automatic Exposure Selection AES When AES is highlighted on the touch screen the appropriate exposure level is automatically selected to match the copy density of the original Manual density adjustments override AES Automatic Tray Switching ATS When the selected paper tray becomes empty while copying is in progress automatic tray switching detects the same copy paper size loaded in another tray to allow copying to continue without interruption The Multi sheet bypass tray is not included in tray switching 3 21 Machine Information Lead Edge Delete When using the ED
91. Modes Output Mode for Machine without Finisher continued Face Down Exit continued Output Mode popup menu Ae BINDING OUTPUT MODE HDD STORE Q TANDEM N i Eer T croup Z raceu E RECALL STANDARD om CANCEL OK To Set Face Down Rotation Group Exit 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu 2 Touch ROTATION GROUP and FACE DOWN to highlight them 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen Output Modes Output Mode for Machine without Finisher continued Face Up Exit Unless Face Up Exit is selected all simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies exit to the tray face down When Face Up Exit is selected all simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies exit face up While the Face Up Exit mode reduces the amount of paper movement you will be required to arrange pages in the correct order manually O Face up exit can be selected together with Non sort Rotation sort Group or Rotation group O When using the platen glass with simplex 1 1 copying start copying from the last page first and continue in that reverse order to output the set in correct order g Incompatible None Output Mode pop
92. No No No No 01 Item Panel timer Panel Reset key function EDH Original effect Program memory auto recall 30 Finisher mode by Full auto Initial by Key counter insert Erasure outside area of orig EDH frame erasure selection Automatic tray switching Platen APS EDH APS Platen AMS EDH AMS Select tray when APS cancel Platen original size detect EDH original size detect Platen orig size detect SMALL Rotation Staple mode reset function Job offset operating Continuation print Key click sound 1 SHOT indication time Energy saver screen Start key latch function Stop key function Auto select of Booklet copy E C M password Setting default is underlined OFF 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec 120 sec 150 sec 180 sec 210 sec 240 sec 270 sec 300 sec Full Auto Initial Setting EDH Panel Reset key selected EDH selected OFF ON Face down Sub tray Non sort Sort Staple sort Stapling amp Folding Folding Face up Sub tray OFF ON Erased for except Platen 1 1 Area outside of orig erased Erased for APS AMS only None 1mm frame 2mm frame 3mm frame 4mm frame 5mm frame OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON APS preferential tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCC Bypass tray Only A series Full size AB series Inch series Only A series Full size AB series Inch series A5R B6R 5 5 x8 5 R B5 A4 8 5x1
93. OPERATOR MODE Help Menu Screen HELP MENU Select one of following items A 1 Hard keys Cy Hard keys Special orig 2 EDH Platen glass 3 Basic mode EDH Platen Ce Output modes 4 Application mode 5 Special original Basic modes Program memory 6 0utput mode 7 Program memory 4 Applications 6 46 Basic Operations Help Mode continued 1 While in any screen press Help to display the Help Screen 2 Touch TONER SUPPLY PAPER SUPPLY EDH STAPLE SUPPLY PUNCH FOR ASSISTANCE or the Service call telephone number and Fax number to display specific Help information 3 For help on operations touch HELP MENU in the center area of the screen The Help Menu Screen will be displayed Select one of the 7 Help menu items 4 The Weekly timer key display only when the Weekly timer system is activated Touch the key to display the settings of the Weekly timer 5 Touch EXIT to return to the screen that was displayed before pressing Help 6 47 Section 7 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine with Finisher 7 2 Output Mode for Machine with Shift Tray 7 12 Folding and Stapling amp Folding Modes 7 14 Punch Mode 7 17 Z Folding Mode 7 20 Three Folding Mode 7 22 Cover Inserter E 7 24 Manual Finishing 7 27 Output Mode for Machine without Finisher 7 30 Select finisher mode EXIT TRAY OUTPUT 4 SE
94. Original Use the Z folded original mode with the EDH to copy Z folded originals so as not to cause paper misfeed J Use EDH O EDH capacity Max 100 sheets g Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Using platen glass g Incompatible Special Original Mixed Original Non STD Size Tab Paper g Incompatible Applications Non image area erase Repeat AUTO layout Storing image in Overlay Memory Special Original popup menu elile O O a O g a O 0 een Binpine ENHANCE SREMA ORIGINAL STATUS RIGHT p Normal 5 FUNCTION ET ele UP J Increase ap Mixed Non STDP SPECIA ka BINDING 4 f Contrast amp f Original Z size RECALL A TT STANDARD a al E e Photo A paper L caNcEeL fa E Text OK
95. Press Stop on the control panel of the primary copier The scanning printing job stops immediately and the popup menu appears on the Basic Screen of the primary copier to ask you whether to continue or terminate the job At this time the tandem mode is not released 2 Touch CONTINUE to go on or EXIT to delete all the scanned data and to release the tandem mode To cancel the job in the secondary copier only 1 Press Stop on the control panel of the secondary copier The secondary copier stops the current operation immediately and the popup menu appears on the Basic Screen of the secondary copier to ask you whether to continue or cease the operation At this time the tandem mode is not released NOTE If temporary suspension in the secondary copier takes a long time the Allocation recovery mode will activate enabling the primary copier to handle the remaining print quantity 2 Touch CONTINUE to go on or EXIT to delete all the data transmitted to the secondary copier and to release the tandem mode The primary copier will take over the remaining print quantity and complete the job NOTE Once the Allocation recovery mode is activated and the primary copier is already handling the remaining print quantity the secondary copier cannot continue with the tandem printing job even when CONTINUE is touched on the popup menu 12 5 Tandem Mode Troubleshooting Copying with the Allocation recovery mode The Allocation recovery mo
96. Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 20 Applications Program Job In the ordinary Store mode the combined features selected for the job are applied to all originals to be scanned In the Program Job mode you may scan multiple sets of originals and apply different settings on each set referred to as JOB then output them all as a complete set QQ00 Scan and store originals into memory then print all the pages collectively Max 100 JOBs can be programmed for an output job Available original sizes vary conforming to copy conditions selected for each JOB Copy size specified for the first JOB cannot be changed Only the trays containing the same paper size can be designated for subsequent JOBs Once specified paper type size setting for Multi sheet bypass tray cannot be changed for another JOB Output mode settings cannot be specified for each JOB The last settings made will be applied to all JOBs Print quantity cannot be specified for each JOB Entered quantity will be the number of complete copied sets and can be changed anytime before printing Program Job settings cannot be stored in Program Memory Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions APS Change copy size Rotation Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Folding Stapling amp Folding Three Folding Punch using PK 2 Punch kit Server function except Image Store amp Output mode Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Incompatible App
97. Screen oO BOOK 201 MARK Application FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT is paor Copy 7 BOOK COPY ADDITIONAL Transparency Non image ofan AUTO FUNCTION Interleave Area Erase mj Layout pal BI 5 Reverse a PN All image HNDI i E aa E BRG Sann image Area eae Booklet Left binding sia eB Book Copy E g Esl Image shit E FE F FramelFold Stamp Front cover FrontiBack cover Casa SZ Erasure f Sic Overlay per Full scan Full scan Full scan ALL J REVERSE THE SIDE CLEAR CANCEL OK OF OPEN PAGE CANCEL OK 9 19 Applications Book Copy continued 1 Load 8 5 x11 sheets in a tray or in the Multi sheet bypass tray 2 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 3 Touch Book Copy to enter the Book Copy Screen 4 Touch Full scan Front cover Full scan or Front Back cover Full scan as required Touch REVERSE THE SIDE OF OPEN PAGE to change the binding mode according to the original Option Touch Booklet on the Book Copy Screen to use t
98. amp Proof Copy 13 1211 10 9 8 16 15 Sub power switch turns copier power On Off when pressed LCD touch screen displays machine and copying status help information interactive screens and touch keys for selecting all functions Program Memory displays screens for selecting job store job recall functions Help displays a screen with help for the currently selected function or to access the Key Operator Mode Screen Mode Check displays a screen showing all settings that are selected for the current job Keypad enters numeric values Timer lights when the timer function is set Mode switches the machine operation mode to copy scan and print Energy Saver activates power saving mode for times when the copier is inactive or activates timer interrupt mode when weekly timer function is active Panel Reset restores copier to automatic mode settings or to Key Operator settings Interrupt stops copying in progress to allow copying from the platen glass C clear allows resetting of print quantity Stop stops the copying sequence deletes the stored memory Machine Information Control Panel Layout continued 14 Start activates copying or scanning 15 Utility displays the Counter Screen or accesses programming modes for setting special functions 16 Proof Copy outputs a single set of copies to confirm whether the current settings are selected properly NOTE The control panel of this machine can be slightly low
99. an entry touch DELETE repeatedly to delete each character entered then enter the correct job name 8 If the Job name is correct touch OK to resume the Job No Selection Screen To re enter the Job name touch CANCEL to return to the Job No Selection Screen 9 When the Job No Selection Screen is displayed touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen To re enter the Job name when the Job No Selection Screen is displayed touch CANCEL to display the Job Name Registration Screen To exit from the Program Memory setting anytime press Panel Reset NOTES A locked job is indicated by a lock icon on the Job key number Only the key operator can lock a job A locked job cannot be overwritten unless it is unlocked by the Key Operator A blank key indicates that no job is stored under that key Program Memory entries can be recorded on the Program Memory Form included at the end of this section akWN 10 3 Program Memory Job Recall Use Job Recall to recall jobs that are already stored in Program Memory Job No Selection Screen ff 1 ABC CORPORATION 2 3 4 TEST COPY 5 11 12 13 14 DEF COMPANY 15 Job No Selection Screen Job Recall op pe ff 1 ABC CORPORATION Job Recall Check Screen CHECK MODE BASIC amp SPECIAL ORIG 1 Exit Tray 1 1 Enhance Mode AES Special Orig 1 000 original APS Copy Quantity Duplex Mode
100. arrow keys on the popup menu to select the desired size e Select Non STD size to display the popup menu to enter the paper size by using arrow keys or touch screen keypad e Select Wide paper to display the popup menu to show available wide paper sizes to be specified Use arrow keys on the popup menu to select the desired wide size Touch Lead edge or Rear edge to select the image starting position Then touch Input size to display the popup menu to enter the paper size by using arrow keys or touch screen keypad 3 Touch OK on the Paper Type Setting Screen or on the Special Size Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen 4 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 26 Key Operator Mode Panel Contrast Key Sound Adjustment 7 Use this feature to adjust the level of brightness of the touch screen portion of the control panel and also the volume of the touch key Key Operator Mode Screen Panel Contrast Key Sound Adjustment Screen 0 System initial setting 5 Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting Panel contrast adjustment A Dimmer A _ Brighter Buzzer volume regulation Backlight contrast adjustment 4 E C M function setting 9 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment RETURN 1 Press Help t
101. continued 1 Close the EDH securely then press Panel Reset 2 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu 3 Touch STAPLING amp FOLDING or FOLDING as desired NOTE Selecting FOLDING or STAPLING amp FOLDING will automatically switch the output tray to Booklet tray Notice that the arrow pointing to the MAIN TRAY shifts to the Booklet tray 4 Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu The Basic Screen will be restored and the selection made in the output mode will be reflected in the OUTPUT icon area 5 Select additional copying features as required NO COVER SHEET of Booklet is automatically selected To change this selection touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen then touch Booklet twice to display the Booklet Mode Selection Screen to make another selection or to release the setting 6 Enter the desired print quantity 7 Position originals in the EDH When using Store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 37 NOTE When loading originals heed the following limits on capacity Folding mode 12 pages or less for simplex copying 6 pages or less for duplex copying Stapling amp Folding mode 80 pages or less for simplex copying 40 pages or less for duplex copying Exceeding the above capacity limits may cause trouble in the finisher 8 Press Start A CAUTION When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded the finisher will cease operating To avoid this select the appropriate
102. cover of Main body LCC and Main body Multi sheet bypass tray and Main body Main body Code 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 20 Location Main body Main body ADU or Main body EDH EDH Finisher Finisher Cover inserter Finisher Book making unit Z Fold kit Troubleshooting Clearing Mishandled Paper continued A WARNING The right rear area of the conveyance fixing unit generates high voltage If touched electrical shock may occur DO NOT TOUCH CAUTION The fixing unit is internally very hot To avoid getting burned DO NOT TOUCH the area Use care when withdrawing the convayance fixing unit and remove the mishandled paper in the fixing unit CAUTION The conveyance fixing unit is heavy Use care and draw it out gently otherwise you may be injured CAUTION DO NOT put your hand between the main body and developing fixing unit otherwise you may be injured CAUTION Inside the Booklet mode outlet is the roller drive unit DO NOT put your hand into it when removing the folded or stapled amp folded sheet otherwise you may be injured 15 7 Troubleshooting Copying Hints COPIER DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN POWER SWITCH IS ON Fully insert paper trays Close EDH Close Front doors and Toner access door of main body Close Finisher door Check to be sure main power switch is ON Check to be sure power plug is firmly inserted in electr
103. data transmission is completed the machine automatically starts to print To suspend recall while the Image Data Recalling Screen is displayed touch CANCEL If the popup menu shown below is displayed touch YES to delete the data recalled to DIMM or touch NO to continue The data stored in HDD will not be erased by this operation The popup menu displays when the Memory Switch No 42 is turned on in the Key Operator Mode See p 13 41 to p 13 48 Image Data Recalling Screen popup menu displayed Image Data Recalling Screen popup menu displayed JOB PREYIOUS IMAGE PROOF AUTO cHeEK_ PSENLNE contnation SE otter NOTE 11 11 Network Function To Use Web Utilities When the machine is connected with a PC over a network the web browser activated on the PC provides the following functions 1 Main Page Displays the job in progress service call and machine information 2 Job Status Displays the current and previous job status 3 HDD Job Information Searchs the built in HDD for an image data by job name then check output or delete the image data You can
104. delete the selected data 6 Touch YES to delete it or touch NO to cancel The popup menu will disappear 7 Touch OK to restore the Scanner Server Setting Menu Screen 8 Press Mode to light up the Copy LED The Basic Screen will be displayed 11 7 Network Function Image Store amp Output Mode Use this function to store the scanned image data in HDD after copying is completed This storing function does not conflict with any other copying conditions NOTE Installation of the optional HDD HDD 2 is required for this function With the HDD installed the HDD STORE key will be displayed on the Output Mode popup menu Output Mode popup menu with Finisher Output Mode popup menu without Finisher Si 0 G 0 on 0 BINDING STAPLE OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt Es REE op 0 BINDING OUTPUT MODE HDD SUTPUT era a cover STORE OUTPUT STORE suB pise A croup Zf SHEET Ld TANDEM RIGHT ay our mew B TANDEM A TRAY p 2 Bikoa L E ESAE eoc f RECALL J RECALL OUTPU STANDARD STANDARD Owe fal STAPLING 43 Z FOLDING Ope oo ail akan See zi cance SABE brome groups E CANCEL SORE J TRAY SORE roine Top D oK corr ok o OLE o OLE Image Data Password Entry Screen Job Name Entry Screen JOB NAME DATE Image store pass
105. e 157 h 37 4 30 2 _ WR 120 480 490 650 400 950 766 WARE y Ly 63 8 1620 44 9 1140 hd y 64 6 72 3 i 1640 p Ue 1836 Di5510 Di7210 OT 104 Shift tray 3 15 Machine Information Site Requirements continued Unit inches mm i 3 9 3 9 4 J AT 100 29 2 100 EN 120 Le 741 256 phe A69 nd he 37 4 ole 30 2 Seats 25 8 650 430 950 766 NN 656 16 1 X 4 40 r of 63 8 1620 pmm 1 yoy KOJ og g v VE y 79 5 72 2021 lt 1836 gt Di5510 Di7210 FN 121 Finisher C 403 Large capacity cassette Unit inches mm 39 39 F wa 47 ac 60 25 6 169100 Sai 30 2 B20 30 7 650 430 950 7668 SNS 781 21 4 644 jj A 63 8 1620 a i gt yoy fol O g o v Ve KA e 84 5 gt 2146 Di5510 Di7210 FN 115 Finisher C 403 Large capacity cassette 3 16 Machine Information Site Requirements continued Unit inches mm EET
106. el oe ay ae To Bee 9 G a g 2 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu 3 Touch the desired key among the four keys on the screen to select the staple position When making double sided copies also touch to highlight the desired binding mode key referring to the above illustration 4 Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen The selection made in stapling position will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area 7 7 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine with Finisher continued Staple Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray continued 5 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu 6 Touch to select the desired original set direction then touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 7 Select additional copying features as required 8 Enter the desired print quantity 9 Position originals in the EDH When using Store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 37 10Press Start A CAUTION When the selected print quantity exceeds the Finishers maximum capacity remove the printed sheets while paper is exiting to avoid paper mishandling 7 8 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine with Finisher continued Group Mode Using Primary Main Tray Use this mode when you want to group together multiple copies of each original and offset the sets upon exit Grouped sets can
107. era amo lt gt Up FRAMES Frame Erasure Wii BGO 5 Lomm RIGHT Each side All sides RIGHT Frame Erasure SIDE LEFT RIGHT Each side DOWN SIDE Omm 1 4 ewe 7 8 o 0 Fold Erasure LEFT lt FOLD gt SIDE 1 4 Omm Omm DOWN 7 8 0 Fold Erasure LEFT SIDE A v A v 4 Touch OK to complete the setting The Application Selection Screen will be displayed 5 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen or make additional application selections 6 Select desired Copy Size 7 Enter desired print quantity 8 Position original s FACE UP in the EDH or FACE DOWN on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 9 Press Start After copying is completed touch Frame Fold Erasure on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine NOTE While copy size and original size generally should be the same it is possible to use Frame Fold Erasure to copy an 11 x17 original to 8 5 x11 R by selecting 0 65 reduction after selecting Copy Size 9 30 Applications AUTO Layout Use this function to detect the image area of the original and center the whole image on the copy paper O Copy mode is automatically set to 1 1 1 2 mode is also available only
108. est insuffisante et lorsque une utilisation prolong e de l appareil est effectu e Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement r unissant des conditions de confort sant et de s curit il est pr f rable de bien a rer la pi ce ou se trouve l appareil 2 17 Safety Information Finisher Capacity Requirements A CAUTION FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN BODILY INJURY AND OR MACHINE DAMAGE O FINISHER PAPER CAPACITY To prevent paper misfeed do not exceed the paper capacity of the Finisher FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher paper weight 16 Ib 24 Ib When the selected print quantity exceeds the maximum paper capacity remove the copied sheets from the finisher while the paper is exiting Paper capacities below are stated for 20 Ib bond or the same size This Finisher also accepts wide types of the regular sizes stated below Finisher FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Primary Main tray Non sort Sort Group mode 500 sheets 5 5 x8 5 R 3 000 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R FN 121 FN 115 2 500 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R FN 10 1 500 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 The Secondary sub tray can be unloaded while the Di5510 Di7210 is running Set production is not limited by the capacity of the Secondary sub tray Primary Main tray Punch mode FN 121 FN 10 with PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES only 3 000 sheets 8 5 x11 1 500 sheets 11 x17 The Secondary sub tray can be unloaded while the Di551
109. ia aae aaa eaaa aaa verde ri EE kaa Dea eia ai 8 6 Mixed Origina e e pr a r a aa na a Ea a E E A Iaa aaneen 8 6 Z Folded Original arenaene airne ha ite ea E e at aaa ea th Gant eet Pened 8 8 Original FOUN siraan aa aa aaa a a a Eaa a eke aeaiia teaei iape Tea See 8 9 Section 9 Applications Application Function MenU sesssssssserrsssrrrnsssrrrnestnnnnannranetnnnnnernttnnennenannnnnnanennnnnnenennna 9 2 Sheet Cover Insertion cccceecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeceaeeseeeeeseeeeeseaeeseeeeeeseeeeseaeeee 9 3 Chapter einion merae a aie h E a e a een es 9 8 Combinations lt 7 sete i aean bee heen Gavan ae ae et eee 9 10 Booklet sities ttre cede a ove re ae id need er ee eee ieee 9 12 Transparency Interleave oo eee eeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaaeeeeenaas 9 15 Image Insert nc sct cnet ees ede cee Lee eet eee heb ad stelle edie E 9 17 BOOK CODY ceils Faia hgh ate A ane eg te dete T 9 19 Program Jobas roii cee tee nie erie peeve ee ive reed eee deena eee 9 21 Non Image Area Erase eeeeeccceeesseeeeeeeeneeeeetenaaeeeeeseaeeeeeseaaeeeeeseaeeeeeseaaeeeensnaeeeeeeeaas 9 23 Reverse Mage acns susie tdi eea Aai ian es Gliese E TAE A A ee ie 9 25 Repeat Imagen jase te Sadi ea ae aaa tien eee ee 9 26 Frame Fold Erasure cic i eiiean i denny ati endivesdiue Sitti nice n E pee evens 9 29 AUTO Layouts irc pie a eea a itis oh it a aaa aE e a a a 9 31 All lmage Area nsei ee aaie tees e
110. it outputs to the exit tray Be sure to load both 8 5 x11 and 8 5 x11 R_ in separate trays including the Multi sheet bypass tray before selecting this feature e Server Function option Stores image data in the HDD for future printing or transmits the data to a PC over a network for editing and printing e Sheet Cover Insertion Inserts up to 30 blank or copied sheets from any tray including the Multi Sheet Bypass Tray or inserts blank or copied front and back covers from any tray including the Multi Sheet Bypass Tray e Stamp Imprints a stamp watermark or scanned image onto the copy image e Staple Selects the stapling position and number of staples 3 positions e STD Size Special Detects standard paper sizes which cannot normally be detected A4R and A5 when loaded in a main body tray ASR and F4 sizes are detected when loaded in the Multi sheet bypass tray e Tab Paper Copies onto tabbed sheets from tabbed originals allowing the image on the tab part of the original to be printed on the same part of the tabbed copy paper e Tandem Mode for Two Copiers Works in tandem to distribute a large copying job in half the time of non tandem mode 1 11 Introduction Features of the Di5510 Di7210 continued e Text Photo Enhance Enhances photo image in Photo mode regular image in Auto mode text image in Text mode lighter image in Increase Contrast mode e Transparency Interleave Copies onto transparency film
111. job or to recall multiple jobs 43 Exit direction Select to exit face up or face down when making single sided copies in non sort or sort mode using finisher primary main tray 44 I P SCAN Address manual input Select to permit or prohibit entering the IP address manually to transmit the scanned image data 45 I P SCAN E Mail function mask Select to mask or unmask the function to send the scanned image data by e mail 46 I P SCAN HDD function mask Select to mask or unmask the function to store the scanned image data in the HDD 47 I P SCAN FTP function mask Select to mask or unmask the function to store the scanned image data in the FTP server 13 47 Key Operator Mode Memory Switch Setting 13 continued 48 State of Platen EDH Reset When Panel Reset functions select to reset the Platen EDH mode to the initial setting or save the previous setting 49 Priority tray blank overlap When setting Cover with Blank sheet mode in Booklet and both printer tray and upper lower tray of the Cover Inserter E are selected select the tray to have priority in feeding the blank cover sheet 50 Auto Select the binding mode Set the machine to conform the binding direction of the originals and printed sets each other 51 IP SCAN E Mail file form Select the file form when transmitting the scanned image data 52 IP SCAN HDD file form Select the file form when storing the scanned image data in the HDD 53
112. key on the left then enter the address numbers using the screen keypad Touch SET to fix the numbers or touch RESET to clear Line Speed Setting Screen 4 When customizing the line speed touch dress setting Line speed setting to display the Line i 7 10M Half Duplex 100M Half Duplex Speed Setting Screen Touch the desired key then touch OK to restore the IP nipa ao ripe Address Setting Screen Auto Negotiation CANCEL 13 7 Key Operator Mode System Initial Setting 1 continued IP Address Setting 3 continued 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen 6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 7 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations Key Operator Mode System Initial Setting 1 continued E Mail Transmission Setting 4 When the machine requires troubleshooting or maintenance such as paper or toner supply this setting allows several network PCs to be informed of the current machine status by E mail The following information items are provided e Service call e PM call e Finisher tray full e JAM e Complete job e Dispose of trash basket e Paper supply e Non complete job e Toner supply e Staple cartridge supply NOTE Consult your network manager to perform this setting Incorrect setting may cause a trouble with other network systems O Setting options IP address E Mail machine manager E Mail con
113. modes including sort staple sort group face up folding stapling amp folding three folding punch Z folding cover sheet feed and manual finishing functions Section 8 Information on special original modes Section 9 Information on special application functions Section 10 Information on program memory functions Section 11 Information on network functions Section 12 Information on tandem mode functions Section 13 Information on Key Operator functions for customizing the machine to suit your working environment The Key Operator mode should be used by an authorized person Section 14 Information on maintaining this equipment and replenishing paper and toner Section 15 Troubleshooting information and instructions for clearing mishandled paper Section 16 Machine specifications for the main body and accessories Page Design The page layout of this manual is designed to help you perform each operation quickly and easily The basic format includes an introductory explanation of each function step by step procedures and illustrations to enhance many of the procedures Caution statements specific to a topic are located on appropriate pages Special notes are located at the bottom of the page Help Mode Help can be obtained for any function or mode that is displayed on the screen by pressing the Help button on the control panel Introduction Product Overview The Di5510 Di7210 is a digital printer copier that can be
114. of the DNS server if needed time difference and E mail address to be informed of the machine status Click on the check box of the desired transmission item Click on Apply to complete the setting and return to the Web Utilities window Clicking on Reset will void the setting and restore the Web Utilities window Clicking on Sending test will send a test mail to the manager 11 21 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Setting E C M Function Environment Setup Perform the following Key Operator settings concerning the E C M function using the web browser on a PC e E C M Data Add see step 4 Add anew E C M data password name and copy limit to the E C M list e E C M Data List see step 5 Change or delete the E C M data password name or copy limit in the list or reset the counters e E C M Function Setting see step 6 Specify the following E C M function settings Switching the E C M ON OFF Effect when the copy limit is reached Immediately After job Warning E C M password 8 digits under 8 digits E C M password input timing Panel reset timer Complete job Wrong E C M password from printer Accept Reject NOTES The above settings can also be performed on the machine itself except for the Wrong E C M password from printer setting Some settings may require operations on the machine Refer to pages 13 16 and 13 41 13 48 e The E C M Electronic Copy Monitor a
115. of the original will not be copied This mode helps to preserve the condition of originals improves copy quality and eliminates unnecessary toner consumption Keep the EDH open throughout the procedure Non image area erase has two modes Rectangular erase mode and Oblique erase mode The copier is initially set to select either mode appropriate for the original placed on the platen glass AUTO mode Key Operator can specify either mode and the original density level manually so that the Non Ilmage Area Erase functions without fail W w Oblique erase mode Rectangular erase mode Copy mode 1 1 mode only when using Store mode 1 2 mode can be selected Use the platen glass only Keep the EDH open throughout the scanning procedure Original size 11 x17 10 mm x 10 mm Image cutoff width leading end 5 mm trailing end 4 mm top and bottom 2 mm Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Using EDH APS AMS Rotation 2 2 2 1 Rotation Sort Rotation Group Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Z Folded Original Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Image Insert Book Copy in EDH Store mode Reverse Image All lmage Area Reduce amp Shift in Image Shift Storing image in Overlay Memory aaan O Sim NOTE The Non image area erase function may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen g
116. of the set Weekly Timer master key code to access the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen 3 22 Machine Information Service Settings continued HDD Management Password Your service representative can set a 4 digit HDD management password to access the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen After this setting a Password Entry Screen will display and require entry of the HDD management password to access the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen 3 23 Section 4 Paper Information Positioning Originals on the Platen Glass 4 2 Using the Electronic Document Handler EDH 4 3 Paper in Main Body Trays 4 6 Paper in C 403 Large Capacity Cassette Option 4 7 Paper in C 404 Large Capacity Cassette Option 4 7 Paper in Automatic Duplex Unit 4 8 Paper in Multi Sheet Bypass Tray 4 8 Paper in FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher Option 4 9 Paper in FN 122 Finisher Option 4 11 Paper in Cover Inserter E Option 4 12 Paper in PK 2 PK 5 Punch Kit Option 4 12 Paper in PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch Kit Option 4 12 Paper in ZK 3 Z Fold Kit Option 4 13 Paper in OT 104 Shift Tray Option 4 13 Paper Weight Compatibility Chart 4 14 4 1 Paper Information Positioning Originals on the Platen Glass Positioning an Original for Manual Copying Use the platen glass when originals
117. original o D E O o STATUS FREE Jog01 OUTPUT ZOOM 0 250 4 000 LENS MODE COPY SIZ FUNCTION 4 rc Peen Sie LAA Sl ora secar S BS 3d H g E Yerti i 8 L_SRIGINAL OUTPUT j ern F i Horiz gt o cena i a IP via 1 First determine the correct ratio as described above 2 Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen to display the popup menu for setting the zoom ratio 3 Use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the desired reduction or enlargement ratio in 3 digits or use arrows to scroll to the desired ratio 4 When the desired ratio is specified touch OK to complete the setting To cancel the setting touch ZOOM again select the desired ratio then touch OK 5 Position original s FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the EDH as required 6 When all other settings are acceptable press Start 6 18 Basic Operations Lens Mode continued Special Ratio Table COPY SIZE 9 10 11 12 ORIGINAL SIZE 13 14 15 16 17 6 19 Basic Operations Lens Mode continued Preset and User Set Ratios Use the Preset and User Set ratios to i
118. placement Face up orientation same as copy paper Curling tolerance 10 mm or less Using Mixed Original Mode Original size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 R mixed 5 5 x8 5 original is available in portrait type feeding only Mixed feeder capacity 100 original sheets 20 Ib bond paper See p 8 6 to p 8 7 for details of the Mixed Original mode Unsuitable EDH Originals 1 rah Curled creased or Paste ups folded originals or cut outs WAL ld ey Tat 0 Glossy or transparent OHP Folded punched Aas film art paper cellophane or stapled originals Thin or thick originals 4 3 Paper Information Using the Electronic Document Handler EDH continued Positioning Originals The Electronic Document Handler EDH automatically feeds up to 100 originals directly to the platen glass starting with the top sheet The EDH should only be used for unstapled unfolded smooth flat originals O Original size detection requires accurate paper guide adjustment O APS detects size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R and A4 O Size weight and capacity are specified for all copy modes on p 4 3 Before placing originals in the tray be sure the EDH is closed fully 1 Position original s FACE UP on the EDH tray Place two sided originals with page one FACE UP 2 Adjust paper guides 4 4 Paper Information Using the Electron
119. print quantity from the specifications shown on p 7 14 7 16 Output Modes Punch Mode The Punch mode is available when the PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch kit or ZK 3 Z Fold Kit option is installed in the FN 121 FN 10 Finisher or when ZK 3 Z Fold Kit option is installed in the FN 115 Finisher If both PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch kit and ZK 3 Z Fold Kit are installed in the FN 121 FN 10 Finisher the ZK 3 Z Fold Kit is used When the Punch mode is selected in combination with any of the Primary Main tray output modes each copied sheet is punched and output to the Primary tray according to the selected output mode O Number of holes PK 2 PK 5 Punch kit 3 holes only PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch kit 2 holes only ZK 3 Z Fold Kit 2 holes 3 holes user selected O Hole diameter 0 315 0 020 8 mm 0 5 mm O Hole pitch 2 holes 2 756 0 020 70 mm 0 5 mm 3 holes 4 252 0 020 108 mm 0 5 mm O Paper size 2 holes 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R 3 holes 11 x17 8 5 x11 O Paper weight 20 24 Ib 20 Ib paper recommended Thin paper 16 Ib 19 Ib Thick paper 25 Ib 45 Ib Some 45 Ib paper types may not be punched easily O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Using platen glass available when using Platen store mode Folding Stapling amp Folding Three Folding Output modes using secondary tray O Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 mixed 3 h
120. setting E 07 03 16 08 RETURN Diff time setting CANCEL Difference in Time Setting Screen Diff in time 9 _ Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 1 System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen then touch 1 Date amp Time setting to display the Date amp Time Setting Screen 3 Adjust the time The time indicated by the copier is displayed in the upper line and ordered by date month year and time in 24 hour expression In the lower line the highlighted section can be changed by using the keypad on the screen Touch SET to move the highlighted section to the number to be changed 13 4 Key Operator Mode System Initial Setting 1 continued Date amp Time Setting 1 continued 4 To activate the summer time Daylight Savings Time function touch Summer time to highlight it The Present time will gain an hour 5 The Difference in time setting is provided in order to give the time difference information at the same time when E mail is received To set this function follow the procedure below 1 Touch Diff time setting to display the Difference in Time Setting Screen 2 Touch lt to display when the local time is earlier th
121. setting to display the Weekly Timer On Off Time Setting Screen 4 When the screen is displayed the ON time of Monday is always highlighted Enter a 2 digit ON hour ex 8 a m is 08 and a 2 digit ON minute ex 7 min is 07 using the touch screen keypad and then touch SET Touching SET repeatedly will shift the input section from Monday ON Monday OFF Tuesday ON Tuesday OFF NOTES If ON time and OFF time are the same power will not go on e Ifthe setting is 00 00 00 00 you will not be able to set the copiers off on condition for specific days When setting Sunday OFF time Monday ON time is highlighted again Proceed to step 7 5 To set the ON OFF time collectively for more than one day of the week touch Block set to display the Weekly Timer On Off Time Collective Setting Screen 13 32 Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued Timer Setting 2 continued 6 When you open this screen the ON and OFF times are always set at 00 00 00 00 Touch to highlight the day s of the week to be set More than one can be selected at a time Enter the ON time and OFF time using the touch screen keypad and then touch SET after each entry 7 Touch OK on the Weekly Timer On Off Time Setting Screen or on the Weekly Timer On Off Time Collective Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen If other Weekly Timer setting changes are required select the desired menu item from 1 5
122. size FN 10 Finisher with Cover Inserter E 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 A4 A4R 8 27 x 11 69 210 mm x 297 mm Punch mode paper size FN 121 FN 10 Finisher with PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch Kit and or ZK 3 Z Fold Kit FN 115 Finisher with ZK 3 Z Fold Kit FN 122 Finisher 11 x17 8 5 x11 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R available with ZK 3 only Z Folding mode paper size FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher with ZK 3 Z Fold Kit 11 x17 Z fold 8 5 x14 double fold 6 7 Basic Operations Copy Mode continued Copy Mode Using EDH Before selecting the Copy Mode shown on the screen below read specifications on the previous page and see Section 4 for information on positioning originals Basic Screen with 1 2 mode selected gn original o D Ae 0 FREE Jog01 STATUS OUTPUT COPY MODE COPYDENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION an ww l SPECIAL om _STORE JOB O ORIGINAL COUNT MEMORY 100 96 1 Touch the desired mode key on the Basic Screen 1 1 1 2 2 1 or 2 2 A copy mode key will appear dimmed if it is incompatible with other selections made NOTES When selecting 1 2 or 2
123. the Manual Finishing operation press the Start Stop button again The finisher will cease operating When using Stapling amp Folding mode the unfinished set will be left in the stacker unit inside the finisher A CAUTION When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded the finisher will cease operating To avoid this select the appropriate print quantity from the specifications on p 7 14 CAUTION When the selected print quantity exceeds the Finishers maximum capacity remove the printed sheets while paper is exiting to avoid paper mishandling 7 29 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine without Finisher This section describes eight output modes for a copier without the Finisher O Face down non sort exit default O Face up non sort exit O Face down rotation sort exit O Face up rotation sort exit O Face down group exit O Face up group exit O Face down rotation group exit O Face up rotation group exit TDS 1 F Example 3 set copies Face down Face down Face down Face down non sort default rotation sort group rotation group Z Q ege SE Z ZL S SS SS Face up Face up Face up Face up non sort rotation sort group rotation group EEL Output Modes Output Mode for Machine without Finisher continued Face Down Exit e Non sort mode copies the original set in amounts determined by the print quantity setting
124. the message shown below is displayed on the Call for Service Screen you may continue operating the copier on a limited function basis and utilize the trays and ADU that are not affected by the trouble To obtain this limited functionality of the copier consult your service representative Be sure to utilize the limited function only temporarily and arrange for machine repair immediately 1 If limited use of the copier is available the following message is displayed in the message area instead of the Report code Tray 1 failure Press AUTO to select except this tray 2 Press Panel Reset Please switch ON OFF E 18 2 3 Turn the power switch OFF then ON A copying job can be continued without using the troubled portion of the machine ex Tray 1 A CAUTION EVEN IF THE COPYING JOB CAN BE CONTINUED WITH THE ABOVE OPERATION IMMEDIATELY CONTACT YOUR SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE WHEN THE CALL FOR SERVICE SCREEN IS DISPLAYED Troubleshooting Memory Overflow In certain modes the Konica Di5510 Di7210 uses memory for convenience and to make operations flow smoothly Occasional memory overflow may occur if the installed memory is inadequate for the copy conditions selected Should memory overflow occur frequently it is recommended that you contact your service representative to extend the memory capacity in your machine When memory overflow occurs the following screen will be displayed to enable you to take
125. the original image by 90 and output the 8 5 x11 copy to match the direction of the copy paper Original Copy paper Rotation and AP APS cannot be used alone gt O MMII Similarly when size 8 5 x11 copy paper is loaded in the tray in portrait orientation and the copier detects that the original is placed in landscape orientation Rotation and APS function together to rotate the original image by 90 and output the 8 5 x11 copy to match the direction of the copy paper Original Copy paper Rotation and APS ABCD APS cannot be used alone 6 40 Basic Operations Rotation continued Rotation and AMS When size 8 5 x11 copy paper is loaded in the tray in landscape orientation and the copier detects that the original is placed in portrait orientation Rotation if required rotates the original image by 90 and the copy is made with the appropriate AMS ratio to fit the portrait style of the copy paper Original Copy paper gt W O s Similarly when size 8 5 x11 copy paper is loaded in the tray in portrait orientation and the copier detects that the original is placed in landscape orientation Rotation if required rotates the original image by 90 and the copy is made with the appropriate AMS ratio to fit the landscape style of the copy paper Original Copy paper gt Ww O
126. to copy a tabbed original including the image of the tab part onto tabbed copy paper O Scanning sizes in Non STD size mode 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 R A3 B4 A4R B5R A4 B5 WHOLE AREA Original sizes in Tab paper mode 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 A3 B4 A4R A4 B5 Tab extension width 0 5 12 5 mm or less Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions None Incompatible Special Original Mixed Original Z Folded Original Non STD Size and Tab Paper cannot be selected at the same time Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Storing image in Overlay Memory Non STD size and Tab paper O Incompatible WHOLE AREA of Non STD size Combination Booklet Book Copy Non Image Area Erase Image Shift QOoOaQ0Q m Special Original popup menu Popup menu for Non STD size mode Select condition to scan originals COUNT SET Select condition to scan originals i ORIGINAL DUPLEX SPECIAL DIRECTION BINDING ENHANCE ORIGINAL ORIGINAL RIGHT Normal FUNCTION aier f 11x17 8 5x14 8 5x11R 8 5x11 UP h Mixed Non STD SPECIAL zib wAn merease Origin EEN size O RECALL ORIGINAL S5x05R AS B4 J ASR STANDARDJ APM 5 Z Folded Tab een afal Photo nona L pager O cance CANCEL a EE Text De j
127. to the Booklet tray in the Folding or Stapling amp Folding mode NOTES e Paper loaded into the cover inserter cannot be copied e This function is incompatible with cover sheet mode COVER WITH COPY SHEET and COVER WITH BLANK SHEET in Booklet and Sheet Cover Insertion O Cover paper size Upper tray 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 Lower tray 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 paper is available in long edge feeding only Cover paper weight 13 110 Ib 200g m cover paper Tray capacity 200 sheets 110 Ib 200g m cover paper or 30mm thick for both trays Incompatible Conditions Output to Secondary sub tray Punch using PK 2 Punch kit Z Folding Sheet Cover Insertion Cover sheet mode in Booklet Transparency Interleave O Incompatible Conditions with INSERTION selected Group Sheet Cover Insertion Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Non Image Area Erase Repeat AUTO Layout Overlay aun Copied set with covers and insertions Syl SY Copied set with covers attached in SD w Staple sort mode Cover sheet 4L n 5 Z Copied sets with cover attached in Folding or Nol Stapling amp Folding mode 7 24 Output Modes Cover Inserter E continued Output Mode popup menu ee Bl 0
128. will be indicated on the Basic Screen Paper Type Size popup menu pape p SIZE INPUT SIZE STD size fle STD size speciai j 3 FEPEPM x33 Tab TRD a Paper User RS 65mm CANCEL Wide paper OK S IDLE 0 e When Non STD size is highlighted the popup menu will appear To set the vertical size touch the vertical size key to highlight it then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the vertical size or use arrows to scroll to that number To set the horizontal size touch the horizontal size key to highlight it then use the keypad on the popup menu to enter the horizontal size or use arrows to scroll to that number In this case the Special indication and paper type selected will be displayed on the Basic Screen but the actual size information cannot be displayed 6 25 Basic Operations Copy Size continued Selecting Paper Type Size for Multi sheet Bypass Tray continued Paper Type Size popup menu pape p of Bypa a TYPE SIZE ow SELECT SIZE i s Thick OHP fiSTD size a pars liT PESE h i STD size 8 5x11 A E a Thin Trace special 8 2x1 1WR JE Non STD gt 5x8 54 W size 5 5x8 5WR CANCEL S er Input size 297mmx432mm User Tab paper
129. x11 Di7210 Approx 3 0 sec for 8 5 x11 Di5510 55 cpm 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 45 cpm 8 5 x11 R 37 cpm 8 5 x14 32 cpm 11 x17 Di7210 72 cpm 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 56 cpm 8 5 x11 R 47 cpm 8 5 x14 40 cpm 11 x17 1 9 999 copies 120V 10 16A 60Hz 2 5Hz Isolation recommended Max 1 920 VA full option Approx 75 dB A or less during copying AMS AES plus 9 level manual density APS detects 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Presets 0 500 0 647 0 733 0 785 1 214 1 294 1 545 2 000 3 User Sets 0 250 4 000 set by Key Operator Zoom range 0 250 4 000 in 0 001 0 1 steps Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice 16 2 Specifications Originals on Platen Originals in EDH Paper Source Paper Exit Tray Paper Weight Main Body Safety Standard Radio Interference Max size 11 x17 297 mm x 458 mm Sunplex original mode 1 gt 1 1 gt 2 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Max 100 sheets 20 Ib feed exit capacity Duplex original mode 2 gt 2 2 gt 1 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Max 100 sheets 20 Ib feed exit capacity Mixed mode 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 X11 5 5 x8 5 or 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Max 100 sheets 20 Ib feed exit capacity Original weight 13 34 Ib bond curl max 10 mm or less Transparency Paste up Offset master Labels amp Intermediate papers unavailable Main body trays 1 2
130. x17 5 5 x8 5 STD size spec 11 x17 A5 Wide paper 11 x17 W A5W NOTE 5 5 x8 5 W and A5 W copy paper is available in portrait orientation feeding only Paper Weight 16 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Paper in Multi Sheet Bypass Tray Paper Size STD size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R A3 B4 A4 B5 BSR STD size spec F4 A4R A5 A5R B6R Non STD size input the measures of paper between max 314 mm x 459 mm and min 100 mm x 148 mm Wide paper 11 x17 W 8 5 x11 W 8 5 x11 WR 5 5 x8 5 W 5 5 x8 5 WR A3W B4W A4W A4WR B5W B5WR A5W A5WR Paper Weight General mode 16 24 Ib Thick mode 25 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Thin mode 13 151b Tab paper mode 25 45 Ib OHP transparencies labels hole punch rag content can be loaded Paper Capacity 100 sheets 20 Ib stacked single feed special stock NOTE Reliability and copy quality are not guaranteed for all special papers Use only paper that is recommended by us 4 8 Paper Information Paper in FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher Option FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 In Bin Stapler Finisher accepts LEDGER 11 x17 LEGAL 8 5 x14 and LETTER R 8 5 x11 R standard wide paper sizes 5 5 x8 5 R W in Non sort Sort or Group mode FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher Primary Main Tray FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher capacities at 20Ib unless otherwise indicated Non sort Sort Group mo
131. x8 5 service adjustable Do not stack paper above the limit indicated on the side guide plate NOTE Be sure that the rear guide plate is securely aligned to the paper otherwise machine trouble may occur 3 Push the tray back fully into the copier NOTE Do not bump the tray into the main body otherwise machine trouble may be caused 14 3 Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Paper continued Loading Paper in Tray 3 and 4 When Thick or Thin is displayed on the tray key of the Basic Screen be sure to load the specified paper otherwise mishandled paper may occur When TAB is displayed on the tray key of the Basic Screen see p 14 6 1 Withdraw tray 3 or 4 and open the paper feed roller NOTE Do not withdraw the tray forcibly otherwise you may be injured 2 Place paper on the tray with the curl side turning up aligning it to the right side of the tray Load size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R or 5 5 x8 5 user adjustable Do not stack paper above the limit indicated on the side guide plate 3 Align the side guide plates to the edge of the paper while pressing the release knob located at the rear side guide plate NOTE Be sure that the side guide plates are securely aligned to the paper otherwise the machine cannot detect the correct paper size or copies may not be punched in position 4 When paper is seated properly close the paper feed roller 5 Push the tray back fully into the copi
132. zoom ratio or use arrows to scroll to the desired ratio 6 Touch OK to complete the setting To cancel the setting touch ZOOM again to display the popup menu Specify the desired ratios then touch OK 7 APS is automatically released on the Basic Screen Touch to select the desired copy size key 8 Position original s FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the EDH as required 9 When all settings are acceptable press Start 6 22 Basic Operations Copy Size The tray selection keys below COPY SIZE are used to select a specific paper tray When a specific tray is selected the APS key will fade and the AMS key will be highlighted The copy size may require a ratio adjustment When using the EDH with Initial settings a ratio will be selected automatically Tray locations correspond to main body tray 1 2 3 4 LCC and Multi sheet bypass tray Paper types such as Thick Thin User Tab paper Normal Recycle Color Special Fine Seal may be specified on the trays by the Key Operator for information only but paper types cannot be detected by the machine NOTE Do not load paper type other than that specified otherwise machine trouble may be caused O When a selected tray is empty an out of paper icon will flash on the tray key along with a message to load paper in the empty tray O When the Bypass key is touched and highlighted the PAPER TYPE SIZE key appears above the Bypass key Touch the key to display the P
133. 0 Release Auto Shut Off Press Energy Saver The copier will become available Manual Shut Off Press Energy Saver for one second or longer then release it The Shut Off mode will be activated NOTE The Manual Shut Off can be selected by Key Operator For the Key Operator setting see p 13 41 to p 13 48 When the Manual Shut Off is selected the Manual Low Power will be released The Energy Saver LED will light and all other LEDs and the LCD screen will be turned off NOTE Be sure to press Energy Saver for one second or longer otherwise the following message will be displayed and the Shut Off mode will not be activated Press Energy Saver more than one second then release it for shut off mode Release Manual Shut Off Press Energy Saver The Manual Shut Off will be released with the Energy Saver LED turned off and the LCD screen displayed 5 3 Copier Management Entering an ECM Password An ECM password is required only when the Electronic Copy Monitor ECM feature is activated a User Password is assigned and Enter E C M password is displayed on the touch screen piace Ale 0 FREE op 01 STATUS OUTPUT COPY MODE COPYD
134. 0 Di7210 is running Set production is not limited by the capacity of the Secondary sub tray Primary Main tray Staple Sort Staple Sort Z Folding mode 1 000 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x11 R The maximum capacity varies according to the number of copies to be stapled See p 4 9 When using Z Folding mode with Staple Sort mode the maximum capacity varies according to the number of Z folded sheet in one stapled set See p 4 13 to p 4 14 Secondary Sub tray Non sort mode 200 sheets max 2 18 Safety Information Finisher Capacity Requirements continued A CAUTION FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN BODILY INJURY AND OR MACHINE DAMAGE O FINISHER PAPER CAPACITY continued Booklet tray FN 10 only 100 sheets max 11 x17 8 5 x14 75 sheets max 8 5 x11 R A4R 50 sheets max in Three Folding mode The maximum number of sheets varies depending on the number of pages in the booklet and whether Folding or Stapling amp Folding is selected See p 4 10 O FN 10 FINISHER BOOKLET MODE OUTLET Inside the Booklet mode outlet is the roller drive unit DO NOT put your hand into it when removing the folded or stapled amp folded sheet otherwise you may be injured O FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 FINISHER PAPER EXIT OUTLET To avoid injury when stapling large size copies DO NOT put your hand into the open Paper exit outlet O FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 FN 122 FINISHER PRIMARY MAIN TRAY When printed materials a
135. 000 1 000 1 545 0 727 8 5 x11 0 500 0 607 0 773 1 000 w 8 5 x11 w 0 647 0 786 1200 1000 1794 4 294 09 N D 8 5 x11 R 0 773 1 000 0 727 gt gasdiwR 9 647 9 786 4 o00 1000 1 204 1294 0 941 O 5 5 x8 5 0 324 0 393 0 500 0 647 5 5 x8 5 W 0 500 0 607 6847 0 647 1000 4 000 9 855 5 5 x8 5 R 0 500 0 647 0 470 0 607 5 5 85 wR 0500 0 647 9 847 4 000 1 000 0 665 0 500 0 591 0 752 0 973 AMAAN 0 688 0 835 2 973 0 973 1 376 1 376 1 000 _ Rotation functions 6 17 Basic Operations Lens Mode continued Selecting a Special Ratio for Non Standard Paper To determine reduction or enlargement ratios when using non standard paper sizes refer to the Special Ratio Table on the next page and follow the procedure below ORIGINAL COPY WIDTH FIRST LOCATE THE ORIGINAL WIDTH ON THE HORIZONTAL AXIS THEN LOCATE THE COPY WIDTH ON THE VERTICAL AXIS FIND THE RATIO ON THE TABLE WHERE THESE TWO VALUES MEET ORIGINAL COPY LENGTH FIRST LOCATE THE ORIGINAL LENGTH ON THE HORIZONTAL AXIS THEN LOCATE THE COPY LENGTH ON THE VERTICAL AXIS FIND THE RATIO ON THE TABLE WHERE THESE TWO VALUES MEET The ratio you use must fall within the available magnification range of 0 250 4 000 Use the smaller ratio for reduction and use the larger ratio for enlargement Basic Screen with the popup menu for zoom setting gn
136. 00023 ICHI 100000 00012345 HORI 200000 12121212 KAKI 300000 NOTE Specifications for Each Machine Setting File Type E C M data setting file Begin the file with EKC_TAB Max 1 000 files can be edited A line should include PASSWORD NAME and LIMIT being separated by a tab Use up to 8 digits numbers 0 9 only to specify PASSWORD Use numbers alphabets capital letters only and four symbols and only to specify NAME Use up to 6 digits numbers 0 9 only to specify LIMIT 0 999 999 11 38 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Transmitting Editing Machine Setting File Environment Setup continued E mail data setting file e Begin the file with IP_EMAIL e Max 1 008 files can be edited e The second line starts with GROUP NAME if using grouping function followed by max 12 group names from 5th to 16th column e GROUP NAME should be 18 bytes or less e The third line if using grouping function should include NAME ADDRESS KANA and DAILY USE being separated by a tab NAME should be 18 bytes or less KANA same as NAME should be 18 bytes or less ADDRESS should be 200 bytes or less Mark DAILY USE and a group name with 1 in each column if necessary A group can include max 2 045 bytes of e mail address of the members A group should include at least one user ex Machine setting file of E mail data IP_EMAIL GROUP_NAME test sample MyG
137. 01 1000 QO CD PAGE NUMBERING 0001 1000 0001 1009 Lower Left L Middle L Right 0002 0005 Positions of other stamps WATERMARK NUMBERING SET NUMBERING Application Selection Screen Stamp Overlay Selection Screen O A o p 209K 30810 MARK f Application L Stamp Overlay STAMP WATERMARK OVERLAY JOB 01 O FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT SheetiCover Transparenc Non image a AUTO insertion m interleave EJ Area Eraso ml gt lmi Payout a Sa Al image Chapter Image Insert Ef ius Al WATERMARK o OVERLAY a Is H PAGE NUMBERING aa Combination s Book Copy Repeat i image Shift E WATERMARK 2 2 OVERLAY NUMBERING MEMORY CANCEL DATE TIME SET NUMBERING gt Program FramelFold Stamp Booklet 877 Sop Bog Erasure Overlay 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Stamp Overlay The Stamp Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed 3 Touch to select the desired stamp to display the subsequent screen On each screen you can specify the desired type of the selected stamp 9 40 Applications Stamp continued Stamp Selection Screen BOOK a0 and press O o MARK JJ Application L Stemp Overlay Set Numbering Type Selection Screen BER o BOOK jee and press O o
138. 0min 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password To display menus 11 to 20 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch the Lower arrow key 2 Touch 12 Energy saver setting to display the Energy Saver Setting Screen 3 The periods of time currently selected for each energy saver function are located on the Energy Saver Setting Screen below the Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off indicators Touch the arrow keys A and in each area to select a specific waiting period before activating the Auto Low Power or Auto Shut Off NOTES 1 The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto Shut Off setting 2 Ifthe same period of time as Auto Shut Off is selected for Auto Low Power the Auto Shut Off will func tion instead of Auto Low Power 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode screen 5 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 40 Key Operator Mode Memory Switch Setting 13 This function allows you to change the Memory Settings listed below See pp 14 43 14 48 for details on Memory Settings SW No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No
139. 1 The programmed copy density can be recalled by selecting USER 1 on the Basic Screen User Setting Mode Menu Screen User Density Level 1 Setting Screen 1 User density level 1 setting Darker Sample Output 1 1 2 Darker Sm NO NO 2 1 4 5 8 4 Normal NO 3 M0 4 l P 1 9 12 13 16 7 CANCEL 2 User density level 2 setting User lens mode ratio setting Set density 1 1 Lighter RETURN 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 3 User setting mode to display the User Setting Mode Menu Screen then touch 1 User density level 1 setting to display the User Density Level 1 Setting Screen 3 Place the original on the platen glass or in the EDH 4 Touch Darker or Lighter to select the density level to be programmed 5 Touch No 1 1 4 No 2 5 8 No 3 9 12 No 4 13 16 or Set density then press Start A density level sample sheet will be output 6 Select the desired exposure from the sample sheet s then enter the density level number by using the touch screen keypad 7 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the User Setting Mode Menu Screen 8 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 9 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 1
140. 1 ON APS AMS only ON APS AMS Reduce only ON Always OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 3 seconds 5 seconds Shut off mode Low power mode OFF ON JOB momentary stop JOB cancel Automatic selection Non Automatic selection Under 8 digits 8 digits 13 41 Key Operator Mode Memory Switch Setting 13 continued No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No Key Operator Mode Screen 1 E C M function setting Lock delete program memory Le 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 elect one of following ite 1 system initial setting 2 copier initial setting User setting mode Arrow key change Image Shift Exit direction of 1 sheet An interruption suspended way E C M password input timing Key click sound No paper JAM Reserve copy function Scan stop by a pull out tray Change page no pos booklet Timer which prohibits Print Bookmark function Delete of overlay image Orig direction binding mode Image stored cont SRV Image recalled cont SRV Exit direction I P SCAN Address manual input I P SCAN E Mail function mask I P SCAN HDD function mask I P SCAN FTP function mask State of Platen EDH Reset Priority tray blank overlap Auto Select the binding mode IP SCAN E Mail file form IP SCAN HDD file form IP SCAN FTP file f
141. 1 500 1 000 sheets Main body trays 3 4 500 500 sheets LCC tray 4 4 000 sheets Multi sheet bypass tray 100 sheets Tray 3 4 user adjustable Tray 1 2 and LCC adjusted by your service representative 150 sheets 20 Ib 16 lb 24 Ib bond recommended Max range 16 lb 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper in 1 2 or 2 2 copying 13 lb 15 Ib in 1 1 or 2 1 copying OHP sheet Transparency Labels Tab 3 hole UL 60950 CAN CSAC 22 2 No 60950 00 3rd version FCC Rules part 15 sub part B Class A IC CAN ICES CSA C108 8 M1983 Class A Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice Specifications Options Finisher FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Cover Inserter E Punch Kit PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Z Fold Kit ZK 3 Large Capacity Cassette C 403 C 404 Expanded Memory Unit M64 1 M128 1 M256 1 M512 1 Printer Controller Pi7200e HDD HDD 2 Machine Weight 450 8 Ib 204 5 kg 25 4 Ib 11 5 kg w EDH 121 Ib 55 kg w FN 121 Finisher 143 Ib 65 kg w FN 10 Finisher 143 Ib 65 kg w FN 115 Finisher 23 Ib 10 5 kg w Cover Inserter E 4 4 Ib 2 kg w PK 2 Punch kit 6 6 Ib 3 kg w PK 5 Punch kit 6 6 Ib 3 kg w PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch kit 83 6 Ib 38 kg w ZK 3 Z Fold Kit 66 Ib 30 kg w LCC C 403 93 Ib 42 kg w LCC C 404 Machine Dimensions Main Body with EDH Width 25 6 in 650 mm Depth 29 9 in 760 mm Height 44 9 in 1140 mm Document Handler EDH Width 23 6 in 600 mm Depth 22 4 in 570 mm H
142. 1 R A3 B4 A4 A4R Dimensions Width 26 4 in 670 mm Depth 25 2 in 639 mm Height 27 4 in 695 mm Weight 92 4 Ib 42 kg Power source supply from main body Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice Index Index 1 Index Numerics 1 SHOT indication time 13 41 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 6 8 1 2 Copy Mode Using Platen Glass 6 9 2in1 4in 1 8in 19 10 2 Repeat 4 Repeat 8 Repeat 9 28 A ADD PAPER key 6 34 Adding Toner 14 9 AES key 6 13 All lmage Area 9 33 Allocation recovery mode 12 2 AMS key 6 23 An interruption suspend way 13 46 APPLI key 9 2 Application Function Menu 9 2 Application Selection Screen 9 2 APS key 6 23 Arrow key change Image Shift 13 42 AUTO Layout 9 31 Auto Low Power 5 2 Auto select of Booklet copy 13 41 Auto Shut Off 5 3 Automatic Exposure Selection AES 3 21 6 13 Automatic Magnification Selection AMS 3 21 6 17 Automatic Paper Selection APS 3 21 6 16 Automatic Tray Switching ATS 3 21 Automatic tray switching Memory Switch 13 41 B Back Cover Mode 9 4 Basic Screen 3 20 6 2 Binding Mode 6 27 Book Copy 9 19 BOOK MARK key 6 44 Booklet 9 12 Booklet mode outlet 3 8 Booklet tray 3 8 Bookmark function 13 42 Cc C 403 Large Capacity Cassette 3 3 C 404 Large Capacity Cassette 3 4 Call for Service 15 2 Call Remote Center 13 50 Cartridge housing 3 9 CAUTION 2 2 C clear key 3 18 Change page no pos booklet Memory Switch 13 42 Chapter 9 8 Check Mode and Proof Copy 6 4
143. 100 sheets 10 sets max of 10 sheet folded booklet 10 x 10 100 sheets 5 sets max of 20 sheet folded booklet 5 x 20 100 sheets Approx 75 sheets max 8 5 x11 R A4R 15 sets max of 5 sheet folded booklet 15 x 5 75 sheets 7 sets max of 10 sheet folded booklet 7 x 10 70 sheets 3 sets max of 20 sheet folded booklet 3 x 20 60 sheets Three folding mode Paper Size 8 5 x11 A4 Paper Weight 20 Ib Number of Folded Sheets 3 sheets max Booklet Tray Capacity Approx 50 sheets max when folding one sheet in three CAUTION Inside the Booklet mode outlet is the roller drive unit DO NOT put your hand into the roller drive unit when removing folded or stapled amp folded sheets otherwise you may be injured Paper in FN 122 Finisher Option Refer to the User Manual for Finisher FN 122 4 11 Paper Information Paper in Cover Inserter E Option Paper Size Upper tray 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 Lower tray max 12 4 x 18 1 314 mm x 459 mm NOTE 5 5 x8 5 W and A5 W copy paper is available in portrait orientation feeding only Paper Weight 13 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Manual stapling 13 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Manual punching 13 45 Ib Manual stapling amp folding 16 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Manual three folding 16 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper NOTES Some 45 Ib paper types may not be punched easily e Punching specia
144. 2 specify the original direction and the binding mode on the Special Original popup menu and the Output Mode popup menu respectively See step 1 to 2 on the next page for details When selecting 2 2 or 2 1 specity the original binding mode on the Special Original popup menu respectively See p 8 3 for details 2 Position originals FACE UP in the EDH as required 3 When all settings are acceptable press Start To cancel the mode touch the desired Copy Mode key on the Basic Screen NOTE When the selected print quantity exceeds the maximum capacity of Finisher Shift tray or Exit tray remove the printed sheets while paper is exiting to avoid paper mishandling Basic Operations Copy Mode continued 1 2 Copy Mode Using Platen Glass When copying in 1 2 mode from the platen glass use the Platen store mode Refer to p 4 2 for details on positioning originals Special Original popup menu Output Mode popup menu with Finisher oul SI ele e ode amp 0 A ORIGINAL BINDING OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt HDD a STORE m aane O d croup 72 SHEET TANDEM Nosze LI RECALL bow LA E E EAEL rence E Reca STANDARD ETET A PETT STANDARD paper D CANCEL aroun Z5 CANCEL
145. 3 Key Operator Mode User Setting Mode 3 continued User Density Level 2 Setting 2 Output copying samples from 16 density levels from Lighter to Normal or Normal to Darker then select the desired exposure and program it as USER 2 The programmed copy density can be recalled by selecting USER 2 on the Basic Screen User Setting Mode Menu Screen User Density Level 2 Setting Screen 1 User density level 1 setting Sample Output 1 1 2 Wleomm Lighterf NO 1 NO 2 16 i 4 5 8 4 NO 3 NO 4 9 12 13 16 7 2 User density level 2 setting User lens mode ratio setting Set density 1 RETURN 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 3 User setting mode to display the User Setting Mode Menu Screen then touch 2 User density level 2 setting to display the User Density Level 2 Setting Screen 3 Place the original on the platen glass or in the EDH 4 Touch Darker or Lighter to select the density level to be programmed 5 Touch No 1 1 4 No 2 5 8 No 3 9 12 No 4 13 16 or Set density then press Start A density level sample sheet will be output 6 Select the desired exposure from the sample sheet s then enter the density level number by using the touch screen keypad 7 To
146. 3 Cleaning the Document Glass and Cover 14 15 Cleaning the Left Partition Glass 14 15 Clearing Mishandled Paper 15 6 Combination 9 10 Continuation print 13 41 Control panel 3 3 Control Panel Adjustment 13 38 Control Panel Layout 3 18 Conveyance Fixing unit 3 5 Copier counter 5 7 Copier Initial Setting 13 11 Copy Density 6 13 Copy Limit 13 18 Copy Mode 6 7 Copy Mode Using EDH 6 8 Copy Size 6 23 Copying Hints 15 8 Counter List 5 7 Counter start date 5 7 Cover Inserter E 3 4 7 24 Cover inserter E control panel 3 12 D DANGER 2 2 Darker Copy Density 6 13 Date amp Time Setting 13 4 DATE TIME Stamp 9 39 Delete of overlay image 13 42 Density Shift 6 14 DIMM memory 11 2 Drum unit 3 5 E E C M All Count Reset 13 22 E C M Data Edit 13 18 E C M Function Setting 13 23 E C M management list 13 49 E C M password Memory Switch 13 41 E C M password input timing 13 42 ECM Electronic Copy Monitor 13 16 ECM Master Key Code 3 22 13 16 ECM password 5 4 13 16 ECM Setting Menu Screen 13 17 EDH Electronic Document Handler 3 3 EDH AMS 13 41 EDH APS 13 41 EDH frame erasure selection 13 41 EDH Store Mode 6 37 EDHF original size detect 13 41 EDH Original effect 13 41 Index 2 Index E Mail Transmission Setting 13 9 Empty Trash Basket of PK 110 120 Punching Kit 14 12 Empty Trash Basket of ZK 3 Z Fold Kit 14 13 Energy Saver key 3 18 5 2 Energy Saver Mode 5 2 Energy saver screen 13 41 Energy Saver S
147. 4 N Non STD size Key Operator mode 13 26 Non STD size Multi sheet bypass tray 6 25 Non Image Area Erase 9 23 Non Image Area Erase Setting 13 58 Non Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray 7 4 Normal Copy Density 6 13 NORMAL key 6 13 0 Optional Equipment 1 13 3 6 Orig direction binding mode 13 42 Original count 6 2 Original Direction 8 2 Original Form 8 9 OUTPUT APPLI key 7 7 Output Mode for Machine without Finisher 7 30 Output Mode popup menu 7 7 Output Modes Using Secondary Sub Tray 7 10 Overlay 9 44 Overlay Memory 9 46 P Page Design 1 3 PAGE NUMBERING 9 39 Page space 9 34 PAGE SPACE key 9 36 Panel Contrast Key Sound Adjustment 13 27 Panel Reset key 3 21 Panel Reset key function 13 41 Panel Reset Mode 3 21 Panel reset timer 13 41 Paper Capacity for Staple Sort Mode 4 9 Paper empty indicator 14 2 Paper in Automatic Duplex Unit 4 8 Paper in C 403 4 7 Paper in C 404 4 7 Paper in Cover Inserter E 4 12 Paper in FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher 4 9 Paper in Main Body Trays 4 6 Paper in Multi Sheet Bypass Tray 4 8 Paper in PK 2 PK 5 Punch Kit 4 12 Paper in PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch Kit 4 12 Paper in ZK 3 Z Fold Kit 4 13 Paper indicator 14 2 Paper loading button 3 7 Paper Type Special Size Set 13 25 PAPER TYPE SIZE key 6 23 6 24 Paper Weight Compatibility Chart 4 14 Photo Mode Enhance 8 4 PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch kit 3 9 Platen AMS 13 41 Platen APS 13 41 Platen orig size detect SMALL 13 41 Platen origin
148. 5 45 Ib 1 1 or 2 1 copy mode only NOTE Paper type setting for LCC can be made in the Key Operator mode See p 13 25 p 13 26 Paper Capacity 4 000 sheets 20 Ib fixed to standard wide size 8 5 x11 W or A4 W 6 600 sheets including three Main body trays and 100 sheet Multi Sheet Bypass Tray Paper in C 404 Large Capacity Cassette Option Paper Size 11 x17 STD size 11 x17 F4 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R A3 B4 A4 A4R service adjustable STD size spec cannot be specified Non STD size input the measures of paper between max 314 mm x 459 mm and min 257 mm x 182 mm Wide paper 11 x17 W F4W 8 5 x14 W 8 5 x11 W 8 5 x11 WR A3W B4w A4W A4WR service adjustable Paper Weight 16 24 lb LCC specified in Thick 25 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper LCC specified in Thin 13 15 Ib 1 1 or 2 1 copy mode only LCC specified in Tab paper 25 45 Ib 1 1 or 2 1 copy mode only NOTE Paper type setting for LCC can be made in the Key Operator mode See p 13 25 p 13 26 Paper Capacity 4 000 sheets 20 Ib fixed to standard wide size 11 x17 W F4 W 8 5 x14 W 8 5 x11 W 8 5 x11 R W A3 W B4 W A4 W or A4R W 6 600 sheets including three Main body trays and 100 sheet Multi Sheet Bypass Tray NOTE Reliability and copy quality are not guaranteed for all special papers Use only paper that is recommended by us 4 7 Paper Information Paper in Automatic Duplex Unit Paper Size STD size 11
149. 6 19 Stacker unit 3 9 3 11 Stamp 9 39 Standard Equipment 1 13 Staple mode reset function 13 41 STAPLE SORT key 7 7 Staple Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray 7 6 Stapling amp Folding Mode 7 14 Start key 3 19 Start key latch function 13 41 STATUS key 6 30 STD size special Key Operator mode 13 26 STD size special Multi sheet bypass tray 6 25 Stop key 3 18 Stop key function 13 41 STORE key 6 35 Store Mode 6 35 Sub power switch 3 3 3 18 Subnetmask 13 7 System Initial Setting 13 4 T Tab paper 8 9 Tabbed sheets 6 12 TANDEM key 12 2 Tandem Mode 12 2 Text Mode Enhance 8 4 Text Photo Enhance 8 4 Three Folding Mode 7 22 Timer 3 18 5 5 Timer Action On Off Setting 13 34 Timer Interrupt 5 5 Timer Interrupt Password Setting 13 37 Timer Setting Weekly Timer 13 32 Timer which prohibits Print 13 42 To Release Automatic Rotation 6 42 To Stop Scanning Printing 6 5 To the User 1 2 Toner access door 3 3 14 9 Toner cartridge 3 5 14 9 Toner cartridge holder lever 3 5 Total counter 3 5 5 7 Transparency Interleave 9 15 Trash basket 3 13 Tray Auto Select Setting 13 39 U Unsuitable EDH Originals 4 3 Up binding 6 27 User Density Level 1 Setting 13 13 User Density Level 2 Setting 13 14 User Instructions 2 2 User Lens Mode Ratio Setting 13 15 User management list 13 49 User Setting Mode 13 13 USERSET key Lens Mode 13 15 Using the Electronic Document Handler EDH 4 3 Using the Multi Sheet Byp
150. 69 3 9 F n 47 109 aa 174 25 6 264__ CPO 37 4 30 2 eam 120 arle 866 gt lt 50 gt eray mie 950 ote 766 eS i 781 21 4 gt VN 644 YOR i Zw NS i a 63 8 aq 63 8 p 16 1620 at Hl J i yy fol YE Y lL 100 8 J le 72 3 A 2560 1836 Di5510 Di7210 ZK 3 Z Fold kit FN 115 Finisher C 404Large capacity cassette Unit inches mm x 3 9 6 9 3 9 t A 139 e100 18 0 16174 25 6 26 4 100 37 4 30 2 ES gt lt 331 gt l zo 650 mle 670 le gt 950 ole 766 SO e 7 NY 29 2 656 ah 4T 0741 YOR ry ii 3 8 1620 I call 44 9 1140 39 0 990 O _ y v g v YE ae z 95 9 j 72 3 al 2435 1836 Di5510 Di7210 ZK 3 Z Fold kit FN 10 Finisher Cover Inserter E C 404 Large capacity cassette NOTES 1 Dimensions are in inches with millimeters included in parentheses 2 The Finisher main tray of the FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 FN 122 Finisher or the exit tray of the OT 104 Shift tray gradually goes down while printed material is output DO NOT allow any object to interfere with the operation of the tray on the left side of the Finisher Shift tray as interference may cause damage to the machine Machine Information Control Panel Layout ND Print Copy Scan mm Oe Se a Coe Energy Saver so T Utility Interrupt SO Panel Reset A 14 top
151. 9 Use this function to change or delete the address registered for transmitting the image data scanned on the machine The following three address types are provided e E mail e HDD box No e FTP FTP server address NOTE The 19 Scan Transmission Setting key will function only when the Print Controller is installed in the machine Key Operator Mode Screen 2 Scan Transmission Setting Screen E Mail amp E Mail one of follo D F G 1 J L M o P s T v w z GROUP aa abcdef P O1 01 Tray auto select setting Side 2 lens adjustment Energy saver setting Finisher adjustment Memory switch setting HDD management setting abb coe Machine management list print Scan transmission setting 7 CHANGE abc Call remote center 20 Non image area erase setting DELETE yj t RETURN abcdefg CANCEL OK Change E Mail Address Screen Scan Transmission Setting Screen HDD amp E Mail tst Entry Name test d SURE abc konicaminolta com ijj l t CHANGE DELETE Capital Delete se mall Sign 4 CANCEL OK CANCEL Change Box No Screen Scan Transmission Setting Screen FTP Fp FTP abe Entry Name tst d t kkk CHANGE TSCcass iop DELETE Capital Delete fie mall Sign 4 gt CANCEL oK CANCEL Change FTP Address Screen Fp FTP labe afbl gt cHdpef fi afh Host Address srs i if kfifmfnfofp
152. 9 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 35 Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued Lunch Hour Off Setting 4 The Weekly Timer function turns the copier ON and OFF once a day Use the Lunch hour off function to shut down power during the lunch break and then turn it on again according to the Weekly Timer function setting Only one off time interval can be programmed Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen 3 Function Invalid 6 1 Weekly timer ON OFF setting Timer setting Timer action ON OFF setting Lunch hour off setting Timer interrupt password set OFF Restart 7 9 Am 1255 SET RETURN 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 9 Weekly timer Enter your 4 digit Weekly Timer master key code then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen See note 2 3 Touch 4 Lunch hour off setting to display the Lunch Hour Off Setting Screen 4 Touch Function Valid to activate the Lunch hour off function Set OFF time and Restart time using the touch screen keypad and then touch SET after each entry Touch Function Invalid to de activate the Lunch hour off function The time setting area will appear grayed out and cannot be selected The Function Invalid setting is the factory default set
153. A Al Osh Groots Get GS 3 Er H Address http 10 11 32201 eoform ekefune enhtml E K C data list Setting was deleted 11 27 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Setting E C M Function Environment Setup continued E C M Data List Window Me ft on raames Tsk Hep E Een 9 OA A Ash Girs Be G A Anns al 070159201 anto nikete en NPs Type ts Jes EEC daralist Save thie table as a fle 7 Me ei ven aert Tok Hap HBa gt QL a soh Favoras Moda G Gh SG Oi Adress el hts OTT E2201 oor neket nite Poe Types EEC datalist Apply Reset mm EIDET aKa ffewre gt l tava Z To save the E C M data list as a file 1 Click on Save this table as a file 2 Click on the radio buton heading the Save this file to disk in the File download dialog box then click on OK 3 In the dialog box disignate the folder for saving the data then click on Save NOTES e The E C M data will be stored in CSV format e The data cannot be saved while the machine is in operation In this case try this procedure again after the machine starts idling Click on Back in the browser window to return to the E C M ata List window for starting over 11 28 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued
154. AD D 5 Accros E rtp 10 11 98 201 apfemjeteune_encr es e To restore the previous setting click on Reset To cancel the E C M function setting click on Back e f an error message is displayed after click ing on Apply a setting has not been completed due to a machine operation in progress The machine must be in an idle state when you click on Apply Click on Back to return to the E C M Function Setting menu window or any menu item to jump to the desired window EE C Funetion Setting Setting was changed as follows 11 29 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Setting Scan Transmission Function Follow the procedure below to register change or delete the address for the transmission of the scanned image data using the web browser NOTE Using Scan Transmission Setting in the Key Operator mode you cannot newly register an E mail HDD FTP address or group the entries O The Scan Transmission Setting is available only when the optional Printer Controller is installed in the machine Web Utilities Window Favorres ma lD 3N A ie edt vores b ok gt OAA mE Om hO 11 32201 hooiormi coner en tn Address E retp 4110 11 32 201 cofor Favcrtss Ores Jlr aa Web Utilities J c Environment Setup Environment Setup Rey Operator Password Input Passwor e Apply Reset 1 Open the Web Uti
155. ASERSTRALING VED BNING UNDG UDS ETTELSE FOR STRALING PE o 0000 Printer head unit 2 13 Safety Information Regulations continued For the United States CDRH regulation This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under the Radiation Performance Standard according to the Food Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990 Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration of the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS This means that the device does not produces hazardous laser radiation The label shown on page 2 16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure This is a semiconductor laser The maximum power of the laser diode is 15 mW and the wavelength is 775 800 nm For European Users CAUTION Use of controls adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure This is a semiconductor laser The maximum power of the laser diode is 15
156. Combination Booklet Image insert Book copy Program job Mixed original Repeat Image shift Stamp Overlay enhance photos complex text image quality and enhance lighter images reduce toner consumption and produce clean copies with Non image area erase organize images into booklet format insert images scanned from the platen into a set scanned from the EDH document handler check copying conditions and produce a proof copy before making multiple copied sets confirm the current machine status select offset sort or offset group output mode using optional Shift tray OT 104 select offset sort offset group staple sort or punching output mode using optional Finisher FN 122 e select offset sort offset group staple sort folding or stapling amp folding output mode using optional Finisher FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 select punching output mode using optional Finisher FN 121 FN 10 with optional Punch kit PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES 1 4 Introduction Product Overview continued select punching or Z folding output mode using optional Finisher FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 with optional Z Fold kit ZK 3 set reserve jobs to make copies of different types in succession overlay stamp watermark or scanned images on the scanned originals store image data in HDD option for future printing Introduction Features of the Di5510 Di7210 e All lmage Area Makes copies printed completely to the edges of the paper to avoid image los
157. D size spec 456 STD size spec A Lead edge S ze Non STD size ASW STD size 42m 171 B49 STD size at Yv STD s 126 oj v SID 126 Input size 297mm x 432mm Special size setting CANCEL OK Special size setting CANCEL OK Special Size Setting Screen Input size STD size INPUT SIZE STD size spec 297mm ll Non STD size FSTD size 432mm STD size Select size Special size setting CANCEL 13 25 Key Operator Mode Paper Type Special Size Set 6 continued 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 6 Paper type Special size set to display the Paper Type Setting Screen To specify paper type 1 Touch the desired paper tray key to highlight it 2 Touch the arrow keys to select paper type To specify special size 1 Touch Special size setting on the Paper Type Setting Screen to display the Special Size Setting Screen 2 Touch the desired paper tray to highlight it 3 Touch a paper size key to specify a paper size for the selected tray e Select STD size to allow the machine to automatically detect the size of paper loaded in the tray and indicate it on the tray key e Select STD size special to display the popup menu to show available paper sizes to be specified Use
158. EDH unit 8 When your copying operation is completed press Energy Saver for one second or longer then release it The copier returns to the OFF state and copying is disabled 5 6 Copier Management Counter List This function allows you to view the current indication of the following items as a list on the touch panel Total counter Copier counter Printer counter Counter start date Check the list then print it from the Counter List Screen if desired Control PanelCounter List Screen Help Serial Number 564400001 Program Memory O ART DA Total counter 00000000 03 08 20 Counter list Copier counter 00000000 output Printer counter 00000000 Scanner counter 00000000 To Display the Counter List 1 Press Utility to display the Counter List Screen 2 Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen To Print the Counter List 1 Press Utility to display the Counter List Screen 2 Touch Counter list output The Basic Screen will be displayed 3 Touch the desired tray key to select the copy size 4 Press Start The Counter list will be printed out and the Management list mode will be released 5 7 Section 6 Basic Operations How to Make a Basic Copy 6 2 Copy Mode 6 7 Using the Multi Sheet Bypass Tray 6 11 Copy Density 6 13 Lens Mode 6 16 Copy Size 6 23 Binding Mode 6 27 Reserve
159. ENSITY LENS MODE FUNCTION A USERSET j Al c foo 0 SPECIAL pans LIGHTER H E ssid i cra ZE L g bee ssn z Carr ont E pane Ie PR Em io _STORE 1 Enter your 8 digit ECM password using the keypad If the ECM password is invalid the copier will reset to the Initial mode In that case enter the correct password or contact the Key Operator 2 Press Start once to display your current copy count and copy limit for 3 sec Current count limit 018888 025000 Ready to copy When your copy count reaches the copy limit the following message is displayed Copy limit reached 025001 025000 In that case contact the Key Operator to reset your copy limit 3 Make copying selections and enter print quantity as required 4 When all settings are acceptable press Start NOTE To restore the initial state press C while pressing Utility when the copy cycle is completed The message Enter E C M password is displayed on the screen 5 4 Copier Management Weekly Timer Function When a copier is using the Weekly Timer function the Timer indicator on the right side of the control panel is lit Important When the Timer indicator is lit the copier will automatically be turned off Do not turn it off by pressing power switch Timer Interrupt When the Timer indicator light is on and other indicators are off the copier is unavailable due to the Weekly Timer function
160. Environment Setup Mode continued Setting E C M Function Environment Setup continued To delete E C M data 1 Click on the check E C M Data List Window box es to select the z es E C M data to be deleted If all the data Sava this tabla as a fle SelectAll are to be cleared click cana nooo 1995999 aocooa com bocon mnogo 300000 jooo wji on SelectAll ocon maono 985999 oncon mji 2 Click on the radio button heading the oocomo ooo 777777 foncooo om Delete selected item s Except for Another user count 3 Click on Apply The Delete Confirmation window will be displayed NOTE To cancel deleting the E C M data click on Back or any E C M Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window 4 Click on Apply to immediately delete the data NOTE If an error message is displayed after clicking on Apply the data has not been deleted due to a machine operation in progress The machine must be in an idle state when you click on Apply Click on Back to return to the E C M Data List window or any menu item to jump to the desired window Sok gt O A A seach Garavones Grn Gla SO Address E Fte 1017 22201 feoforn eketure en html C EKC data list These entries will be deleted Fie Edt View Favortes Toos Help Enko O
161. Finisher Secondary Sub Tray ccccesceeeseeeseeeeeeeees 4 10 FN 10 Finisher Booklet Tray cccccceeeecceeeeeeeneeeeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeenaeeeeena 4 10 Paper in FN 122 Finisher Option ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseneeeeeas 4 11 Paper in Cover Inserter E Option cc ccccccceeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeseneeeeaes 4 12 Paper in PK 2 PK 5 Punch Kit Option c cceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeetaas 4 12 Paper in PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch Kit Option cccceecseeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeseneeeeeneeetees 4 12 Paper in ZK 3 Z Fold Kit Option 0 cccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeessaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeesaas 4 13 Paper in OT 104 Shift Tray Option ccecceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaaeeseaaeeseaeeeseneeetaas 4 13 Paper Weight Compatibility Chart cccccecesceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaaeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeeneeetas 4 14 Section 5 Copier Management Energy Saver Mode ccccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeseaaeesaaeeeceaeeseaaeeseaaeesaaaeeseeeeeeseaeeenaaes 5 2 Auto LOW POWT ci evs taney EEEE ted Eea pedicel et elds 5 2 Manual LOW POW aiena ea a E ORAE 5 2 At SNURO A aA eir aa e e aae a a E odes e e a a 5 3 Manual Shut Off eieaa a anaa aaea e aa Aaaa Aa E a aAa a aL Aae aea aR Taa 5 3 Entering an ECM Password jai csanctistaieaitiviees eaaa aeaa pta cnebitsed re debiana tisian 5 4 Week
162. H image deletion of a few millimeters will occur on the lead edge for the purpose of controlling copy quality and copy reliability unless deactivated by the Key Operator See p 13 41 to p 13 48 Service Settings The following functions can be provided by your service representative who is authorized to change DIP switch settings Contact your service representative if setting change is required Finisher Paper Capacity In the default condition the Di5510 Di7210 will produce unlimited sets If required your service representative can set the copier to stop copying when the number of copies exceeds specified number Key Operator Password Your service representative can set a 4 digit Key Operator password to access the Key Operator Mode Screen After this setting a Password Entry Screen will display and require entry of the Key Operator password to access the Key Operator Mode Screen ECM Master Key Code Your service representative can set an 8 digit ECM master key code to access the ECM Setting Menu Screen After this setting the ECM Master Key Code Screen will be displayed and will always require entry of the set ECM master key code to access the ECM Setting Menu Screen Weekly Timer Master Key Code Your service representative can set a 4 digit Weekly Timer master key code to access the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen After this setting the Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen will be displayed and will always require entry
163. IP SCAN FTP file form Select the file form when storing the scanned image data in the FTP server 54 Printing side lt Three Fold gt Select the printed side when using Three Folding mode 13 48 Key Operator Mode Machine Management List Print 14 Use this function to print out the list selected from the following items e Program memory list Programmed contents of Program memory e User management list Home position settings selected by user e E C M management list Machine information managed by ECM Font pattern list Font patterns used in the machine Key Operator Mode Screen 2 Management List Print Menu Screen elect one of following 1 Job memory list User management list E C M management list ect one of following ite 11 Tray auto select setting Side 2 lens adjustment Energy saver setting Finisher adjustment 13 Memory switch setting HDD management setting Font pattern list 14 Machine management list print Scan transmission setting Call remote center Non image area erase setting J RETURN 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password To display menus 11 to 20 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch the Lower arrow key 2 Touch 14 Machine management list print to display the Managemen
164. JOB and the next FREE JOB becomes active 6 If setting more than one reserve job touch the next FREE JOB to highlight it Repeat step 3 to 5 Up to 10 reserve jobs can be prepared NOTE To set the fourth reserve job touch the arrow key on the far right in the Folder key area to display succeeding folder keys See p 6 28 p 6 29 Copying on the reserve job will start automatically after completing the warm up NOTE To stop printing press Stop See p 6 5 for details NOTE The Job Status Screen allows you to alter the output order of the reserve jobs or to delete the reserve job See p 6 30 p 6 32 6 4 Basic Operations How to Make a Basic Copy continued To Stop Scanning Printing Follow the procedure below to stop scanning or printing Control Panel Basic Screen to stop scanning Print TA i 000 p2 93 PRINT Jon 01 STATUS i OUTPUT COPY Mone copynencity L LENG MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION mom B 69 BOOR OUTEUT APPLI STAPLE ROTATION IRE ICONTINUE EXIT ind
165. Key Operator Mode Centering Adjustment 23 Use this mode to make various adjustments concerning the image centering function e Printer centering adjustment adjusts the mis centering of images vertical to paper feed direction e Scanner centering adjustment adjusts the centering when scanning the platen original EDH centering adjustment adjusts the centering when scanning the EDH original Key Operator Mode Screen 3 Centering Adjustment Menu Screen 21 Background adjustment 1 Printer centering adjustment 22 Timing adjustment 2 Scanner centering adjustment 23 Centering adjustment 3 EDH centering adjustment t RETURN RETURN Printer Centering Adjustment Screen Scanner Platen Centering Adjustment Screen 9 SET NEXT BACK RETURN RETURN EDH Centering Adjustment Screen 0 D 30 0 S ep 0 SET RETURN 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password To display menus 11 to 20 and 21 to 23 touch the Lower arrow key 2 Touch 23 Centering adjustment to display the Centering Adjustment Menu Screen 3 Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function 13 62 Key Operator Mode Centering Adjustment 23 continued 4 Make fine adjustment on the screen T
166. LCC lett 1 LCCtopdoor 2 LCC left 1 LCC top door side door J side door a i A Tr 3 LCC lever 3 LCC lever L l 6 4 LCC paper guides 6 LCC bottom plate 6 LCC bottom plate 7 Rear stopper 5 Paper loading button 7 Rear stopper 5 Paper loading C 403 Large capacity cassette button C 404 Large capacity cassette LCC top door opens to allow paper loading LCC left side door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper LCC lever can be moved downward to ease removal of mishandled paper LCC paper guides hold copy paper to fix the position Paper loading button is pressed to lower the bottom plate to allow loading paper LCC bottom plate goes up automatically when paper supply becomes low and goes down when the paper loading button is pressed Rear stopper fixes the rear end of copy paper ouRhAWN J 3 7 Machine Information Machine Configuration continued Optional Equipment continued 5 Secondary 5 Secondary Sub tray 1 Finisher door SUb tray 1 Finisher door N NQIPN 4 Primary 4 Primary Main tray Main tray a 3 Booklet tray 2 Booklet mode outlet FN 10 Finisher only FN 10 Finisher only FN 121 Finisher FN 10 Finisher 1 Finisher door opens to the internal Finisher to allow clearing mishandled paper replenishing staples and emptyi
167. Memory Programs up to 30 jobs and recalls each job by job number as needed All compatible platen glass functions can be programmed into Program Memory directly after they are selected e Proof Copy To ensure correct output before running multiple copies run a proof copy by touching PROOF COPY on the Mode Check Screen or pressing Proof Copy key on the Control panel e Punch Mode for FN 121 FN 10 Finisher with PK 2 PK 5 Punch Kit Installed Punches three holes in output copies e Punch Mode for FN 121 FN 10 Finisher with PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch Kit Installed Punches two holes in output copies e Punch Mode for FN 122 Finisher Installed Punches three holes in output copies e Punch Z Folding Mode for FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher with ZK 3 Punch Kit Installed Punches two or three holes in output copies and Z fold copied sheets e Repeat Image Selects the horizontal image area across the page and repeats it down the page as many times as the repeat width setting 10 150 mm permits in manual or auto 1 10 Introduction Features of the Di5510 Di7210 continued e Reserve Scans in subsequent copy jobs while the Di5510 Di7210 is busy printing or copying e Reverse Image Reverses the image from black on white to white on black or vice versa e Rotation Exit Rotation Sort Rotation Group When no Finisher is installed Rotation Exit alternately switches the horizontal and vertical orientation of each sorted set as
168. NCEL iani O OOA l e THREE FOLDING FOLDING 0 OK oh IDLE 0 Basic Screen primary copier gn orig 0 D FREE Jog01 STATUS OUTPUT _ COPY MODE COPY DENSITY LENS MODE FUNCTION l SPECIAL STORE 1 Turn power on by pressing the Power switches of the two copiers 2 Confirm that both copiers are ready to copy with the Basic Screen displayed 3 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen of either copier to display the Output Mode popup menu 4 Touch TANDEM on the Output Mode popup menu to highlight it then touch OK The copier with TANDEM highlighted will become the primary copier the other copier will function as the secondary copier The Master icon displays on the Basic Screen of the primary copier to indicate that the two units are ready to work in tandem mode o i STAPLE 12 3 Tandem Mode Tandem Mode Operation continued NOTE The Sub icon will display on the Basic Screen of the secondary copier when Start is pressed on the primary copier to start the tandem printing operation NOTE The tandem mode cannot be selected continued in the cases shown below The message Please wait Reserve is not available in Sub machine Sub machine error Please chec
169. NUMBERING MEMORY omen oe All image Area Image Shift FramelFold Stamp bra Erasure Overlay f i 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Stamp Overlay The Stamp Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed 3 Touch OVERLAY MEMORY to display the Overlaying Image Selection Screen NOTE Without HDD the OVERLAY MEMORY key will be dimmed on the Stamp Overlay Selection Screen to show inactivity Overlaying Image Selection Screen Please select overlaying image Ty 800K 30810 MARK f Application L Stamp Overlay ABCD1111 2003 23 ABCD1112 2003 11 23 ABCD1113 2003 11 23 ABCD2221 2003 11 27 ABCD2222 2003 11 27 ABCD2223 2003 11 27 EFGH1111 2003 11 27 EFGH1112 2003 11 27 EFGH1113 2003 11 27 ABCD3331 2003 11 29 ABCD3332 2003 11 29 ABCD3333 2003 11 29 EFGH2221 2003 11 29 EFGH2222 2003 11 29 EFGH2223 2003 11 29 Le Coet sie 4 Select the desired overlaying image data to highlight it Use up down arrow key to scroll if needed 5 Touch OK to return to the Stamp Overlay Selection Screen 6 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen 9 49 Applications Overlay Memory continued To Overlay Image Stored in HDD continued 7 Make additional application selections or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 8 The Store mode is automatically selected and APS and AMS are releas
170. OLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN MACHINE DAMAGE OVERHEATING RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND OR PERSONAL INJURY O PLUG SOCKET A plug socket is limited in capacity Use an exclusive power source for this machine otherwise overheating and or smoking may occur The total power consumption of the main body plus all peripherals must not exceed the capacity of the main power supply Be sure the socket outlet is near the equipment and is easily accessible O PLUG AND CORD LEAD Unless the power plug is firmly inserted into the socket overheating and or smoking may occur Firmly insert the power cord plug into the electrical outlet before turning on the copier power switch If the inserted plug is loose in the socket disconnect it and consult an electrician for repair do not attempt to operate the machine Be sure the socket outlet is near the equipment and is easily accessible A damaged power cord may result in overheating short circuit or fire Do not bend crush wind kick or strike the cord with any item Do not roll up the cord If the main body power cord is bent or damaged immediately contact your service representative do not attempt to repair it yourself do not continue to operate the machine ADAPTERS AND PLURAL LOADS Never use adapters and never connect plural loads or a branched socket to one socket outlet otherwise overheating or fire may occur O EXTENSION CORDS LEADS An extension cord or lead is limited in capaci
171. PU rme A PET STANDARD WE N A Groop E CANCEL See ste 25 cance SORT J Ok A roine gt Totnes L oK oe By Oe 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Output Mode popup menu then touch to highlight the desired binding mode key 2 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 6 27 Basic Operations Reserve Set Reserve Job The Reserve function allows you to set up a new job while a current scan print job is in process When the current job is finished the Reserve job starts printing immediately The FREE JOB key on the screen is touch sensitive and active only when another job is in progress otherwise it appears grayed out Job settings Max 10 current job plus 9 reserve jobs O The reserve job is available to be set after the copier starts to scan the current job When setting more than one reserve job the next reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to scan for the previous reserve job When the current job is under Store mode Image insert or Book copy the reserve job setting will be available after the copier starts to print the current job O If certain conditions occur while a reserve job is being set such as activation of Interrupt mode mishandled paper or depletion of paper the current printing job will cease and the FREE JOB indicator on the screen will be replaced by INTERRUPT JAM or ADD PAPER as appropriate Perform the required measure for the situation at hand
172. PUT MODE HDD STORE x TANDEM Yeo RECALL STANDARD OF pine GROUP Nn FACEDOWN F CANCEL OK To Set Face Up Group Exit 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Output Mode popup menu 2 Touch GROUP and FACE UP to highlight them 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen Output Modes Output Mode for Machine without Finisher continued Face Up Exit continued Output Mode popup menu Ae BINDING OUTPUT MODE HDD STORE Q TANDEM RECALL STANDARD m ROTATION wc raceoown p gt canoer OK UE q To Set Face Up Rotation Group Exit 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Output Mode popup menu 2 Touch ROTATION GROUP and FACE UP to highlight it 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen Section 8 Special Original
173. Position 8 5 x11 size in either portrait or landscape orientation Position 5 5 x8 5 size in portrait orientation only 2 Position mixed originals FACE UP aligned with the left rear side of the EDH tray 3 Adjust paper guides to originals k 4 5 Paper Information Paper in Main Body Trays Paper Size Tray 1 and Tray 2 8 5 x11 STD size STD size spec Non STD size Wide paper Tray 3 and Tray 4 STD size STD size spec Non STD size Wide paper NOTES F4 8 x13 203 mm x 330 mm 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 service adjustable cannot be specified input the measures of paper between max 314 mm x and min 148mm x 100 mm 8 5 x11 W 5 5 x8 5 W service adjustable 11 x17 F4 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 user adjustable specify A4R instead of 8 5 x11R specify A5 instead of 5 5 x8 5 input the measures of paper between max 314 mm x 459 mm and min 210 mm x 140 mm 11 x17 W 8 5 x11 W 8 5 x11 WR 5 5 x8 5 W A3W B4W A4W A4WR B5W A5W user adjustable A3 11 69 x16 54 297 mm x 420 mm B4 10 11 x14 33 257 mm x 364 mm A4 8 27 x11 69 210 mm x 297 mm B5 7 17 x10 11 182 mm x 257 mm A5 5 85 x8 27 148 mm x 210 mm 5 5 x8 5 A5 copy paper is available in portrait orientation loading only 8 5 x14 W copy paper is not available STD size spec Non STD size Wide paper setting for each tray can be made in the Key Operator mode Se
174. R STATE STATUTES MAY PROHIBIT THE COPYING OF CERTAIN DOCUMENTS OR INFORMATION RESULTING IN FINES OR IMPRISONMENT FOR VIOLATORS Section 1 Introduction A OtMevW SOR tettecions cieciiat a teeth hk teed teat dat Seaton eats Gaol Fou rate bao oe eee erat cen 1 2 Key Operator FUNCTIONS ccccceceteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeseaeeeteeeeseeeees 1 2 Copier Service Repairs amp Supplies eeececceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeneeeeseaeeee 1 2 Machine Labels cccccccssseseeeeceeeesseceeceeeeesseceeceeseeeceeesteeeesseeeeeeaeagseeseetensagseeeeeeeaes 1 2 Control Panel with Interactive Touch SCre n cccccccccsseecessssssesssessesseeeceeeeeeeeneees 1 2 Overview of the Users Manual cccccccccccccceceeeeeeeueeeeeesesseeeeeeseeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeneneess 1 3 Helg Modenas socata riirii e seed die iaeia vedio lanes ete covey EEE EEEN 1 3 Produc Ove VO a a a a a A aaa a r eaa a 1 4 Features of the Di5510 Di7210 ninni a e aa a A A a Ant 1 6 Copier Features cecccceeccceceeceeesceeeeeeaeeeceaaeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeseeaeesesaaeeensaeeeseaeeeseaeeesseeessaees 1 13 Standard EqQuipMent iniiis ieir ireanii aaia oaa i ipea E aen eaei a aea Ees 1 13 Optional Equipment c cccceeeceeeeeeeeeee cence eeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeteeeeeenees 1 13 Section 2 Safety Information USerINStructions ivi See EE ca AN SS 2 2 Machine Labels stctsecstiestedivnereits nie e iaa ae ee
175. Register the E Mail HDD and FTP as required NOTE Click on the DAILY USE check box in the E mail Registration table if the data is frequently used e The symbols that cannot be displayed in the entry box will be ignored if entered e The HDD Box No will be registered as a 4 digit number For example entering 1 will be registered as 0001 Click on Registration to complete the entry Fle Edt view Favortes Tools Help The registered content will be displayed LAR Te Click on Back to return to the Scan TE Transmission Setting window E ayyex emall co jp No 11 31 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Setting Scan Transmission Function continued 5 Display the Entry List Click on Entry List of the desired item under the entry box to display the Entry List Click on Back to return to the Scan Fie Edt view Favoritos Tools Help t Eea 9 OA Al Qah rores Gua G ara Address htto 1011 3220 feoterm oscan enheml a es Email Entry List DEF GH ta MNO Pors Tw wev7 others DalyUse ALL ALL 37 Transmission Setting window Seryyee abeserz com Akita aboxys com 5 a abcxvz com omor A omori abezyz com April abezyz com m fom fim m fn baby abezyz com Apal Augest lAugest abcxyz com baby bata 6 Change the registered contents EES b abeayz com g wot ONAA
176. S PAGE SETTING Enter by keypad lt 1 15 gt Tray 1 THICK1 Tray 2 THIN FRONT BACK COPY COPY a copy gt INSERT FRONT BACK BLANK BLANK f og BLANK E INSERT gt CHANGE OF THE CHANGE OF THE COVERS TRAY INSERTION TRAY DELETE 9 3 Applications Sheet Cover Insertion continued Insertion Mode This mode is classified as Copy insertion and Blank insertion The Copy insertion mode copies and inserts plain or colored sheets at locations designated in the page setting area of the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen The Blank insertion mode inserts non copied plain or colored sheets The tray source for insertions can be selected and displayed on the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen Front Cover Mode This mode is classified as Front copy and Front blank The Front copy mode copies and inserts a plain or colored sheet into the finished set as a Front cover The Front blank mode inserts a non copied plain or colored sheet into the finished set as a Front cover When either Front copy or Front blank is selected the corresponding icon will appear on the upper left corner key in the page setting area of the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen The tray source will be the same as that for back cover and can be selected and displayed on the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen Back Cover Mode This mode is classified as Back copy and Back blank The Back copy mode copies and inserts a p
177. SITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION FREE JoB01 H F ERIE Basic Screen next reserve job available Basic Screen next reserve setting Ready to copy reserve Select FREE JOB Ale 0 Se eee ge 0 oe 01 STATUS TT STATUS OUTPUT _ COPY MODE COPYDENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION OUTPUT _ COPY MODE COPYDENSITY LENS MODE Ae ae 851 8511 Fg 5 8 5x1 j a aT z OUTPUT oe EBS IIe Lau 11x17 STAPLE P 11x17 DE THICK roppen STAPLE SORT o 1 Turn on the main power and sub power switches of the machine A few seconds after the Wake up Screen appears in the LCD touch panel seven types of Warm up Screens display in succession for approx 5 minutes Di5510 6 minutes Di7210 2 Touch the LCD panel to change the Warm up Screen to the Basic Screen Check that the message Ready to copy reserve is displayed on the Basic Screen 3 Set the desired copying conditions and enter the print quantity 4 Position original s FACE UP in the EDH or FACE DOWN on the platen glass 5 Press Start The original for the job will be scanned When scanning is completed the highlighted FREE JOB folder key will change to RESERVE
178. Sheet Cover Insertion Screen Touch CHANGE OF THE COVERS TRAY or CHANGE OF THE INSERTION TRAY to select another tray if desired At every touch the key shifts the selection in the display that includes paper type if specified in Key Operator mode When all settings are completed touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen 8 Select additional copying features as desired 9 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 10 Enter the desired print quantity 11 Position originals FACE UP in the EDH When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 12 Press Start After copying is completed touch Sheet Cover Insertion on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 7 Applications Chapter Chapter is used with the EDH in 1 2 mode for the purpose of locating title pages on the right side rather than reverse side of a duplex copy To effectively locate the title page on the right a blank sheet will be automatically created on the reverse side of a sheet if required O Title pages Max 30 from 1 999 O Copy mode 1 2 mode is automatically selected O Use EDH Store mode is also available in this case use platen glass or EDH O Use STAMP together
179. T 0 I 1 UTPUT MODE 7 1 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine with Finisher Finisher FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 is equipped with a primary main and a secondary sub exit trays Without using any optional equipment each exit tray provides the output modes as described below Primay Main Tray 1 Non sort mode simply means that the offset stacker finisher modes are not selected Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by sorted sets 2 Sort mode outputs multiple copies of the original set having each sorted set offset by 30mm upon exit 3 Staple sort mode offsets and staples each sorted set 4 Group mode groups together multiple copies of each original and offsets the sets by 30mm upon exit 4 3 1 2 Example Make 3 copied sets from 4 original sheets Non sort Sort Staple sort 3 Group 1 N i h 4 2staples fF 2 4 f NUA nod anos U anos ahws 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 jj 3 Kf f 1 I gy 2 Offset by 30mm 1oblique 1 staple Offset by 30mm 7 2 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine with Finisher continued Secondary Sub Tray 1 Face down non sort exit outputs simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies face down without offsetting the sorted sets 2 Face down group exit outputs multiple copies of each original face down wit
180. T COVER TRAY BACK COVER TRAY J __ INSERTION TRAY 1 Close the EDH securely then press Panel Reset 2 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu 3 Touch COVER SHEET to display the Cover Sheet Insert Selection Screen 4 Touch FRONT and or BACK to highlight it then select the covers tray Touch CHANGE OF THE FRONT COVER TRAY and or CHANGE OF THE BACK COVER TRAY to display the desired tray above the selected key NOTE Touch and highlight FRONT only if using Folding or Stapling amp Folding mode If no insertions are needed proceed to step 6 5 To use cover paper for insertions touch INSERT to highlight it Use the control panel keypad to enter the page number of the insertion location then touch SET to complete the entry and move to the next key To clear an incorrect entry touch DELETE Example If p 4 is entered a cover sheet will be inserted between p 4 and p 5 If setting more than 15 locations including covers touch the arrow key to move to the next page NOTES Page numbers entered out of order will be sorted automatically e Entering 0 or the same page number twice will be ignored on the screen e When a page number entered is larger than the total original page count it will be ignored 7 25 Output Modes Cover Inserter E continued 6 Touch OK to restore the Output Mode popup menu 7 Tou
181. TE Service setting is required to use the tandem mode Contact your service representative if desired O The two copiers should be connected in either way described below 1 Connect the two copiers directly using a crossover cable In this case other network functions provided to the copier will be unavailable 2 Connect each of the two copiers to the hub in a network using straight through cables Use the straight through or crossover cables of Category 5 or of the later standard to connect the machines O The combination of the two copiers can be either the same models two Di5510 copiers or two Di7210 copiers or different models Di5510 and Di7210 Two copiers should have the same optional configuration except for the option cassette C 403 C 404 O Two copiers should be turned on and ready for copying O The copier with the TANDEM key highlighted on the Output Mode popup menu will be the primary master copier turning both copiers into the tandem mode Select the copying conditions scan originals and press Start on the primary copier to operate both copiers in tandem to complete a job O Print quantity must be set for 2 or more copies to activate the tandem mode When the print quantity entered is an odd number the primary copier will copy and output one sheet set more than the secondary copier to accommodate the job O Auto low power Auto shut off may function while tandem mode is selected e If the tandem mode is selected whi
182. The order of the reserve jobs can be altered on the Job Status Screen The reserve jobs can be deleted on the Job Status Screen Incompatible Basic Copy Conditions Interrupt copying Scanning in Store mode Proof copy Incompatible Special original None Incompatible Applications Storing image in Overlay Memory aaan Basic Screen reserve job available Reserve Job Setting Screen Please p O OR b A Sem son 01 r OUTPUT copy MODE coP pENsiTY LENS MODE quTeit enev mane rnpyoensity LENS MODE wm ra Cg amp OUTPUT OUTPUT Ga STAPLE STAPLE sort sort RESERVE JOB QO ORIGINAL COUNT 6 28 Basic Operations Reserve continued Set Reserve Job continued 1 Touch FREE JOB to display the Reserve Job Setting Screen 2 Set the desired copying conditions for the reserve job When the Reserve Job Setting Screen is displayed all keys on the LCD and Control panel will function for the reserve job NOTE When trouble occurs while setting the reserve job the PRINT or SCAN JOB key changes to JAM ADD PAPER key on the Basic Screen See p 6 33 to p 6 34 3 Position original s FACE UP in the EDH or FACE DOWN on the platen glass after completing scan for the c
183. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate ratio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The design and production of this unit conform to FCC Regulations and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control Any changes made by the purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations This device must be used with shielded interface cables The use of non shielded cable is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under FCC rules FCC F01 ICES Regulations This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada IC F03 Laser Safety This is a digital machine which operates by means of a laser There is no possibility of danger from the laser provided the mac
184. Transparency Interleave 9 15 Image Insert 9 17 Book Copy 9 19 Program Job 9 21 Non Image Area Erase 9 23 Reverse Image 9 25 Repeat Image 9 26 Frame Fold Erasure 9 29 AUTO Layout 9 31 All lmage Area 9 33 Image Shift 9 34 Stamp 9 39 Overlay 9 44 Overlay Memory 9 46 Select Application function FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Sheet Cover Transparency Ne AUTO He Insertion Interleave Al Layout T Chapter Image Insert Si 4 fereree Al B alemage 12 SENE AAA f i Combination BE Book Copy s Efl Repeat gt ARA Image Shift S Program Frame Fold Stamp Booklet lt H Oun MT g WH Overlay beni clean cancer ok Applications Application Function Menu When APPLI key on the Basic Screen is touched the Application Selection Screen displays on the touch panel If one function on the menu is incompatible with another it will appear grayed out When a function key is touched it becomes highlighted If you touch a function key another screen or two will display to enable you to enter the appropriate settings For example you may select Repeat from the Application Selection Screen and then choose a desired repeat image mode another screen will display whe
185. URN on the Key Operator Mode Screen The Basic Screen will be displayed NOTES 1 If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid Weekly Timer master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit code 13 30 Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued Weekly Timer On Off Setting 1 Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Weekly Timer On Off Setting Screen 1 Weekly timer ON OFF setting 2 Timer setting 3 Timer action ON OFF setting Weekly timer On Weekly timer Off 4 Lunch hour off setting 5 Timer interrupt password set RETURN CANCEL 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 9 Weekly timer Enter your 4 digit Weekly Timer master key code then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen See note 2 3 Touch 1 Weekly timer ON OFF setting to display the Weekly Timer On Off Setting Screen 4 Touch Weekly timer On to activate Weekly Timer or touch Weekly timer Off to de activate Weekly Timer The default setting is Weekly Timer Off The selected key will be highlighted 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen If other Weekly Timer setting changes are required select the desired menu item from 1 5 6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Scree
186. URN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 6 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations Key Operator Mode System Initial Setting 1 continued IP Address Setting 3 When using the server function this setting is required to enable a PC to gain access to this machine NOTE Consult your network manager to perform this setting Incorrect setting may cause a trouble with other network systems O Setting options IP address Subnetmask Gateway addess Line speed setting System Initial Setting Menu Screen IP Address Setting Screen 1 Date amp Time setting EE 1 2 90 1 3 2 5 6 Gateway address 10 11 0 1 7 8 9 0 Language select setting Subnetmask 255 255 240 000 4 1 2 3 IP address setting 4 E Mail transmission setting RESET SET RETURN Line speed setting CANCEL IP Address Setting Screen 2 IP add Server PC 10 9 4 251 1 4 6 7 9 RESET SET t CANCEL OK Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 1 System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen then touch 3 IP address setting to display the IP Address Setting Screen 3 Make the required setting Touch to highlight the address
187. a a SEE near E EE 2 3 Label Localons arseno ni A OSEO 2 3 Machine Installation and Power RequireMent ccccccceceeseeeeeseneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeereaea 2 8 Machine Handling and Carre cccccceccceceeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeceaeeeseeeseeaeeseeeeseeeeeneieeeseneeee 2 10 ROUTING Safety iiem sekako iae seapea ea a aa ea eea eaae ENEA 2 11 PROQUIATIONS a at EEE A E ARO AERA 2 12 FCG Regulation Sisner iae ear a e aap ie a ee 2 12 ICES Regulations ceccccceccceeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeseaaeeeeaaeeseeaeesseaeeseeaeesseeesneeeessaeeeeaas 2 12 laser Safety aiaa a eaaa ea aada aaa aaraa etch deelle ct shed he dea E laaa Daana 2 12 Internal Laser Radiation eoriet aan EE R AD 2 13 Laser Safety Labele aeieea den a eae aaa E aa a ae he wealth tdetine eetaete 2 16 OZONE Release ein kaera aaka raa a raa arrea a eaaa eatae ira neako Satina 2 17 Finisher Capacity Requirements cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeecaeeseeaeeseaaeeseaaeeseeeeeeneeetaas 2 18 Section 3 Machine Information Machine Configuration cccccccecceeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeseeeeeteaeeeseaeeeegeeeseneeeseeaeeesneeenea 3 2 External Machine Call outs 0 cccccecseceeeeeeeeeeceeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeetseeeseeees 3 3 Internal Machine Call OUts cccccceeeeceeeeceeeeeceeeseaeeseaaeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeeenaeeesenees 3 5 Optional Equipment sise eieiei iiaii ii eda yee Wee disse teed 3 6 Site REQUIFEMENHS ceececeeee
188. a after the machine operation in progress is completed e The data cannot be recognized Oe Ed Yew Faerie Im teh E SaaS Gun ES Confirm that the data is the machine setting file dem TETE e Data size is too large Setting data Import Export 7 A 5 3 EKC settings were registered Confirm that the data is the machine setting file a Check if the file size exceeds 100 000 bytes Back e The data cannot be registered Check if inappropriate description is made in the machine setting file See p 11 45 for details Check if the file entries are already over the limit 11 37 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Transmitting Editing Machine Setting File Environment Setup continued NOTE To Edit the Machine Setting File e Save the file as a text e Begin the file with a specified tag ex EKC_TAB e Aline should be 300 bytes or less e The file size should be 100 000 bytes or less e The line that begins with is a comment ex Machine setting file of an E C M data EKC_TAB PASSWORD NAME LIMIT 00003636 ADMIN 100000 00000001 1 100000 00008156 KEN 000010 00000123 AAA 100000 12345678 A 001000 00000120 AAAA_ 010000 00003636 000000 36363636 ADADMIN 100000 12341234 HOHO 100000 20202020 HAHA 200000 30303030 HEHE 300000 40404040 WAWA 000100 000
189. a cooo cana wo s00000 jooo oonn00 ocom mand 985999 ancoon onmo cana nooo 777777 oocoon cooo aaan 11 24 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Setting E C M Function Environment Setup continued To change Password Name or 1 Click on the number of the data r to be edited pic The E C M Edit Setting window will be displayed 2 Change the password name or limit as desired For details in entering procedure refer to p 11 29 3 Click on Apply E C M Edit Setting Window 0o05 00000120 Up to 8 digt AAAA Up to 8 characters ABC Z0 030000 Up to 999999 NOTES e To clear the text boxes click on Reset e To cancel editing the E C M data click on Back or any E C M Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window e See NOTES on p 11 30 if an error message is displayed after clicking on Apply The edited content will be displayed in the seeme window Rin ES The edited data will be transmitted to the machine immediately so that is valid for the user operations Click on Back to return to the E C M Data List window 11 25 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Setting E C M Function Environment Setup continued To reset E C M count E C M Data List Windo
190. a stored in memory The Interrupt LED blinks until one set of the current job is printed Then the LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode e Scanning originals into memory The Interrupt LED blinks until scanning is completed for all originals placed in the EDH Then the LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode e Scanning originals into memory while printing in Reserve mode see Note 1 The Interrupt LED blinks until the copier completes the current printing job and scans all originals placed on the EDH The LED remains steady for the temporary job performed in Interrupt mode All JOB indicators on the Basic Screen will change to INTERRUPT 6 38 Basic Operations Interrupt Mode continued 2 Remove any document from the platen glass or from the EDH if present 3 Place new original s on the platen glass or in the EDH 4 The copying settings in Interrupt mode are as follows Copy Mode 1 1 EDH ON AES ON Lens Mode 1 000 APS ON Print Quantity 1 Finisher Output to Secondary Sub tray Select other copying features that are compatible with the Interrupt mode if desired 5 Press Start 6 When Interrupt copying is completed press Interrupt again to return to the settings of the initial job 7 Replace the initial original then press Start to resume copying NOTES 1 In Reserve mode pressing Interrupt before the copier finishes scanning o
191. achine with PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch kit i He 0 CANCEL 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu 2 Touch PUNCH to display the Punch Position popup menu 3 Touch the desired punch position key to highlight it 4 Touch OK on the Punch Position popup menu to restore the Output Mode popup menu 5 Touch OK on the Output Mode popup menu to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen The selection made in punch position will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area 7 18 Output Modes Punch Mode continued 6 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu 7 Touch to select the desired original set direction then touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 8 Select additional copying features as required 9 Enter the desired print quantity 10Position originals in the EDH When using Store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 37 11Press Start NOTES 1 Some staple positions previously selected may conflict with this function 2 Do not punch special paper type such as transparent films labels tabbed sheets etc Otherwise machine trouble may occur in Punching kit 3 Be sure that the paper guides of the paper tray are securely aligned to the paper otherwise the cop ies may not be punched in position 4 If the ATS Automatic Tray Switching functions while the machine uses the PK 2 Punch kit in Punch mode the punch holes may be slightly off th
192. ailable Selects an output mode on the Output Mode popup menu e Output mode for Machine with no Finisher Installed Non sort Rotation sort Group and Rotation group modes are available in combination with Face down or Face up exit Selects an output mode on the Output Mode popup menu e Output mode for FN 121 FN 10 Finisher with Cover Inserter E Installed Cover Sheet mode Manual Staple mode For details of each output mode see Section 7 Output Modes e Overlay Imprints a scanned image onto the copy image e Overlay Memory Stores the overlaying image in HDD and prints a stored image onto the copy image e Panel Reset Automatically resets to auto mode defaults after a specified period of copier inactivity Introduction Features of the Di5510 Di7210 continued e Paper Capacity Total 3 600 sheets including two 500 sheet trays a 1 500 sheet tray a 1 000 sheet tray and a 100 sheet Multi sheet bypass tray Total 7 600 sheets including 4 000 sheet optional large capacity Cassette e Platen Memory Scans documents into memory from the platen glass and or the EDH and inserts the pages into another document copied from the EDH If an incompatible function is selected in this mode the latter function will not be selected and a Error message will be displayed e Program Job Scans documents into memory while designating a different copy condition for each original then prints all the documents collectively e Program
193. al paper 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 and 5 5 x8 5 mixed 16 Ib 32 Ib 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 and 5 5 x8 5 mixed 16 Ib 32 Ib 5 5 x8 5 original is available in portrait type feeding only O EDH capacity Max 100 sheets O APS is automatically selected can be switched to AMS when copy size is selected O Rotation can be used with AMS O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Staple Sort with APS Rotation Sort Folding Stapling amp Folding Three Folding Punch using PK 2 Punch kit APS mode and or 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 mixed O Incompatible Special Original Z Folded Original Non STD Size Tab Paper O Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat AUTO Layout Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory Special Original popup menu ele elile O O a O g a O 0 oe PMDN ENHANCE SREMA ORIGINAL STATUS i RIGHT p Normal A FUNCTION eT E uP FJ Increase ae Mixed gt Z BINDING o Contrast S RECALL STANDARD Folde Eg Photo Ml originai lt S CANCEL 3 Text OK
194. al size detect 13 41 Platen Store Mode 6 35 PM Counter 14 14 Positioning Mixed Originals 4 5 Positioning Originals on the Platen Glass 4 2 Power OFF ON Screen 15 5 Preset and User Set Ratios 6 20 Preventive Maintenance 14 14 Primary Main tray 3 8 3 10 Printer counter 5 7 Product Overview 1 4 Program Job 9 21 Program Memory 10 3 10 5 Program memory auto recall 30 13 41 Program Memory key 3 18 10 3 Program memory list 13 49 Proof Copy key 3 19 6 43 Punch Mode 7 17 Index 4 Index R RE key 6 20 Recalling Previous Job Settings 6 6 Reduce and Shift 9 37 Remote Diagnostics 13 50 Repeat Image 9 26 Report code 15 2 Reserve 6 28 Reserve copy function 13 42 Reverse Image 9 25 RIGHT amp LEFT BINDING key 6 27 Rotation 6 40 Rotation Memory Switch 13 41 Rotation and AMS 6 41 Rotation and APS 6 40 ROTATION OFF 6 42 Routine Safety 2 11 S Scan stop by a pull out tray 13 42 Scan Transmission Setting 13 56 Secondary Sub tray 3 8 3 10 Select tray when APS cancel 13 41 Selecting a Special Ratio for Non Standard Paper 6 18 Selecting Paper Type Size for Multi Sheet Bypass Tray 6 24 Server Function 11 2 Service Settings 3 22 SET NUMBERING 9 39 Set Reserve Job 6 28 Setting Job During Warm up 6 4 Sheet Cover Insertion 9 3 Side 2 Lens Adjustment 13 51 Site Requirements 3 15 SORT key 7 31 Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray 7 5 SPECIAL ORIGINAL key 6 45 Special Original popup menu 8 2 Special Ratio Table
195. ally detected or not when ATS APS functions 4 Tray keys specified as ATS APS ON will appear on the right half of the screen Touch to highlight the desired tray key then change its priority by using Up A and Down V arrow keys 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 6 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 39 Key Operator Mode Energy Saver Setting 12 Select the interval of time that must elapse before Auto Low Power and Auto Shut Off become activated Auto Shut Off conserves more energy than Auto Low Power The period of time selected for Auto Low Power cannot exceed the Auto Shut Off setting Key Operator Mode Screen 1 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 elect one of following ite Tray auto select setting Side 2 lens adjustment Energy saver setting Finisher adjustment Memory switch setting HDD management setting 1 System initial setting 5 Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting E C M function setting 3 Weekly timer Machine management list print Scan transmission setting Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment Call remote center Non image area erase setting Ls RETURN a RETURN Energy Saver Setting Screen Auto Low Power 5 min Auto Shut off min 10 min 30 min 60 min 30 min 90 min 60 min 120min 90 min bA 120min 24
196. als e Network Function option When the machine is connected to a PC over a network it uses a web browser on the PC to manage the stored data to check the machine or job information and to perform the Key Operator settings concerning the network environment e Non Image Area Erase When copying from the platen glass when the document cover is open copies only the image area and not the exposed area of glass which would otherwise copy as black Introduction Features of the Di5510 Di7210 continued e Non STD Size for Multi Sheet Bypass Tray Enters the special paper size to be loaded on the Multi sheet bypass tray using the touch screen keypad in order to avoid paper misfeed e Non STD Size for Original Identifies the special original size which the Di5510 Di7210 cannot detect in order to select the optimal paper size for copying or printing e Output mode for Machine with FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher Installed Non Sort Sort Staple Sort and Group modes using the primary main tray Non Sort Face Down exit Non Sort Face Up exit Group Face Down exit and Group Face Up exit modes using the secondary sub tray Folding Stapling amp Folding and 3 Folding modes using the booklet tray FN 10 only Selects an output tray and output mode on the Output Mode popup menu For details of each output mode see Section 7 Output Modes e Output mode for Machine with OT 104 Shift Tray Installed Non sort Sort and Group modes are av
197. also change the job name of the image data To use this function the optional HDD is required in the machine 4 Environment Setup Performs the Key Operator setting concerning network environment Browser Internet Explorer 5 5 SP2 Netscape 4 7 or later Follow the procedure below to access the Web Utilities of the machine using the web browser 1 Turn on the power to the PC connected with the machine over a network NOTE Contact your network manager for details on the network system 2 Activate the web browser then select Open from the File menu cen eee zixl C Type the Internet address of a document or folder and wy Internet Explorer will open it for you Open v I Open as Web Folder acres Cancel Browse 3 Enter the URL http IP address or host name of the machine then click on OK The Main Page of the Web Utilities will be displayed NOTE Ask your network manager for the IP address or host name of the machine 11 12 Network Function To Use Web Utilities continued Web Utilities Window File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt A Qsearch ajravortes PMedia G D GG Address http 10 11 32 201 eoform index_enhtm Main Page 8 Web Utilities Status Print ready goahead WEBSERVER japanese BAKER English EFE The Main Page informs you of the current job status of the machine and the maintenance item if required
198. an the Universal time or when the local time is later 3 Use the keypad on the screen to enter the time difference between the Universal time and the local time in the machine setting area e g Enter O600 for 6 hours later than the Universal time 6 Touch OK to update the Present time by the Setting time and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen 7 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 8 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations Key Operator Mode System Initial Setting 1 continued Language Select Setting 2 Select the language used in the LCD English O Default setting American English System Initial Setting Menu Screen Language Selection Screen Date amp Time setting Language select setting 1 2 3 IP address setting American English 4 E Mail transmission setting RETURN CANCEL l Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 1 System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen then touch 2 Language select setting to display the Language Selection Screen 3 Select the desired English mode 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen 5 Touch RET
199. and interleave blank or copied paper for each original copied e Userset Density USERSET 1 USERSET 2 Outputs up to 16 density samples on a total of 4 pages that display 4 samples per page then programs the desired density under USERSET 1 and or USERSET 2 e Weekly Timer Can be set according to the needs of each work environment Turns main body power Off On daily or weekly during lunch time on holidays and also enables the Timer Interrupt mode which allows temporary use of the machine even when the machine is in the daily weekly or holiday Off Mode e Wide Size Paper Copies onto paper slightly larger than the specified regular size e Z Folded Original This feature sets the EDH to accept Z folded originals 1 12 Introduction Copier Features Standard Equipment Main Body with 4 Paper Trays 1 500 1 000 500 500 sheets Electronic Document Handler EDH EDH 7 Automatic Duplex Unit ADU Configuration Options with Multi Sheet Bypass Tray 100 sheets Optional Equipment Stapler Finisher FN 121 FN 115 FN 122 This finisher is equipped with two exit trays Secondary sub tray Four output types can be specified on the Output Mode popup menu 1 Face down non sort exit 2 Face up non sort exit 3 Face down group exit 4 Face up group exit Primary main tray Four output types can be specified by STAPLE SORT and SORT keys on the Basic Screen and by the setting on the Output Mode popup menu Face up exit i
200. aper Type Size popup menu then specify the type and size of the special paper to be loaded on the Multi sheet bypass tray See the next page O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions with AMS APS Change magnification O Incompatible Special Original with AMS None g Incompatible Applications with AMS Book Copy Non Image Area Erase Repeat AUTO Layout Overlay Overlay Memory Basic Screen Basic Screen gn original on ED V O amp STATUS FREE yop 01 OUTPUT COPY MODE COPYDENSITY LENS MODE H SPECIAL Sasa el k Touch the desired tray key APS will fade and AMS will be highlighted When selecting the Bypass key see p 6 24 p 6 26 To restore the APS mode touch APS AMS will fade and APS will be highlighted 2 Position original s FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the EDH as required 3 When all settings are acceptable press Start from the Basic Screen 6 23 Basic Operations Copy Size continued Selecting Paper Type Size for Multi sheet Bypass Tray 1 Open the Multi sheet bypass tray and load the copy paper on the tray See p 6 11 p 6 12 for further details Basic Screen gn original o D B O 0
201. aper has misfed 34 Reserve copy function Set the timing for the reserve job setting 35 Scan stop by a pull out tray Select to stop or continue the scanning job when a tray is pulled out 36 Change page no pos booklet Set the machine to position the page numbers automatically on the outside edges of the copy when using Booklet with Page Numbering in Stamp 37 Timer which prohibits Print Set the timer to allow the printing job after operating the copying job 13 46 Key Operator Mode Memory Switch Setting 13 continued 38 Bookmark function Select to set the Bookmark function only for the current job set for all the following jobs or deactivate the function 39 Delete of overlay image When selecting or storing overlaying image data in HDD using Overlay Memory select to permit or prohibit deleting the selected data or overwriting the data of the same name previously stored in HDD 40 Orig direction binding mode Select to reset or save the original direction and bind position settings made on the Special Original popup menu and Output Mode popup menu after completion of each copying job 41 Image stored cont SRV When storing the image data in HDD PC in scan server mode select to release or continue the scan server mode after completion of each image data storing job 42 Image recalled cont SRV When recalling the image data stored in HDD PC in scan server mode select to recall only one
202. are not suitable for use with the EDH e g when size is incompatible or when originals are folded stapled torn or in generally poor condition Specifications O Max original size 11 x17 280 mm x 432 mm sheet or book Max book weight thickness 15 Ib 6 8kg 1 2 30 mm O Original placement Face down on right depth side of glass 1 Raise the EDH as shown in the illustration below 2 Place original FACE DOWN in the left rear corner aligning the edge with the left and rear measuring guides 3 Gently close the EDH to prevent the original from shifting on the glass A CAUTION When the selected print quantity exceeds the Finishers maximum capacity remove the printed sheets while paper is exiting to avoid paper mishandling TIP To eliminate black copy marks on edges when copying from a book without selecting Book Copy mode select Frame Fold Erasure or Non lmage Area Erase in Application mode 4 2 Paper Information Using the Electronic Document Handler EDH Specifications in 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 Copying g g 0 g g g g g Original size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R A4 297 mm x 432 mm 140 mm x 216 mm Original weight 13 Ib 34 Ib Max feeder capacity 100 original sheets 20 Ib bond paper Max original exit tray capacity 100 original sheets 20 Ib bond paper Original
203. ass Tray 6 11 Utility key 3 19 5 7 Vv Vertical Horizontal Zoom 6 22 Index 5 Index WwW Warm up Screen 6 4 WARNING 2 2 WATERMARK 9 39 WATERMARK NUMBERING 9 39 Web Utilities 11 12 Weekly Timer 13 29 Weekly Timer Function 5 5 Weekly Timer Master Key Code 3 22 13 29 Weekly Timer On Off Setting 13 31 Wide paper Key Operator mode 13 26 Wide paper Multi sheet bypass tray 6 26 Work table 3 3 Z Z Folded Original 8 8 Z Folding Mode 7 20 ZOOM key 6 18 6 21 6 22 Zoom Mode 6 21 Index 6 56RE97350 00 2004 1 KONICA MINOLTA Copyright 2004 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Printed in China The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice to incorporate improvements made on the product or products the manual covers KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Marunouchi Center Building 1 6 1 Marunouchi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0005 JAPAN
204. ate paper tray for copy size selected Close document cover firmly Close Front doors and Toner access door of main body completely Close Finisher door completely COPYING DOES NOT RESUME AFTER MISHANDLED PAPER IS REMOVED Check copier diagram on touch screen for additional indications of mishandled paper THE ORIGINAL PAPER IS MISHANDLED OR SKEWED IN THE EDH Originals should conform to the recommended size and weight Be sure originals are not stapled Align originals evenly in the EDH Check to make sure paper guides meet the width of mixed size originals COPY IMAGE IS SKEWED WHEN BYPASS IS USED Be sure copy paper is inserted straight USING ECM COPIES CANNOT BE MADE AFTER PASSWORD IS ENTERED Check to see if the message EXCEEDS LIMIT is displayed Contact Key Operator to reset limit FINISHER DOES NOT OPERATE Press OUTPUT APPLI key Check for a paper misfeed and remove it as required Properly close finisher door EDH INDICATOR WILL NOT LIGHT AFTER AUTO RESET IS PRESSED Fully close EDH EDH LIGHT IS FLASHING The EDH is ready to accept originals Insert originals on EDH tray press Panel Reset then Start ADD TONER MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED New toner supply is needed Follow instructions for adding toner CALL FOR PM IS DISPLAYED IN MESSAGE AREA Contact your service representative for Preventive Maintenance APS SELECTS THE WRONG PAPER SIZE Paper guides must be adjusted exactly to the size of originals Troublesh
205. atic Shut Off function can be set for 30 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes 120 minutes or 240 minutes See p 5 3 for details Automatic Duplex Copying To reduce paper consumption use this function to make double sided duplex copies automatically We recommend that you utilize the Auto Low Power function the Automatic Shut Off function and the Automatic Duplex Copying function Copyright 2000 Go Ahead Software Inc All rights reserved 2003 by Konica Minolta Business Technologies Inc MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT The Di5510 Di7210 will give you many years of trouble free service To ensure high quality copying performance and to prevent premature wear or failure of precision parts and components schedule periodic cleaning and routine adjustments We recommend that you contact your service center to discuss the benefits and advantages of Customer Service Maintenance Agreement and to be shown how a maintenance plan can be tailored to your individual copying needs NOTICE Konica Minolta Business Tecnologies Inc has made every effort to ensure that the information in this manual is complete and accurate However constant efforts are also being made to improve and update the product Therefore Konica Minolta Business Tecnologies Inc shall not be liable for errors in this manual or for any consequential damage resulting from the use of this manual The information contained herein is subject to change without notice FEDERAL O
206. ation LS C Insertion COYERS INSERT S PAGE SETTING Enter by keypad lt 15 gt Tray 1 THICK1 Tray 2 THIN E mog P4 P5 P8 P12 FRONT BACK corr p COPY S EE Reen P14 GES eack FRONT BACK SLAK BLANK BLANK 4 aj I INSERT DELETE SET gt CHANGE OF THE CHANGE OF THE COVERS TRAY INSERTION TRAY CANCEL Max insertion locations 30 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Sheet Cover Insertion to display the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen 3 Select Front Cover Insertion if desired Touch FRONT COPY to insert a copied front cover or FRONT BLANK to insert a blank front cover Proceed to step 4 to select Back Cover Insertion if desired Proceed to step 5 to select Sheet Insertion if desired 4 Select Back Cover Insertion Touch BACK COPY to insert a copied back cover or BACK BLANK to insert a blank back cover Return to step 3 to select Front Cover Insertion if desired Proceed to step 5 to select Sheet Insertion if desired 5 Select Sheet Insertion Touch COPY INSERTION to insert copied sheets or BLANK INSERTION to insert blank sheets Return to step 3 to select Front Cover Insertion if desired Return to step 4 to select Back Cover Insertion if desired
207. ations Copy Mode continued 1 2 Copy Mode Using Platen Glass continued 5 Make the desired copying selections 6 Press Start to scan the original Repeat steps 3 and 6 until all originals are scanned Basic Screen exit Store mode 7 Touch STORE to exit the store P ART to p ae mode The STORE key will return to STATUS the normal display OUTPUT COPY MODE aaa LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION 8 Enter the print quantity using the use keypad The quantity entered willbe H7 g displayed on the upper right ar message area of the Basic Screen 2 To change the print quantity press C clear and re enter the correct quantity To delete the scanned data without printing press Stop then touch EXIT on the popup menu to be sure the data is deleted Press Start to print NOTE When the selected print quantity exceeds the maximum capacity of Finisher Shift tray or Exit tray remove the printed sheets while paper is exiting to avoid paper mishandling 6 10 Basic Operations Using the Multi Sheet Bypass Tray The Multi sheet bypass tray can be used to stack regular 13 Ib 110 Ib Bond paper O Bypass tray paper size 11 x17 5 5 x8 5 O Bypass tray paper weight range 13
208. ay cause co damage to the machine or to original documents O ABNORMAL CONDITIONS S S If any abnormal sound odor or smoke generates from the machine immediately stop using the copier turn off the main power switch disconnect the plug and contact your service representative If a circuit breaker is tripped or if a fuse blows stop using the machine and contact an electrician If more detailed information is needed regarding the power source or power consumption of this machine contact your service representative O MACHINE MODIFICATION Do not modify the machine in any way or remove any part or screw Never attempt to perform any maintenance function that is not specifically described in this manual Do not connect the machine with any options other than those specified 2 10 Safety Information Routine Safety A CAUTION FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN MACHINE DAMAGE OVERHEATING AND OR PERSONAL INJURY O PERIODIC CHECK Check for loose connections or excessive heat on power plug damage to power cord and or plug creased frayed scratched or cut etc Be sure the plug is inserted fully and ground wire is connected correctly If any abnormality occurs do not continue to operate the machine O SERVICE MESSAGES If a service message displays turn the machine off disconnect the power cord from the outlet and report the condition to your service representative O TONER Check to be
209. bering Type Selection Screen if desired to change the character size The following options are provided STAMP LARGER SMALLER SET WATERMARK NUMBERING 20 pt 36 pt Touch CHARACTER SIZE TYPE on the Page Numbering Type Selection or Date Time Type Selection Screen if desired to change the character size type The following options are provided on the subsequent screen shown below CHARACTER SIZE 8pt 10pt 12 pt 14 pt CHARACTER TYPE Gothic type Ming type Character Type Size Selection Screen BES pa MARK JJ Application LStamp Overlay CHARACTER TYPE Ming type 6 Touch PRINTED PAGE on the Stamp Selection Set Numbering Type Selection or Date Time Type Selection Screen to designate whether to print the selected stamp on the cover only or on all pages CHARACTER SIZE apt 12pt 14pt Touch PRINTED PAGE on the Page Numbering Type Selection Screen to display the Cover Insert Print Setting Selection Screen e When selecting the COVER PRINT SETTING touch Front amp Back Print ON Front Print OFF and Back Print ON or Front amp Back Print OFF e When selecting the INSERT PRINT SETTING touch Print ON Print OFF or Skip page as provided for each of copied insert and blank insert Touch OK to return to the Page Numbering Type Selection Screen Cover Insert Print Setting Selection Screen Page Numbering Type Selection Screen COVER PRINT SETTING Front amp Back Print ON Front Print OFF and Back Pri
210. cally To specify the erase mode manually touch Oblique erase or Rectangle erase as desired then select the density level required Five exposure levels are provided 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 5 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations NOTE 1 If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 Select AUTO mode if the specified Oblique or Rectangle Erase mode does not function properly due to the type of set original 13 58 Key Operator Mode Background Adjustment 21 Use this function to specify the density level against the background in each of four enhance modes AUTO Increase Contrast Photo Text STD standard is initially selected Key Operator Mode Screen 3 Background Adjustment Screen ENHANCE 21 Background adjustment AUTO 22 Timing adjustment LIGHTER DARKER Increase i Contrast 23 Centering adjustment 4 3 2 1 D 1 2 3 4 Photo Text t RETURN x _ Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password To display menus 11 to 20 and 21 to 23 touch the Lower arrow key Touch 21 Background adjustment to display the Background Adjustment Screen Select the
211. ceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaeee tease eeeaeeeeeaeeeeaaee seuss saeeeeeaeeteaeeeesneeeseeeen 3 15 Control Panel Layout cccccccececeeeeeeenneeeeceeseaeeeesaeeseaeeeeeeaeeeseaeessaeeescaeesseaeeeseaeeeseaees 3 18 TOUCH SCKOGM via ieee rk a ae Bea a a TOE Ta ise tate AEE TTET 3 20 Basic Scree M enne n teense aia ae E EE a a ea E aaea aT 3 20 Initial Settings riain eaa a aa a the ited a araa ate Bab aE REg aay 3 21 Panel Reset MOde cccccssccceecesecceeeeeeececeeeeeeaeeeeeeneaceeeeseeeaeeesensaaseeeesneeaeeeesneneseneeena 3 21 Automatic Paper Selection APS ccccccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeaeeeseeeeeseneesesaeeeseaeeetaas 3 21 Automatic Magnification Selection AMS cccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeteeeeseeeeeenneeteas 3 21 Automatic Exposure Selection AES cccscecceeeeeeneeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeseeeeessaeeeseeeenaas 3 21 Automatic Tray Switching ATS ccceececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaaeeseaaeeseaeeeeeeeetas 3 21 Section 3 Machine Information continued Lead Edge Deltei ana e a etnelen a a Sagal else eee 3 22 SETAS ALUAT E ETE ETE A 3 22 Finish r Paper Capacity iese naianei a neiaa gastea aaepe aa aea e iea iaa 3 22 Key Operator PASSWOM ccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneeesaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseneeeneaeeeseaees 3 22 ECM Master Key Code ccccceeesceeeeceeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeceaeeseeaeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeseeneeesenaees 3 22 Weekly Timer Master Key Code 0
212. ch OK on the Output Mode popup menu The Basic Screen will be restored 8 Select additional copying features as required 9 Load the cover sheet paper into the optional Cover Inserter E of the FN 121 FN 10 finisher Upper tray If the paper size loaded in the Cover Inserter E is not suitable the following messages will be displayed and copying will be unavailable Please load cover sheet in cover inserter Adapt paper size between cover sheet and selected paper 10Enter the desired print quantity 11Position originals in the EDH or on the platen glass When using Store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 37 12Press Start A CAUTION When the selected print quantity exceeds the Finisher s maximum capacity remove the printed sheets while paper is exiting to avoid paper mishandling 7 26 Output Modes Manual Finishing The Manual Finishing function is available only with the Cover Inserter E option installed in the FN 121 FN 10 Finisher To use this convenient function simply place a set of paper into the lower tray of the Cover Inserter E select the desired mode from the Manual Finishing operation panel located on the top of the finisher then press the Start Stop button Available finishing modes according to the optional configuration are described below FN 121 Finisher Cover Inserter E e 1 oblique staple Primary main tray e 2 parallel staples Primary main tray FN 121 Finisher C
213. ck on Yes to delete the data Choosing Back will resume the Job list dialogue box NOTES The printer data stored in HDD will also be deleted e Once deleted the job cannot be recalled 8 Change the job name of the image data Click on Rename on the right side of the desired job name to change the job name of the image data The Change Job name dialogue box will be displayed Enter the new job name using alphabets and numbers then click on Apply Choosing Back will resume the Job list dialogue box NOTE Clicking on Apply will be ignored if the entered job name is already used The job name cannot also be changed if any symbols other than letters and numbers are entered 11 19 Network Function Environment Setup Mode Setting E Mail Transmission Function Perform the Key Operator setting concerning the network environment using the web browser For details of the E Mail Transmission Setting refer to p 13 9 Web Utilities Window Environment Setup Menu Window 1 Open the Web Utilities window NOTE See p 11 18 for detailed procedure to access the Web Utilities 2 Click on Environment Setup ie edt view Favortes Tools Heb e cd Hsk gt A A Qach Gravorres meda B E SO 2 Heak gt O A Al Rean Gyravertes Grea Bly SO a Adress J Fto10 11 92 201 aofeconer_e ml Ades Http 110 11 32 201 gotormjzopieren Fent Web Utilities gt Web Utilities Eaton Son PEE
214. creen when a tray is empty Add paper to the tray when the Paper empty indicator is flashing Do not exceed the following tray limits Tray 1 1 500 sheets 20Ib 1 290 sheets 24lb Tray 2 1 000 sheets 20Ib 860 sheets 24lb Tray 3 4 500 sheets 20Ib 430 sheets 24lb LCC 4 000 sheets 20Ib Multi sheet bypass tray 100 sheets 20lb Do not load above the limit indicated on the side guide plate Using the HELP Key To learn how to load paper at any time press Help then touch any tray to display instructions on the touch screen For details on tray position size vs paper size see Section 4 Paper Information When placing a stack of paper into the tray be sure to load it with the curl turning up i e with concave side up Before loading paper fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together See the following pages for instructions on loading paper in trays 1 4 and LCC 14 2 Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Paper continued Loading Paper in Tray 1 and 2 When Thick or Thin is displayed on the tray key of the Basic Screen be sure to load the specified paper otherwise mishandled paper may occur 1 Withdraw tray 1 or 2 and open the paper feed roller NOTE Do not withdraw the tray forcibly otherwise you may be injured 2 Place paper on the tray with the curl side turning up aligning it to the right side of the tray Load size 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R or 5 5
215. d touch Image Insert on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 18 Applications Book Copy Use this function to copy an open book or a ledger sheet onto two 8 5 x11 sheets in 1 1 mode or onto the front and back sides of one 8 5 x11 sheet in 1 2 mode If you select another paper size image division will perform incorrectly The following three modes can be selected from the Book Copy Screen 1 Full Scan mode Image division starts from the first scan 2 Front Cover Full Scan mode Image division starts from the second scan after the first scan copies normally 3 Front Back Cover Full Scan mode Image division starts from the third scan after the first and second scan copy normally Scan and store originals into memory then print all pages collectively Original size Max 11 x17 ledger sheet or open book Copy paper size 8 5 x11 letter Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions APS AMS Rotation Sort Rotation Group Folding Stapling amp Folding without Booklet selected Three Folding Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Tab Paper Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Combination Image Insert Program Job Repeat Reduce amp Shift in Image Shift Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory anana OQ 1 1 mode 1 2 mode Ped o Application Selection
216. de 500 sheets _5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 W 5 5 x8 5 R 5 5 x8 5 WR A5 A5W A5R A5WR 3 000 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 W 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 WR A4 A4W A4R A4WR B5 B5W B5R B5WR using FN 121 FN 115 Finisher 2 500 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 W 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 WR A4 A4W A4R A4WR B5 B5W B5R B5WR using FN 10 Finisher 1 500 sheets 11 x17 11 x17 W 8 5 x14 A3 A3W B4 B4W Staple sort mode 1 000 sheets 11 x17 11 x17 W 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 W 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 WR Variable according to the number of pages to be stapled See the table below Paper Capacity for Staple sort mode of FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher for the same size only 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11W 11 x17 11 x17 W A3 A3W 8 5 x11R 8 5 x11 WR B4 B4R A4 A4W A4R A4WR B5 B5W A5 A5W No of copies 2 staples 1 staples 2 staples 1 staples 2 9 50 sets 50 sets 100 sets 100 sets 10 20 50 50 50 50 21 30 30 30 30 30 31 40 25 25 25 25 41 50 20 20 20 20 51 60 15 15 61 100 10 10 FN 115 Finisher only Your service representative can set the copier to stop copying when the number of copies exceeds above capacity Contact your service representative Z Folding mode See p 4 13 to p 4 14 4 9 Paper Information Paper in FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher Option continued FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher Secondary Sub Tray FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher capacities at 20Ib unless otherwise indicated
217. de enables you to complete your copying job even when trouble occurs in either the primary or secondary copier such as a paper jam In that case the copier that is trouble free completes the job NOTE The copier is initially set to activate this function Contact your service representative if you do not require this function When a paper jam SC code E code F code trouble or unloaded paper occurs on either the primary or secondary copier The copier that is trouble free handles the remaining print quantity and completes the job When the job is completed take the appropriate troubleshooting measures to correct the problem When memory overflow occurs on either the primary or secondary copier On the primary copier The scanning job will stop immediately and the tandem copying job will be suspended on both copiers At this time the tandem mode is not released Take the same measure to be applied for single copier referring to p 15 4 On the secondary copier The secondary copier will start the tandem copying job when the memory becomes available after completing some reserve jobs In this case the Allocation recovery mode functions to continue the tandem printing job on the primary copier until the secondary copier becomes available for the job If the memory of the secondary copier cannot be available despite the elapse of time the tandem mode will be released on the secondary copier and the Allocation recovery mode functi
218. der Vertical order Original 2in1 4in1 8in1 4in1 8in1 Portrait type 1 2 1 3 7 i 5 2 6 3 4 2 4 1 2 1 5 1 2 3 4 3 2 6 3 4 5 6 2 4 3 7 7 8 4 8 Combination Mode Selection Screen TT BOOK 130810 MARK f Application JOB 01 FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT M Combination HORIZONTAL ORDER T YERTICAL ORDER AUTO HE Hs fe Layout E Reverse All image BBA Image gt Area E Combination Image Shit f Ba EnH FramelFold i e A Erasure fed GH 4ini 4ini Bini ALL ofthe caNceL CANCEL oK Applications Combination continued 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Combination to display the Combination Mode Selection Screen 3 Touch 2 in 1 4in 1 or 8 in 1 in the desired order area referring to the illustration on the previous page 4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Sc
219. desired density level for each enhance mode Touch an enhance mode key to display the popup menu then touch the desired level key to highlight it 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 5 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations woh 13 59 Key Operator Mode Timing Adjustment 22 Use this mode to make fine adjustments of the timing for printing or scanning function e Printer restart timing adj adjusts the lead edge timing e Printer regist loop adj adjusts the paper loop amount in the registration roller section e Printer pre regist adj adjusts the paper loop amount in each tray and ADU pre registration roller section e Printer erasure amount adj conducts a leading edge erasure amount adjustment e Scanner Platen restart timing adj adjusts lead edge timing for original scanning EDH restart timing adj adjusts lead edge timing of EDH e EDH regist loop adj adjusts the original loop amount in the EDH registration roller section Key Operator Mode Screen 3 Timing Adjustment Menu Screen Printer restart timing adj 5 EDH restart timing adj Printer resist loop adj EDH resist loop 21 Background adjustment 22 Timing adjustment 23 Centering adjustment Printer pre resist adj Printer erasure amount adj Scanner Platen restart timing adj t RETURN RETURN Printer Restart Timing Adjustment Screen Printer Regist Loop
220. digit password 2 If an invalid ECM master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 8 digit code 13 22 Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 continued E C M Function Setting 3 Use this function to turn ECM On or Off and to select whether the copier printer and scanner will stop at the time the count limit is reached or after the current copy job is completed ECM Setting Menu Screen ECM Function Setting Screen elect one of following IJ E C M data edit E C M all count reset E C M function setting Switching the ECM ON OFF Select effect of reaching the copy limit COPY PRINTER ECM On Immediate SCANNER ECM On After job Warning RETURN CANCEL 4 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 Touch 4 E C M function setting The ECM Master Key Code Screen displays if a code is required Enter your 8 digit ECM master key code then touch OK to display the ECM Setting Menu Screen See note 2 4 Touch 3 E C M function setting The ECM Function Setting Screen will be displayed 5 Touch ECM On to activate ECM or touch ECM Off to de activate ECM individually for copier printer and scanner The selected key will be highlighted 6 Touch Immediately to stop the machine at once when the copy limit is reached In
221. disappear To continue scanning the last reserve job touch CONTINUE as the current printing job gradually enables memory for new data 15 4 Troubleshooting Power OFF ON Screen When any trouble affects the electric signal of the copier the Power OFF ON Screen will be displayed Power OFF ON Screen Please turn the copier OFF then after 10 seconds turn ON again If Code still occurs call your Service Center Troubleshooting Clearing Mishandled Paper A CAUTION When removing mishandled paper be sure to leave no torn paper inside the machine avoid touching the drum or scratching it in any way and keep all metal and magnetic objects e g watches jewelry etc away from the drum area When a paper misfeed occurs the copier stops making copies and mishandled paper codes display on the screen to indicate misfeed area s A flashing code indicates the area that should be cleared first To view Help screen instructions touch Illustration explanation when the flashing mishandled paper code displays Be sure to remove paper from each flashing location until all locations are cleared Illustration explanation STATUS _ Open EDH cover and remove paper The following 18 mishandled paper codes display for specific areas of the machine Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Location Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCC Multi sheet bypass tray Right side
222. dition inform E Mail transmission item System Initial Setting Menu Screen E Mail Transmission Setting Screen Date amp Time setting IP address setting 1 1 2 Language select setting 2 E Mail set lt machine manager gt 3 IP address setting 3 E Mail set lt condition inform gt 4 4 E Mail transmission setting E Mail transmission item set RETURN RETURN 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 1 System initial setting to display the System Initial Setting Menu Screen then touch 4 E Mail Transmission Setting to display the E Mail Transmission Setting Screen IP Address Setting Screen 3 Touch 1 IP address setting to display the P addre IP Address Setting Screen Enter the IP 1 address of the mail address in your 4 network using screen keypad then touch T 7 OK to restore the E Mail Transmission RESET Setting Screen CAEL Key Operator Mode System Initial Setting 1 continued E Mail Transmission Setting 4 continued E Mail Set Machine Manager Screen 4 Touch 2 E Mail set machine manager er E Hail addre to display the E Mail Set Machine Manager Screen Enter the E mail address of the network manager using screen keypad then touch OK to restore the E Mail Transmission S
223. e aps Proof Copy Paper Type Gutput moe Non Sort S Es N er 1 Press Mode Check on the control panel to display the Mode Check Screen 2 Verify the settings made for the current job 3 If necessary press Proof Copy on the control panel or touch PROOF COPY on the Mode Check Screen to output a set of sample copy 4 Touch EXIT or press Mode Check to exit from the Mode Check mode and return to the Basic Screen 5 Press Start when the Basic Screen is displayed 6 43 Basic Operations Check Mode and Proof Copy continued Change Release Settings If you want to change or release any settings follow the procedure below To change the settings Check Screen CHECK MODE BASIC amp SPECIAL ORIG Copy Quantity 10 Juplex Mode 1 1 EDH Lens Mode 1 00 Copy Size 85x11 8 5x14 Paper Type Recycle Gutput Mode Non Sort Exit Tray Main tray Enhance Mode Photo Mode Original STD size 8 5x11 OHP Special Orig Z Folded Original CHANGE RELEASE PROOF SETTING SETTING COPY EXIT Basic Screen gn original o D Ae 0 10 IF coc _ _ ne OUTPUT COPY MODE coPYDENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION gt
224. e see p 6 37 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 10 Press Start After copying is completed touch Transparency Interleave on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 16 Applications Image Insert Use the Image insert mode to combine images scanned from the platen glass such as photos paste ups newspaper articles graphs etc with images scanned from the EDH Then output the combined images as a finished set The selected copy paper size is determined by the size of originals loaded in the EDH All images are stored in memory Max image insert 30 locations Original Copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Tab Paper Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Transparency Interleave Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat AUTO Layout Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory aaau Place originals n y onto EDH 8 8 gt ef 7 5 56 4 34
225. e AAA A aaa e aa EEE A ERA 9 33 Section 9 Applications continued Image Shiftesecnteel fecal eke aesdl wee Capel ee a aah ele cae else eS 9 34 To Adjust Position of Copy IMage ccccceccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeaeeeseeeeseaeeeseeeeeeaees 9 34 To Reduce and Shift Copy Image ccecccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeseaeeeseeeeesaees 9 37 SDUGIMP ses stabs ess cc eete Sete a a seleees vac A hlactpanats Mi E N 9 39 OVE NAY sade ete creieates haciendo ae tin ees is srt et ob epee E TT 9 44 Overlay MEMO Y esa r rereana ara aaa aa aa oie vasetb ted diersavinisiteanineeke ees 9 46 To Store Overlaying Image Data in HDD 0 cccccceseeceeeeneeeeeneeeteneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 9 46 To Overlay Image Stored in HDD 0 eeececeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeteaeeeeeaeeeeeaees 9 49 Section 10 Program Memory JOD Store wis seed he A ee Porte ee aes eee 10 2 JObiRecalliccs tAaavie dede neat eae T ay ee aa Ree Ae 10 4 Program Memory Form 1 cccccscece cheese deceit eede eed eevee sceeiieees Miers E AAT 10 6 Section 11 Network Function TO Use Server FUNGON i iii eee cere atte dh a Ea ete Aran a a 11 2 Image Store Delete Mode cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeeaaeeseaeeeseaaeeseaeeeseaeeeseneeetaas 11 4 To Store Image Data in HDD oi n cence naene aad anada iaaea 11 4 To Delete Image Data is enaere rrea segngectuegetebceiguste EATA 11 7 Image Store amp Output Mode 00 cc cece c cence eeeeeeeeeee
226. e Key Operator setting see p 13 40 The LCD screen will go off Release Auto Low Power Press any key on the control panel The Auto Low Power will be released and the LCD screen will be displayed NOTES e If the Auto Shut Off function activates at the same time the power will be turned off e The LCD screen will not go off during a duplex copying job or when the Jam Position Screen is dis played Manual Low Power Press Energy Saver for one second The Low Power mode will be activated NOTE The Manual Low Power can be selected by Key Operator For the Key Operator setting see p 13 41 to p 13 48 When the Manual Low Power is selected the Manual Shut Off will be released NOTE Be sure to press Energy Saver for one second or longer otherwise the following message will be displayed and the Low Power mode will not be activated Press Energy Saver more than one second for low power mode Release Manual Low Power Press any key on the control panel The Manual Low Power will be released and the LCD screen will be displayed 5 2 Copier Management Energy Saver Mode continued Auto Shut Off This function automatically shuts off the main power after a specified period of copier inactivity The Auto Shut Off can be set for 30 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes 120 minutes 240 minutes Initially Auto Shut Off is set to function after 90 minutes of copier inactivity For the Key Operator setting see p 13 4
227. e Service call e JAM e Paper supply e Toner supply e Staple cartridge supply e Dispose of Punch trash basket e PM call NOTES Click on REFRESH in the Web Utilities window to update the information e The Web Utilities window is subject to change without notice e This section uses the Di7210 as an example 11 13 Network Function Machine Information Mode Follow the procedure below to display the machine information using the web browser Web Utilities Window Fie Edt View Tools Help HBk gt OA A Qsearch Giravortes Pueis JA SO S Address http 10 11 32 201 eoform index enhtml Main Page Web Utilities Status Print read Japanese EASES English EES 1 Open the Web Utilities window amp goahead WEBSERVER Paper Tray Size Type Status Manual Tray A3 Normal No Paper in Tray Tray1 A4 Normal Paper in Tray Tray2 A4 Normal No Paper in Tray Tray3 A4R Normal Paper in Tray Traya A5 Normal No Paper in Tray Machine Type D7210 Finisher Not Mount Country Code Europe ADU Mount Display Language English DF Type EDH 7 ERDH Capacity MB 64 HDD Not Mount ERDH Available 100 LCC Not Mount Total Count 371 Printer Count 13 Total PM Count 371 Developer Count 371 Drum Count 371 NOTE See p 11 18 for detailed procedure to access the Web Utilities 2 Click Machine Status
228. e appropriate positions A CAUTION When the selected print quantity exceeds the Finisher s maximum capacity remove the printed sheets while paper is exiting to avoid paper mishandling 7 19 Output Modes Z Folding Mode The Z Folding mode is available only when the ZK 3 Z Fold Kit option is installed in the FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher When the Z Folding mode is selected in combination with any of the Primary main tray output modes the original image is copied on 11 x17 8 5 x14 copy paper and output to the Primary main tray of the finisher according to the selected output mode O Folding type Z folding 11 x17 double folding 8 5 x14 O Copy paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 All other paper sizes will be output without Z fold or double fold O Folded width 8 465 215 mm or less for 11 x17 10 299 261 6 mm or less for 8 5 x14 The width from the paper edge to the first folded line O Paper weight 16 24 Ib O When using Mixed Original mode with Z Folding mode 11 x17 and 8 5 x14 originals should not be mixed otherwise the Z Folding mode may not function properly O Special paper type Thick 2 transparent films labels tabbed sheets and non standard size STD size special Non STD size Wide paper cannot be Z folded Using special paper will cause the machine trouble Some plain paper types may cause folded line to shift in Z Folding mode O When using Z Folding Staple sort and APS for mixed size or
229. e fee renee Minister ap T a SE a aAA E ee SiT a Eii 6 13 Automatic Exposure Selection AES c cccccccceseneeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeseaeesseaeeeseeeeenaees 6 13 Manual Mode Lighter Normal Darker 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeees 6 13 Density Shifts vas act veiled rh ii dane diet easels 6 14 Liens ModE wis ee ee ie ed te ied vn ee 6 16 Automatic Paper Selection APS cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeseeeeseieeeenaees 6 16 Automatic Magnification Selection AMS ccccccceeeeeeteeeeeneeeteneeeseeeeseneeeseaees 6 17 Selecting a Special Ratio for Non Standard Papel ccccceceseeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeetees 6 18 Special Ratio Table ceccccccceecsceseeeeeeceeeeeeaeeceeeeeseeaeeseaaeeesaeeseaaeeeseaeeeseaeeessaeessaas 6 19 Preset and User Set Ratios 0 ccccccccececeseeeeeneeeceeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeseaeeessieeeseaees 6 20 ZOOM Modd unaenea ieiet v ered ok eel detente evel de de E AE EREE 6 21 Vertical Horizontal ZOOM cccccccceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceaeeseeeeesecaeeseeaeeseaeeseeaeeee 6 22 COPY SIZ sitet een esi ee et Das ete eaves ee edie ene Sele ee eee 6 23 Selecting Paper Type Size for Multi sheet Bypass Tray cccccssccccsssseseeeseesees 6 24 Binding Mode sci ccccccitenetive tne il ceili eet itc tenes eee it dee il ebb aie edited 6 27 RESONO sentinel eee AAN 6 28 Set Reserve JOD sees cee diia iei aeiia ee deve eaei aa Ean 6 28 Job Stat
230. e from the touch screen keypad Touch Verti Horiz key on the popup screen each time to shift it from one to another Touch OK to restore the Repeat Mode Selection Screen Repeat Mode Selection Screen with popup screen displayed Repeat mode se g range 10 150 BOOK 20801 Please f a d MARK Jf Application L Repeat YERT HORIZ WIDTH SETTING ENTER REPEAT WIDTH FA YERT WIDTH 1 2 3 80nm 4 6 5 HORIZ WAIDTH 7 8 9 0 OK Horizontal ENTER REPEAT WIDTH BY KEYPAD CANCEL To select the Auto detection mode touch AUTO Non image area erase will function automatically To select the Repeat mode touch 2 Repeat 4 Repeat or 8 Repeat as desired 4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen 5 Select additional copying features as desired When 2 Repeat mode is selected Page space function of Image shift can be used to make the desired amount of blank space between the two images on a page See p 9 34 to p 9 36 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen Enter the desired print quantity 8 Position original s FACE DOWN on the platen glass IMPORTANT DO NOT CLOSE THE EDH WHEN AUTO 2 REPEAT 4 REPEAT OR 8 REPEAT IS SELECTED IN STEP 3 When using Platen store mode 1 2 mode can be selected See p 6 35 to p 6 36 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 9 Press Start After copying is com
231. e keys to select Help Program Memory Mode Check Utility and Proof Copy modes To the left is the LCD screen Copying modes selections and setting changes can be made from the touch screen The upper portion of the touch panel automatically displays machine status information as required In addition the Help key will display information on each function that is displayed on the screen and will provide step by step instructions Introduction To the User continued Overview of the User s Manual For optimal performance read this manual before using the copier Be sure to handle the machine and perform all copying operations only as recommended in the manual Keep the manual located with the machine so that all users may refer to it as needed Manual Organization This manual includes sixteen topic sections as well as product specifications Highlights are as follows Section 1 General product information and features Section 2 Safety information to be read before operating this equipment Section 3 Machine information to be used as a reference when performing all copying jobs especially when capacities sizes and weights are factors Section 4 Paper information to be used as a reference when performing all copying jobs Section 5 Copier management information to be read before operating this equipment Section 6 Information on using the touch screen and selecting basic copying functions Section 7 Information on output
232. e p 13 25 p 13 26 Paper Weight General tray 16 24 Ib Tray specified in Thick 25 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Tray specified in Thin 13 15 Ib 1 1 or 2 1 copy mode only Tray specified in Tab paper 25 45 Ib 1 1 or 2 1 copy mode only NOTE Paper type setting for each tray can be made in the Key Operator mode See p 13 25 p 13 26 Paper Capacity Tray 1 1 500 sheets 20lb service adjustable to any standard wide size from 8 5 x11 W 5 5 x8 5 W Tray 2 1 000 sheets 20lb service adjustable to any standard wide size from 8 5 x11 W 5 5 x8 5 W Tray 3 4 500 sheets 20lb user adjustable to any standard wide size from 11 x17 W 5 5 x8 5 W 3 600 sheets including 100 sheet Multi Sheet Bypass Tray NOTE Reliability and copy quality are not guaranteed for all special papers Use only paper that is recommended by us 4 6 Paper Information Paper in C 403 Large Capacity Cassette Option Paper Size 8 5 x11 STD size 8 5 x11 A4 service adjustable STD size spec cannot be specified Non STD size input the measures of paper between max 314 mm x 223 mm and min 257 mm x 182 mm Wide paper 8 5 x11 W A4W service adjustable NOTE Non STD size setting for LCC can be made in the Key Operator mode See p 13 25 p 13 26 Paper Weight 16 24 Ib LCC specified in Thick 25 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper LCC specified in Thin 13 15 Ib 1 1 or 2 1 copying only LCC specified in Tab paper 2
233. earch the built in HDD for an image data then check output or delete the image data Changing the job name given to the image data is also available This function is available only when the optional HDD is installed in the machine Web Utilities Window Fie Et View E z es u eink 9 OD aatres Emona Job List Window 3 Bda ttp 10113220 enform thanb en ht Web Utilities HDD Job Information HDD Job Information Image Recall Passsword Input Password Apply Reset Hid 1 Open the Web Utilities window Job List Tob Search Search Gok Tame Seve Dae Page Cou image Data Joh Ouipui db Delei Joh Rename so fonari mags utp Cee _ Renan sack NOTE See p 11 18 for detailed procedure to access the Web Utilities 2 Click on HDD Job Information 3 Enter the Image Recall Password then click on Apply NOTE The Image Recall Password is the image data password entered in up to 8 characters when the image data was stored in HDD See p 11 5 11 7 11 10 or 11 11 for details The Job Search text box and the Job List will be displayed in the window The list is made of the jobs stored with the same image data password and arranged in alphabetical order NOTES The Job List indicates the job name saved date and the page count The P Job in the page count column indicates that the data was stored using Program Job function
234. ected when ATS APS functions If you select it to be detected you may also select the priority of the detection for each tray Key Operator Mode Screen 1 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 elect one of following ite Tray auto select setting Side 2 lens adjustment Energy saver setting Finisher adjustment Memory switch setting HDD management setting Machine management list print Scan transmission setting 1 System initial setting 5 Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting E C M function setting 3 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment Call remote center Non image area erase setting g m BA em Tray Auto Select Setting Screen ATS APS switch Tray priority Tray High Tray2 Tray3 P A iraya DON Y LCC Low Bypass ak Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password To display menus 11 to 20 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch the Lower arrow key 2 Touch 11 Tray auto select setting to display the Tray Auto Select Setting Screen 3 On the left half of the screen touch to highlight each tray key then select OFF or ON to specify whether the selected tray is to be automatic
235. ection AES 3 21 Automatic Tray Switching ATS 3 21 Lead Edge Delete 3 22 Service Settings 3 22 Machine Information Machine Configuration External Machine 15 Control panel 1 EDH 14 LCD Touch screen 2 Toner access door 13 Sub power 4 Key counter option 12 FN 121 ne Al 5 Multi sheet Finisher bypass tray option 11 ge lt Su ZA 10 Tray 1 Se b ini 9 Tray 2 gt i 19 FN 115 Finisher y LA option 8 Tray 3 5N 6 Right side 7 Tray4 door 17 Main power switch 18 C 403 Large capacity cassette option 16 OT 104 Shift tray option 3 2 Machine Information Machine Configuration continued External Machine Call outs 1 9 10 EDH Electronic Document Handler automatically feeds multiple originals one ata time to the platen glass for copying Toner access door opens to replenish the toner Work table provides a convenient workspace for documents both before and after copying Key counter option manages the number of copies made on the machine Multi sheet bypass tray used for small quantity copying onto plain paper or special paper Right side door opens to allow removal of mishandled paper Tray 4 universal tray is user adjustable and holds 500 sheets of either 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x1 1 8 5 x11 R or 5 5 x8 5 Tray 3 universal
236. ection Screen Image Shift Selection Screen Reduece amp Shift mode ge 0 250 eK a g range 0 250 MARK JfApplication Limage Shift JOB 01 FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT SheetiCover Transparency Insertion Interleave Chapter Image Insert SEK Reverse al Alkimage 2 5 1 3 4 6 BACK EXIT 7 8 9 0 A v UP FRONT Ge SHIFT gt Image Shift DOWN a BACK SHIFT 10 0mm i Combination pa Image smr J Pi FramelFold f Stamp Booklet Hm EAn Goes ALL 10 0mm 1 Select the copy mode and copy size from the Basic Screen as required 2 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to enter the Application Selection Screen 3 Touch Image Shift to display the Image Shift Selection Screen 4 Touch Reduce amp Shift To set shift amount in Reduce amp Shift 1 Touch FRONT In Reduce amp Shift mode the BOTH SIDES key appears grayed to show inactivity The message Select magnification ratio on FRONT side will be displayed when BACK is selected first 2 Touch UP SHIFT DOWN SHIFT or RIGHT SHIFT to specify the shift direction In Reduce amp Shift mode the LEFT SHIFT key with FRONT selected appears dimmed to show inactivity Use the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key to select the desired shift amount available range 0 250mm Keep touching the arrow key to increase or decrease the value continuously The AMS will automa
237. ections then press Start Basic Copy Settings Copy mode see p 6 7 p 6 10 Using the Multi sheet bypass tray see p 6 11 p 6 12 Copy density see p 6 13 p 6 15 Lens mode see p 6 16 p 6 22 Copy size see p 6 23 p 6 26 Binding mode see p 6 27 Reserve see p 6 28 p 6 34 Other Basic Copying Operations Store mode Platen store mode see p 6 35 p 6 36 EDH store mode see p 6 37 Interrupt mode see p 6 38 p 6 39 Rotation see p 6 40 p 6 42 Check mode and Proof copy see p 6 43 p 6 45 Help mode see p 6 46 p 6 47 Output Mode see Section 7 Special Original Mode see Section 8 Application Selections see Section 9 Network Function see Section 11 Tandem Mode see Section 12 NOTE If the Basic Screen displays ADJUSTMENT MODE in the message area this means that the machine was left in the service adjustment mode by your service representative If this occurs please contact the service representative and request that the mode be turned off otherwise copying may be adversely affected 6 3 Basic Operations How to Make a Basic Copy continued Setting Job During Warm up While the machine is warming up after power is turned on select copy conditions and start scanning so that the machine can start printing as soon as the machine becomes available Warm up Screen Basic Screen setting job available STATUS OUTPUT COPY MODE COPYDEN
238. ed Set the desired Copy mode Copy density Lens mode and Copy size on the Basic Screen 9 Enter the desired print quantity 10 Place originals in the EDH or on the platen glass then press Start to scan IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF PAGINATION Option Press Mode Check to view selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 11 Touch STORE to deselect the store mode then press Start to print After copying is completed touch Stamp Overlay on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 50 ABC CORPORATION TEST COPY MAIL ONel aia 10 Section 10 Program Memory Job Store Job Recall Program Memory Form 14 DEF COMPANY STORE PRES oP cancer ok 10 1 Program Memory Job Store Use Job Store to store up to 30 frequently used copying jobs which can be recalled at any time The stored jobs can be given alphabetical names O All copying functions can be selected Control panel Job No Selection Screen Program Memory 1 ABC CORPORATION Mode Check 2 Proof Copy 5 10 15 STORE PRES JOB CANCEL OK 3 4 TEST COPY 9 14 DEF COMPANY Job Store Check Screen CHECK MODE BASIC amp SPECIAL ORIG
239. ed on the screen e SET NUMBERING prints the numbers in the specified form over the scanned image at the location designated on the screen e PAGE NUMBERING prints the page numbers in the specified form over the scanned image at the location designated on the screen e DATE TIME prints the date and time in the specified form over the scanned image at the location designated on the screen WATERMARK prints the letters selected from 8 options over the scanned image positioning it in the center of the page e WATERMARK NUMBERING repeatedly prints the numbers in the specified form over the scanned image O All 6 types of stamps can be used in combination O A watermark is printed obliquely in the center of the page Watermark numbering prints a number repeatedly over the scanned image O Stamp Set numbering Page numbering and Date Time settings each allow you to select a printing position from 9 locations O Stamp Set numbering and Date Time settings each allow you to choose whether to print the stamp on all pages or on the cover only O Page numbering allows you to choose whether to print on all pages on all pages except the front cover or on all pages except the front and back covers Furthermore with Sheet Cover Insertion or Chapter selected Page numbering allows you to specify the following option COPIED INSERT Print ON Page number will be printed Print OFF Page number will not be printed but will be counted Skip page
240. ed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets istTAB 2nd TAB 1st TAB 2nd TAB Section 1 Introduction Section 1 Section 1 Introduction Jntroduction Printed aio set 3rd TAB 3rd TAB THREE FINISHED SETS 14 7 Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Paper continued Changing Paper Size of Tray 3 and 4 The main body trays 3 and 4 are user adjustable Change the paper size of the tray according to the procedure below 1 Withdraw the tray for which the paper size will be changed NOTE Do not withdraw the tray forcibly otherwise you may be injured 2 Open the paper feed roller 3 Remove the rear guide plate while pressing the knob then insert it into the position designated for your desired paper size NOTE Be sure to insert the rear guide plate into the position of the paper size to be set otherwise machine trouble may occur 4 Load paper on the tray then align the side guide plates to the edge of the paper while pressing the release knob located at the rear side guide plate NOTE Be sure that the side guide plates are securely aligned to the paper otherwise the machine cannot detect the correct paper size 5 Close the paper feed roller then push the tray back fully into the machine The tray key on the Basic Screen will indicate the paper size currently specified NOTE Do not bump the tray int
241. eeeceeeseaeeeseaaeeseaaeeseeeeseaeeess 13 24 Paper Type Special Size Set 6 ccccecesceeeeneeeceneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaeeeseeeessaeeessaaees 13 25 Panel Contrast Key Sound Adjustment 7 ccccccsceeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeseeeeeseneeessnaeeesnaees 13 27 Key Operator Data Setting 8 0 ccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeecaeeseaaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeeseeeees 13 28 Weekly Timer 9 kneet iaa ten ae cde tne Gg E ia iia aaa eaa aani EE ana aap Ea baa PRANE buea 13 29 How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode ccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneees 13 30 Weekly Timer On Off Setting 1 cccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeneeetaas 13 31 Timer Seting 2 h aerer ae R eee eee ee 13 32 Timer Action On Off Setting 3 cccccccesesceeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeesesseeeeeseesneeeesseeeaeeees 13 34 Lunch Hour Off Seting 4 siecsecacv select i e a a iari iE AEN 13 36 Timer Interrupt Password Setting 5 cccccsecesseeeeseneeeseneeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeesaas 13 37 Control Panel Adjustment 10 0 cccccccccccsssecceseeneeeeeseneeeeeessneeeeessseeeeeessneeeeesenaaes 13 38 Tray Auto Select Setting 11 c cccceceeceeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaaeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeeseeeeseaeeeseeeees 13 39 Energy Saver Setting 12 ecccceeseeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeseeaeecaaeeeeaaeeseaaeessaaeeeeeeeeeaeeees 13 40 Memory Switch Setting 13 cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseaeeseeneee
242. eeeeeeeeaeeeesaaeeseaaeeseaeeeseaeeseeaeeeseaeeetaas 11 8 Image Recall ModE menneen a a A AA steed A 11 10 To use Web UNME S raaa e naive a 11 12 Machine Information ModE scere onnne a e a a E a AE 11 14 JOD Status MOMS iii iradia etena aa aie a ene ae EEE aa ara t n RAe Dea Wine aaa a EE a dioii 11 15 HDD Job Information ModE oergie E ea e Eee E E AEEA REEN 11 16 Environment Setup Mode sccscs csseheeserdee ce eeeeceeestnedesheeateenctneatiielieneeeenaes 11 20 Setting E Mail Transmission Function c ccccccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseneeeeseeessaaees 11 20 Setting E C M Function Environment Setup cccccceeseeeeeseeeseneeeeeneeeteneeees 11 22 Setting Scan Transmission Function ccccccececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeess 11 30 Transmitting Editing Machine Setting File Environment Setup 11 35 Section 12 Tandem Mode Tandem Mode Operation cccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeseaaeeseaeeeseaeeeeseaeeensaeeeseaeeeseas 12 2 To Stop Scanning Printing cccceceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeseaaeeseaeeeseaeeeeseaeeseeeeseneeeeeaes 12 5 Troubleshooting ee eA a ee tenet inate Gna 12 6 Section 13 Key Operator Mode To the Key Operatorni airone iae ae a a ai 13 2 How to Access the Key Operator Mode sssseseesseiessisssiisrirtsrittsrntssinsintsrinserenes 13 3 System Initial Setting 1 cece eeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeeeseaeeescaeeeseeeeeeneeeesseees 13
243. een ed DA o Dek MARK J Application L Stamp Overlay PRINTING POSITION DATE TIME Jan 23 2002 NO DISPLAY calf eel 23 Jan 2002 1 23PM fig 323 rower LEFT CANCEL CHARACTER SIZE 14 pt TYPE GOTHIC PRINTED PAGE 1 23 02 ALL PAGES 23 1 02 PRINTED FINE ADJ OF Pi i CHARACTER IZE TYPI Watermark Numbering Type Selection Screen TH Eok pat MARK Application L Stamp Overlay SET NUMBERING DENSITY CHARACTER SIZE t 36 P 0001 0002 0003 LIGHT NORMAL STARTING No e DARK 1 000171000 0002 71000 1 1000 2 1000 Darke CHARACTER STARTING No CANCEL OK 4 When selecting STAMP SET NUMBERING PAGE NUMBERING or DATE TIME select the desired position from 9 location keys on each screen If fine adjustment is required touch FINE ADJ OF POSITION to display the Fine Adjustment Setting Screen Touch UP SIDE DOWN SIDE RIGHT SIDE or LEFT SIDE to specify the direction then use the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key to enter the desired amount The position is moved from base point DOWN SIDE EETA RIGHT SIDE 00mm Fine Adjustment Setting Screen BEN 20807 MARK JJ Application L Stamp Overlay 2 3 5 6 8 9 A v UP SIDE DOWN SIDE SIDE 1 4 Ran 7 0 LEFT SIDE 9 41 Applications Stamp continued 5 Touch CHARACTER SIZE on the Stamp Selection Set Numbering Type Selection or Watermark Num
244. ees 14 14 Cleaning the Left Partition GlaSS ececceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeteeeeeeeeeeee 14 15 Cleaning the Document Glass and Inner Surface of the EDH cceceeeseeeeeee 14 15 Section 15 Troubleshooting Callifor Service EE saciid ntia oktvadeneuira ines ahead he 15 2 Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble ccccceeceeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeseeeetsieeeeeaees 15 3 Memory OvefloW iire soinn a deed ping eane ede esac aaa ean Aaaa aiaa 15 4 Power OFF ON Scree mienon dese sistas ete iad ek Sats et ge teh edt ee 15 5 Clearing Mishandled Paper ccccccceeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeseaaeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeteneeeeeaes 15 6 Copying HINS sa mesi rosd ea a a e a ea aar AE aa E E e EEEE ANE EEEN e 15 8 Section 16 Machine Specifications Specioal Se a R E EE a A dabteatastenauebectee as 16 2 Section 1 Introduction TOANE USER scene 1 2 Product Overview 1 4 Features of the Di5510 Di7210 1 6 Copier Features 1 13 Introduction To the User Welcome to the Di5510 Di7210 The following topics relate to general product information and provide tips on using this manual Key Operator Functions Custom settings can be made by the Key Operator or anyone who is responsible for the machine Access to the Key Operator mode may require a key operator password if previously set by your authorized service representative Use the password system to lim
245. eight 5 9 in 150 mm Max open angle 70 5 Stapler Finisher FN 121 FN 10 Width 25 8 in 656 mm Depth 25 8 in 656 mm Height 39 0 in 990 mm Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice 16 4 Specifications Staple Finisher FN 115 Width 21 4 in 544 mm Depth 25 8 in 656 mm Height 43 1 in 1095 mm Cover Inserter E Width 20 1 in 511 mm Depth 24 4 in 620 mm Height 8 7 in 220 mm Punch Kit PK 2 Width 2 7 in 68 mm Depth 17 4 in 442 mm Height 4 7 in 120 mm Punch Kit PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Width 5 1 in 180 mm Depth 18 5 in 470 mm Height 4 5 in 115 mm Z Fold Kit ZK 3 Width 6 7 in 169 mm Depth 26 0 in 660 mm Height 36 6 in 930 mm Automatic Duplex Unit ADU Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Paper weight 16 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Non stack type Stapling Finisher FN 121 FN 10 Power source Main body Non sort Sort Group mode 500 sheets 5 5 x8 5 R 3000 sheets 8 5 x11 R FN 121 Finisher 2500 sheets 8 5 x11 R FN 10 Finisher 1500 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 Size 11 x17 5 5 x8 5 R Staple sort mode 1000 sheets Size 11 x17 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 Variable according to the number of pages to be stapled See p 4 7 or p 4 8 for detail Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice Specifications Staple Cartridge Stapling Finisher FN 115 Cover Inserter E Folding Stapling amp Fold
246. encies and output a blank or copied interleaf sheet with each copied transparency In the blank mode a blank interleaf sheet is output with each transparency to keep the film material from sticking together In the copy mode a copied interleaf sheet is output with each transparency to provide reference during a presentation a medium for photocopying and a set for filing or inserting into a binder g g g g g g g g QO Sim AMS is automatically selected Transparency source Multi sheet bypass tray Multi sheet bypass tray capacity 1 transparency sheet Transparency size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 Interleaving paper source Tray 1 2 3 4 or LCC Interleaving paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 Number of originals number of copies 1 Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions APS 1 2 2 2 Staple Sort Sort Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Folding Stapling amp Folding Three Folding Punch Using Cover Inserter E Tandem mode Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Tab Paper Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Image Insert Program Job Repeat Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory ABcD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD Original Blank sheet Interleaving Copy sheet Interleaving 9 15 Applications Transparency Int
247. er NOTE Do not bump the tray into the main body otherwise machine trouble may be caused 14 4 Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Paper continued Loading Paper in LCC C 403 C 404 When Thick or Thin is displayed on the tray key of the Basic Screen be sure to load the specified paper otherwise mishandled paper may occur When TAB is displayed on the tray key of the Basic Screen see p 14 7 1 Open the LCC top door 2 Press the paper loading button to lower the LCC bottom plate 3 Load the fixed size paper into the LCC with the paper curl turning downward 4 Repeat the steps 2 and 3 until the bottom plate cannot go down any more Load size 8 5 x11 or A4 service adjustable for C 403 or load size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R A3 B4 A4 A4R or F4 for C 404 Do not stack paper above the paper hook level 5 Close the LCC top door 14 5 Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Paper continued Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 3 or 4 Load offset tabbed sheets so that the tab extensions are on the left at the rear not front of the tray The tab extension width should be 0 5 12 5 mm or less When loading tabbed sheets in the tray be sure to specify the paper type as TAB in the Key operator mode otherwise mishandled paper may occur See p 13 25 to p 13 26 The top sheet is designated face down as the first tab of the finished set Subsequent offset tab sheets f
248. er Type Special Size Set 6 Use this function to indicate a specific paper type or to specify a special paper size for each tray key on the Basic Screen This is especially useful when special paper is used on a regular basis and is always placed in a specific paper tray NOTE This setting is provided for main body trays 3 and 4 only Tray 1 2 and LCC option are service adjustable Key Operator Mode Screen Paper Type Setting Screen one of follo System initial setting 5 Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting E C M function setting 3 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment Thick Poo Normal Recycle Thin Color Special z Fine Recycle a Seal y RETURN Special size setting CANCEL Special Size Setting Screen STD size Special Size Setting Screen STD size special e STD size STD size spec Non STD size Non STD size PSTD size PSTD size Wide paper Wide paper STD size STD size Special size setting CANCEL Special size setting CANCEL Special Size Setting Screen Non STD size Special Size Setting Screen Wide size paper STD size INPUT SIZE 11213 STD size SELECT SIZE IMAGE POS Adu ST
249. erations 13 21 Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 continued E C M All Count Reset 2 Reset the count for all ECM accounts ECM Setting Menu Screen ECM All Count Reset Screen IJECM data edit 2 E C M all count reset 3 E C M function setting COPY PRINTER SCANNER CANCEL RETURN RETURN Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 Touch 4 E C M function setting The ECM Master Key Code Screen displays if a code is required Enter your 8 digit ECM master key code then touch OK to display the ECM Setting Menu Screen See note 2 4 Touch 2 E C M all count reset The ECM All Count Reset Screen will be displayed Touch COPY PRINTER to clear the copy printer count SCANNER to clear the scan count or ALL to reset all counters to zero and to return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen Touch CANCEL to restore the ECM Setting Menu Screen without resetting counters Touching RETURN will also cancel this function and return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen 6 If other ECM setting changes are required touch the desired key from 1 3 7 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 8 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations N w ol NOTES 1 If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4
250. ered to ensure easy access by anyone regardless of the physical or positional status of the operator Your authorized service representative can make this setting for you 3 19 Machine Information Touch Screen The touch screen is an LCD that displays interactive screens with touch sensitive keys for making copy job selections Selections are highlighted at the touch The screens also work with the conventional control panel keys A CAUTION The touch screen of the control panel is covered with glass Do not drop heavy items on the glass or put excess weight or pressure on it otherwise the glass may break or become scratched After the sub power switch is turned on the Wake Up screen displays for approximately 10 seconds until initial machine settings are established Then the Warm Up Screen displays for approximately 5 minutes Di5510 6 minutes Di7210 until the fixing temperature is reached When the Basic Screen is displayed the touch screen becomes interactive The interactive condition enables you to communicate directly with the copier system simply by touching keys displayed on the screen or by pressing conventional keys as required In addition the screens automatically display information regarding machine and copying status Additional help is available any time with the Help key which can be pressed from any screen except from Program Memory or Key Operator Mode Screens Basic Screen
251. erleave continued Application Selection Screen Transparency Interleave Screen JOB 01 BOOK 08 10 MARK f Application L Transparency Interleave d press O FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Non image AUTO fe Area Erase E I layout E Reverse All image Image A Area TRANSPARENCY INTERLEAYE All Blank sheet Copy sheet Interleaving interleaving Com Book Copy E5 image snit fE FramelFold Stamp ure fe Sie Overlay raft 1 Load copy paper in tray 1 2 3 4 or LCC to match the size of transparencies 2 Open the Multi sheet bypass tray Insert one transparency at a time into the Multi sheet bypass tray and adjust the paper guides IMPORTANT do not load transparencies into any other tray 3 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 4 Touch Transparency Interleave to display the Transparency Interleave Screen 5 Touch Blank sheet Interleaving or Copy sheet Interleaving unless it is already highlighted 6 Touch OK 7 Make additional Application selections or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 8 Print quantity is already set to 1 You cannot enter any other quantity 9 Place original FACE UP in the EDH or FACE DOWN on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mod
252. es Output Mode for Machine with Shift Tray This section describes output modes for a machine with OT 104 Shift tray e Non sort mode outputs multiple copies of the original set Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by sorted sets e Sort mode outputs multiple copies of the original set having each sorted set offset by 30mm upon exit e Group mode groups together multiple copies of each original and offsets the sets by 30mm upon exit N Example Make 3 copied sets from 4 original sheets NWA NUA om 4 3 2 4 3 2 1 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 1 4 te Offset by 30mm Offset by 30mm Output Mode popup menu Group ode ER 0 yp EXIT TRAY OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt HDD STORE OUTPUT Ja TANDEM SORT RECALL STANDARD MAIN al CANCEL OK 7 12 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine with Shift Tray continued 1 Select the desired output mode To select Non sort mode Confirm that OUTPUT APPLI and SORT are not highlighted on the Basic Screen To select Sort mode Confirm that OUTPUT APPLI is not highlighted then touch SORT to highlight it To select Group mode 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen The Output Mode popup menu
253. etting 13 40 Entering an ECM Password 5 4 Environment Setup Mode 11 20 Erasure outside area of original 13 41 Exit direction 13 42 Exit direction of 1 sheet 13 42 External Machine 3 2 F Face Down Exit 7 31 Face Up Exit 7 34 FCC Regulations 2 12 Finisher Adjustment 13 52 Finisher Capacity Requirements 2 18 Finisher door 3 8 3 10 Finisher mode by Full auto 13 41 Finisher Paper Capacity 3 22 Fixing unit 3 5 FN 10 Finisher 3 4 3 8 FN 115 Finisher 3 3 FN 121 Finisher 3 3 Folder keys 6 4 Folding mode 7 14 Font pattern list 13 49 Frame Fold Erasure 9 29 FREE JOB key 6 28 Front Cover Mode 9 4 FTP server address 13 56 G Group Mode Using Primary Main Tray 7 9 H HDD 9 46 11 2 HDD Job Information Mode 11 16 HDD Management Password 3 23 13 55 HDD Management Setting 13 54 HDD STORE key 11 8 HELP key 3 18 6 46 Help Menu Screen 6 46 Help Mode 6 46 Help Screen 6 46 How to Make a Basic Copy 6 2 Image Insert 9 17 Image Recall Mode 11 10 Image recalled cont SRV 13 42 Image Shift 9 34 Image Store amp Output Mode 11 8 Image Store Delete Mode 11 4 Image stored cont SRV 13 42 Increase Contrast Mode 8 4 Initial by Key counter insert 13 41 Initial Settings 3 21 Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN 115 Finisher 14 11 Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN 121 FN 10 Finisher 14 10 Insertion Mode 9 4 Internal Machine 3 5 Interrupt key 3 18 6 38 Interrupt Mode 6 38 IP Address Settin
254. etting Screen afibiiciid f h ipjipkpl n p quirispt v x yEZE Ee Delete Capital J Sign Small DLJ Lemen C E Mail Set Condition Inform Screen 5 Touch 3 E Mail set condition inform to display the E Mail Set Condition Inform Screen Enter the E mail address of the network PC using screen keypad then touch OK to restore the E Mail Transmission Setting Screen af bfcd f h i jfk n p qirispt v x yfz fe Capital Delete 3E mall Sign 4 gt CANCEL OK Network PC E mail Address Setting Screen 6 Touch 4 E Mail transmission item set to ect itens for E Mail transmissio display the Information Setting Screen PEO ERT intear tray FULI Touch to highlight the desired item key N then touch OK to restore the E Mail Peper Supply Non Complete job Transmission Setting Screen Toner supply Staple cartridge supply Complete job Dispose of trash basket ALL CLEAR CANCEL OK 7 Touch RETURN to complete the setting and return to the System Initial Setting Menu Screen 8 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 9 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 10 Key Operator Mode Copier Initial Setting 2 Initial settings are the settings that display automatically when the copier is powered on when Panel Reset timer is operated or when Panel Reset key is pressed These settings can be changed by the Key Operator as
255. ey Operator Data Setting Screen 0 System initial setting 5 Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting Name A D F 6 K N Pia 7 x z For Assistance x 3 s e 4 E C M function setting 9 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment RETURN CANCEL OK Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 8 Key operator data setting to display the Key Operator Data Setting Screen 3 Touch Name to highlight it then enter the key operator name up to 8 characters from the touch screen keypad 4 Touch Key Operator Tel No to highlight it then enter a 5 digit extension number from the touch screen keypad If the extension number is less than 5 digits use a hyphen to make it five The hyphen added in the beginning will be indicated as a space on the Help Screen 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen 6 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 28 Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 This function can be accessed only by the Key Operator after a unique 4 digit Weekly Timer master key code is entered
256. ft2 lt Density shift 3 lt Density shift 4 lt Density shift 5 Special Original popup menu Select condition to scan originals ORIGINAL UPLEX 1 amea eam SPECIAL DIRECTION BRBN Le SRIGINAL Normal auto Node Increase fE Contrast LS COUNT 7 SET ORIGINAL Non STDP size RECALL STANDARD CANCEL 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL to display the Special Original popup menu 2 Select the desired enhance mode To select the Auto Text Photo mode touch AUTO to highlight it then press Utility The following message will be displayed Density Shift Text Photo 2 0 5 6 14 Basic Operations Copy Density continued Density Shift continued To select the Text mode touch Text to highlight it then press Utility The following message will be displayed
257. g 13 7 J JAM key 6 33 Job offset operating 13 41 Job Recall 10 4 Job Status Mode 11 15 Job Status Screen 6 30 Job Store 10 2 K Key click sound 13 41 Key click sound No paper JAM 13 42 Key counter 3 3 Key Operator Data Setting 13 28 Key Operator Mode 13 3 KEY OPERATOR MODE key 6 46 13 3 Key Operator Password 3 22 13 2 Keypad 3 18 L Label Locations 2 3 Language Select Setting 13 6 LCC bottom plate 3 7 LCC top door 3 7 LCC Large Capacity Cassette 3 3 LCD touch screen 3 3 3 18 Lead Edge Delete 3 22 Lens Mode 6 16 Lighter Copy Density 6 13 Limited Use of the Copier in Trouble 15 3 Line speed setting 13 7 Loading Paper 14 2 Index 3 Index Loading Paper in LCC 14 5 Loading Paper in Tray 1 and 2 14 3 Loading Paper in Tray 3 and 4 14 4 Loading Tabbed Sheets in LCC 14 7 Loading Tabbed Sheets in Tray 3 or 4 14 6 lock icon 10 3 13 24 Lock Delete Program Memory 13 24 Lunch Hour Off Setting 13 36 Machine Configuration 3 2 Machine Handling and Care 2 10 Machine Information Mode 11 14 Machine Installation and Power Requirements 2 8 Machine Management List Print 13 49 Main power switch 3 3 Manual Finishing 7 27 Manual Low Power 5 2 Manual Organization 1 3 Manual Shut Off 5 3 Memory Overflow 15 4 Memory Switch Setting 13 41 Mishandled Paper During the Reserve Setting 6 33 Mixed Original 8 6 Mode Check Screen 6 43 Mode key 3 18 6 43 11 5 Modek key 3 18 Multi sheet bypass tray 3 3 6 2
258. h Chapter starting number setting see below Touch CHAPTER NUMBER or PAGE NUMBER to highlight it then use the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key to enter the desired starting number for each Touch OK to return to the previous screen Starting No Setting Screen with Chapter selected Enter starting number POR Kak Jfapoticetion Stamp Over ley 2 3 5 6 8 9 Aaj v CANCEL OK 8 When selecting WATERMARK or WATERMARK NUMBERING touch LIGHT NORMAL DARK or DARK to select the desired density level on each screen 9 When all the desired selections are made touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen 10 Make additional application selections or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 11 Enter the desired print quantity 12 Position original s FACE UP in EDH or FACE DOWN on platen glass IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF PAGINATION Option Press Mode Check to view selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 13 Press Start After copying is completed touch Stamp Overlay on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine PAGE 9 43 Applications Overlay Use Overlay to scan an image and overlay the image onto each page copied in the job Scan and store originals into memory APS and AMS are automatically released Magnifica
259. he Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen See note 2 NOTES 1 If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid Weekly Timer master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit code 3 Touch 3 Timer action ON OFF setting to display the Timer Action On Off Setting Screen The days of the current month are displayed on the left half of the screen with timer active days highlighted 4 To activate or deactivate the Timer for any individual day touch the key for that day to change its indication To change the month use arrows to scroll to the desired month 5 To collectively set the on off data for the entire month by the day of the week touch the ON or OFF key for the desired day on the right half of the screen If you touch an already highlighted key no change will occur 13 34 Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued Timer Action On Off Setting 3 continued 6 If any change is made in the collective setting area the Timer Action Change Confirmation Screen will be displayed Touch YES to change the timer action or touch NO to cancel The Timer Action On Off Setting Screen will be restored 7 Touch OK on the Timer Action On Off Setting Screen to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen If other Weekly timer setting changes are required select the desired menu item from 1 5 8 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen
260. he following functions can be provided by the Memory Switch settings 1 Panel timer Set the reset interval starting from the completion of a copying job until the machine returns to the initial condition 2 Panel Reset key function Set the condition of the following modes when Panel Reset is pressed Copy mode Copy density Magnification Tray selection 3 EDH Original effect Set the machine condition when original is set on EDH in non EDH mode with EDH unit closed 13 43 Key Operator Mode Memory Switch Setting 13 continued 4 Program memory auto recall 30 Program memory number 30 is automatically recalled when power is turned on or when Panel Reset is restored This job recall function works only when Job number 30 is registered 5 Finisher mode by Full auto Set the Output Mode to be recalled when Panel Reset is pressed 6 Initial by Key counter insert Set the machine to return to the initial state when Key counter is inserted 7 Erasure outside area of original Set the machine to delete the outside area of originals 8 EDH frame erasure selection Set Frame erasure to function anytime in EDH mode 9 Automatic tray switching When paper is depleted during a copying job the copier continues copying by switching to another tray that contains the same size paper 10 Platen APS The copier automatically selects the same size copy paper as the original placed on the platen glass In reducti
261. heck mode to confirm copying selections before pressing the Start key The Mode Check Screen allows you not only to view the current settings but to change or release them directly from the Check mode In this mode use Proof copy to produce a sample of the copied set before copying multiple copies This is a convenient and cost effective way of viewing the results of the following copying selections e Copying conditions using Store mode e Booklet e Sheet Cover Insertion e Image Insert e Chapter e Book Copy e Combination e Program Job With Proof copy all originals are scanned into memory and only one set is output after you press the Proof Copy key on the control panel or touch PROOF COPY key on the Mode Check Screen After Proof copy some copying condition keys may appear dimmed in the Mode Check Screen You cannot change or release the copying conditions indicated on these grayed out lights When Start key is pressed the job resumes copying until the job is completed O All settings made can be viewed in the Mode Check Screen O Incompatible Copying Conditions with Proof Copy Group Rotation Group Control Panel Mode Check Screen Help CHECK MODE BASIC amp SPECIAL ORIG Copy Quantity 10 Exit Tray Main tray a Duplex Mode 1 1 EDH Enhance Mode Photo Mode Mode Check Copy Density Ea Special Orig Z Folded Original _ Lens Mode 1 000 Original SID size Copy Siz
262. hen press Start on the control panel of the machine to output the rest except the sample set The Result of job print dialogue box will appear when print job is completed Selecting Wait output Enter the desired print quantity then click on Apply The image data will be recalled but held to be output then the Basic Screen will be displayed on the touch screen of the machine Select the desired copy conditions and enter the desired print quantity then press Start on the machine control panel Choosing Back will resume the Job list dialogue box NOTE When selecting Auto output or Proof output only the web browser setting allows the print quantity to be specified When selecting Wait output the print quantity entered in the web browser can be changed on the machine control panel before pressing Start 11 18 Network Function HDD Job Information Mode continued Job Delete Dialogue Box Change Job Name Dialogue Box Fie Edt View Favortes Tools Help Fie Edt view Favortes Tools Help Boeck gt OA A Qseach Giravortes Guede G D 3A A Oa als ie eC EE Grete Grete AEE A AE enhtml Job Delete Change Job name JOB ABC This JOB wie deleted Old Job Name ABC Yes Wej New Job Name Apply Reset 7 Delete the image data Click on Delete on the right side of the desired job name to delete the image data The Job Delete dialogue box will be displayed Cli
263. hine is operated according to the instructions in this manual Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within protective housing the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase of user operation This machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product This means the machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation 2 12 Safety Information Regulations continued Internal Laser Radiation Maximum Average Radiant Power 340 uW at the laser aperture of the print head unit Wavelength 775 800 nm This product employs a Class IIIb Laser Diode that emits an invisible laser beam The Laser Diode and Scanning Polygon Mirror are incorporated in the print head unit The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM Therefore the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances mn T GLASS 3B INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING KLASS 35 NAR OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM DENNA DEL AR PPNAD STRALEN AR FARLIG TEENE A TRSIGTTEARELASERSTRALUNG KLASSES WW onangni ABDECKUNG GECFFNET NICHT DEM LASER AUSSETZEN H g pi Aa ane oo A DANGER RAYON LASER DE CLASSE 98 INVISIBLE LORS DE L OUYERTURE EVITER L EXPOSITION DIRECTE ADVARSEL PNES UNNG EXSPONERING FOR STR LEN AVARO T FRASER AT RRRA NATTAESSACLETALTINALUGKANGERUKWVATTOVALLE 8 SERRE LASERGATELYLLE ALAKATSOGATEESEEN ZL ADVARSEL USYNLIG KLASSE 38 L
264. his function 5 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen 6 Make additional application selections or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen The Store mode is automatically selected 7 Select the copy mode 1 1 or 1 2 8 Enter the desired print quantity 9 Position the open book or sheet on the platen glass in the left rear corner aligning the edge with the left measuring guide When opening the EDH Non Image Area Erase and AUTO Layout are automatically selected IMPORTANT KEEP THE EDH OPEN THROUGHOUT THE SCANNING PROCEDURE OF THE PLATEN STORE MODE If Full scan is selected and the originals can be loaded in the EDH EDH store mode is also available If desired position originals into the EDH Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 10 Press Start to start scanning 11 Remove the first original s Repeat the procedure for subsequent originals pressing Start for each original When Front cover Full scan or Front Back cover Full scan is selected only the front and back covers are required to be scanned from the platen glass If you want to use EDH store mode for scanning the rest of the originals close the EDH and position originals then press Start 12 Touch STORE to deselect the store mode then press Start to print After copying is completed touch Book copy on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel
265. hout offsetting the grouped sets upon exit 3 Face up non sort exit outputs simplex copies and odd numbered duplex copies face up without offsetting the sorted sets 4 Face up group exit outputs multiple copies of each original face up without offsetting the grouped sets upon exit x Se Le Face down non sort Example Make 3 copied sets OQ Face down group Face up non sort Face up group The copier is initially set to output to Primary main tray in Sort mode Refer the procedure on the following papers to select each output mode as desired 7 3 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine with Finisher continued Non Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray The Non sort mode simply means that the offset stacker finisher modes are not selected Copies will be stacked upon exit without being offset by sorted sets With the Primary main tray initially selected on the Output Mode popup menu FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 outputs the printed sheets FACE DOWN in the proper order O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 O Paper capacity for 20 Ib 500 sheets 5 5 x8 5 3 000 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R FN 121 FN 115 2 500 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R FN 10 1 500 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 Basic Screen OUTPUT 3 1 Touch SORT on the Basic Screen to deselec
266. ible with this feature e Combination Copies a fixed number 2 4 or 8 of pages onto one sheet of copy paper Introduction Features of the Di5510 Di7210 continued e Copy Density Manually selects up to 9 density levels e Copy Mode Selects the desired simplex mode 1 1 or 2 1 or duplex mode 1 2 or 2 2 e Counter List Displays on the screen and prints the following data total counter of the machine copier counter print counter and the date when the counter started e Density Shift Shifts each of nine density levels in four density modes Auto Text Photo Increase Contrast to three levels lighter or three levels darker e Energy Saver Automatically turns off all but nominal power supply after a specified period of copier inactivity for optimal efficiency Power is returned after a brief warm up period by pressing the Energy Saver key on the Control panel e Frame Fold Erasure Erases border and or fold image area using Frame 1 300 mm Fold 1 99 mm or Frame amp Fold e HDD Store While copying stores image data in HDD HDD 2 option for future printing e Image Insert Stores pages in memory from the platen glass and inserts the pages into a document copied from the EDH e Image Rotation Image Rotation rotates the image before copying when the portrait landscape orientation of the original is different from the orientation of the copy paper In 1 2 copy mode Rotation arranges the even pages
267. ic Document Handler EDH continued Positioning Mixed Originals Mixed size originals can be copied together from the EDH in either APS mode or AMS mode In APS mode copies will be output on mixed paper sizes to match the originals In AMS mode copies will be output on one common paper size that you select in which case an appropriate AMS magnification ratio will be selected automatically To use the mixed original mode see procedure on p 8 6 to p 8 7 O Mixed original size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 R and 5 5 x8 5 mixed 13 Ib 34 Ib 5 5 x8 5 original is available in portrait type feeding only EDH capacity Max 100 sheets 20 Ib bond paper Print quantity Max 9 999 sheets Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Rotation Exit Staple Sort with APS Folding Stapling amp Folding in APS Three Folding Punch with APS using PK 2 Punch kit O Incompatible Special Originals Non STD Size Z Folded Original Tab Paper O Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat AUTO Layout Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory OOO Before using the Mixed Original mode be sure the EDH is closed completely Arrange originals in order and place them as described below Place 11 x17 8 5 x14 originals face up or side 1 up in the EDH in landscape orientation i e with short edge feeding
268. ical socket COPY IMAGE IS TOO LIGHT Manually adjust copy density to darker density Check toner indicator and add toner if required Check paper for dampness Do not leave paper in copier when humidity is high Check to see if Photo Text or Increase Contrast mode is required Check the Density shift COPY IMAGE IS TOO DARK Manually adjust copy density to lighter density Check to see if Photo Text or Increase Contrast mode is required Check the Density shift COPY IMAGE IS NOT CLEAN OR SHOWS SPOTS Use clean originals since dirt marks may be copied Keep platen glass and inner surface of EDH clean Call for service if Call for service is displayed in the message area Check density indicator and lighten if required COPY PAPER MISHANDLES DURING COPYING Fan copy paper and load it with curl side in proper location Do not exceed the tray capacity COPY IMAGE CAN BE RUBBED OFF Check copy paper thickness Use Thick paper mode if paper weight requires it MAGNIFICATION CANNOT BE CHANGED Reduce amp Shift are incompatible with magnification Press Panel Reset and set desired copying conditions without using Reduce amp Shift DUPLEX MODES CANNOT BE SELECTED Fully close EDH then select Duplex mode again COPY QUALITY IS POOR Check paper for dampness and replace it if necessary 15 8 Troubleshooting Copying Hints continued COPYING DOES NOT BEGIN AFTER PRESSING START Insert or adjust the appropri
269. ier to offset the copies of different jobs 21 Continuation print Set the copier to output multiple reserve jobs in succession 22 Key click sound Activate or deactivate the sound each time a key is pressed on the touch panel 23 1 SHOT indication time Select the SHOT indication time function 24 Energy saver screen Select the screen to display when pressing the Energy Saver key 25 START key latch function Activate or deactivate the latch function 13 45 Key Operator Mode Memory Switch Setting 13 continued 26 STOP key function Select to display or not to display the confirmation message when Stop key is pressed 27 Auto select of Booklet copy Set the copier with FN 10 mounted to automatically select the Booklet mode when Stapling amp Folding or Folding output mode is selected 28 E C M password Select the acceptable number of digits for the ECM master key code 29 Arrow key change Image Shift Select the 1 step unit of the touch key to specify the shift amount in Image shift 30 Exit direction of 1 sheet Select to exit face up or face down when making only 1 sheet of copy 31 An interruption suspend way Select the timing to stop the job in progress when Interrupt is pressed 32 E C M password input timing Set the input timing for the ECM password 33 Key click sound No paper JAM Select the duration of the buzzer that alerts when the machine is out of paper or when p
270. if desired e ekc_tab txt E C M data e ip_email txt E mail data of Scan Transmission Setting data e ip_hdd txt HDD data of Scan Transmission Setting data e ip_ftp txt FTP data of Scan Transmission Setting data NOTE Error Message The file cannot be accessed when the machine is operating If an error message is displayed try again to save the file after the current machine operation is completed A dialog box will be displayed when the saving operation is completed Click on Close 5 Edit the machine setting file The machine setting file transmitted to a PC is a TAB separated text file which can be edited using an application software such as Text Editor or Table Editor A new setting file can also be created according to the specifications for each file type See p 11 45 for details File Edt view Favortes Tools Help 6 Import the machine setting file Se Click on Browse to designate the machine Serting data Inport Export setting file to be imported then click on foe Import Rieko a ae eae The result message will be displayed when Em the registration is completed Export Y ting data in fle data type to save and push an export button NOTES Error Message EKCdata TAB separated SO If the registration cannot be completed successfully an error messages will be displayed as follows Man Pae e Can t transfer data The machine is busy Try again to import the dat
271. iginals heed the limits on capacity described p 4 13 to p 4 14 O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Using platen glass available when Platen store mode is selected Staple sort using 8 5 x14 Output modes using secondary tray Folding Stapling amp Folding Three Folding Tandem mode O Incompatible Special Originals None O Incompatible Applications Transparency Interleave lt QGQ GY Z Folding Z Folding Staple sort APS with Mixed Original 7 20 Output Modes Z Folding Mode continued Output Mode popup menu ode 1S 0 mi EXIT TRAY BINDING STAPLE OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt HDD ee RIGHT cover SIOE aaae C E GROUP Z SHEET TANDEM BINDING E m Eaa eoc EJ recai oF STANDARD ad m STAPLING AZ FA 7 fe a aroun 2 Pag CANCEL ER rows SU Sine D OK
272. ill each copy and output 50 sheets NOTES Print quantity must be set for 2 or more copies to activate the tandem mode e When the print quantity entered is an odd number the primary copier will copy and output one sheet set more than the secondary copier to accommodate the job 7 Position original s FACE UP in the EDH or FACE DOWN on the platen glass of the primary copier 8 Press Start on the control panel of the primary copier The Sub icon will display on the Basic Screen of the secondary copier to indicate that the two copiers will start working in tandem The tandem mode will be released automatically when the tandem mode copying is completed and the Master and Sub icons on each Basic Screen will disappear Tip Entering reserve job during Tandem mode copying If scanning of the next reserved job is performed during the tandem mode copying that job will also be performed in the tandem mode Up to 10 jobs including the present job can be reserved Tip Interrupt mode during Tandem mode copying Interrupt copying is available only on the copier with Interrupt pressed The tandem mode copying on the copier in interrupt mode will be suspended until the interrupt copying is completed If the interrupt mode period is of long standing the Allocation recovery mode will activate to enable the other copier to handle the remaining print quantity 12 4 Tandem Mode To Stop Scanning Printing To cancel the tandem copying job 1
273. ill be output without Z fold double fold 13 45 Ib 16 24 lb for Z Folding mode Some 45 Ib paper types may not be punched easily 2o0r3 0 315 0 020 8 0 mm 0 5 mm 2 holes 2 756 0 020 70 mm 0 5 mm 3 holes 4 252 0 020 108 mm 0 5 mm 8 465 215 mm or less for 11 x17 10 299 261 6 mm or less for 8 5 x14 Capacity for Mixed Size Originals using Z Folding and Staple Sort Capacity for one stapled set Primary Tray Capacity Number of Z folded sheets Number of regular sheets 1 sheet 1 40 sheets 20 stapled sets 2 0 30 10 3 0 20 4 4 0 10 3 5 0 2 6 or more Staple Sort is unavailable with Z Folding NOTE Special paper OHP transparency labels tabbed sheets cannot be punched Using special paper will cause machine trouble Paper in OT 104 Shift Tray Option 500 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 1 250 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 100 sheets 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R 4 13 Paper Information Paper Weight Compatibility Chart EDH 13 34 Ib Main Body Trays All Trays 16 24 Ib Tray specified in Thick 25 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Tray specified in Thin 13 15 Ib Tray specified in Tab paper 25 45 Ib 1 1 or 2 1 copy mode only Large Capacity Cassette 16 24 Ib LCC specified in Thick 25 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper LCC specified in Thin 13 15 Ib LCC specified in Tab paper 25 45 Ib 1 1 or 2 1 copy mode
274. image in Overlay Memory Basic Screen Pre a O a origina Please pre O ORE b a g complete E O STATUS FUNCTION FREE Jog01 OUTPUT COPY SIZE Al ESA moo 1 Open the EDH 2 Place original FACE DOWN on the platen glass then close the EDH IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF PAGINATION 3 Make the desired copying selections and select 1 1 or 1 2 copy mode 4 Touch STORE on the Basic Screen to highlight it 5 Press Start to scan the original 6 Repeat steps 1 2 and 5 until all originals are scanned 7 Touch STORE to exit the Store mode 6 35 Basic Operations Store Mode continued Platen Store Mode continued 8 Enter the print quantity using the keypad The entered quantity will be displayed on the upper right message area of the Basic Screen To change the print quantity press C clear and re enter the correct quantity To delete the scanned data without printing press Stop then touch CANCEL on the popup menu to ensure that you delete the data 9 Press Start The copier starts the printing job 6 36 Basic Operations Store Mode continued EDH Store Mode Use this feature to scan more than 100 originals into memory from the EDH
275. ing Call remote center 20 Non image area erase setting oil a RETURN CANCEL HDD Management Setting Menu Screen Password List Delete Screen 1 2003 08 18 2003 08 25 2003 08 26 1 Password list delete 2 JOB auto delete period setting 3 State of HDD capacity 2003 08 25 RETURN RETURN Password List Delete Screen JOB Auto Delete Period Setting Screen 2003 08 2003 08 Auto delete OFF Period to deletion 0 week s 2003 08 RETURN CANCEL State of HDD Capacity Screen fe IB Occupied area hon Space area og 1008 RETURN 13 54 Key Operator Mode HDD Management Setting 18 continued Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password To display menus 11 to 20 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch the Lower arrow key 2 Touch 18 HDD management setting The HDD Management Password Entry Screen will be displayed when the 4 digit HDD management password is set by service Otherwise the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen displays without the password requirement If the HDD Management Password Entry Screen is displayed use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4 digit HDD management password then touch OK to display the HDD Management Setti
276. ing mode FN 10 only 100 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 75 sheets 8 5 x11 R A4R Size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A4R 8 27 x11 69 210 mm x 297 mm The maximum number of sheets varies depending on the number of pages in the booklet and whether Folding or Stapling amp Folding is selected See p 4 10 Three Folding mode FN 10 only 50 sheets folding one sheet in three Size 8 5 x11 R A4R 8 27 x11 69 210 mm x 297 mm 5000 staples cartridge Power source Main body Non sort Sort Group mode 500 sheets 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R 3000 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 1500 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 Size 11 x17 5 5 x8 5 R Staple sort mode 1000 sheets Size 11 x17 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 Variable according to the number of pages to be stapled See p 4 10 for detail Power source Finisher Paper size Upper tray 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 A4 AAR 8 27 x11 69 210 mm x 297 mm Lower tray 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 A4 A4R 8 27 x11 69 210 mm x 297 mm Paper weight in cover sheet mode 13 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Paper weight Manual stapling 13 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Manual punch 13 45 Ib Manual stapling amp folding 16 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Manual three folding 20 Ib Specifications Subject To Change Without Notice Specifications Punch Kit PK 2 PK 5 Punch Kit PK 5 US 2 HOLES Z Fold Kit ZK 3 Large Capacity Cassette C 403
277. inted sheets while the primary main tray goes up A CAUTION Use care after opening the paper exit outlet DO NOT put your hand into it otherwise you may be injured caution A CAUTION ATTENTION A ATTENTION A VORSICHT A PRECAUCION A PRECAUCION A ATTENZIONE acua fase FN 115 Finisher 2 6 Safety Information Machine Labels continued Label Locations continued e Avoid getting burned Do not touch any machine area that you are advised not to touch by a warning caution label Do not remove warning caution labels If any indicator warning label is removed please contact your service representative for information about replacements If any warning label or caution is illegible due to soilage clean the label If cleaning does not render the label legible please contact your service representative for information about label replacements 2 7 Safety Information Machine Installation and Power Requirements A CAUTION FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN BODILY INJURY AND OR MACHINE DAMAGE O FIRE PREVENTION Install machine away from flammable or volatile materials Routinely check for abnormal heat from power cord and or plug O SHORT CIRCUIT FROM WATER DAMAGE Do not install or operate this equipment outdoors near a lake pond or river etc and do not allow the
278. ion and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 11 Press Start After copying is completed touch Chapter on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine NOTES 1 Entering 0 or the same page number twice will be ignored on the screen 2 Chapter insertions occur in sequence even if original page numbers are entered out of sequence 3 When a page number entered is larger than the total original page count it will be ignored 9 9 Applications Combination Use this function to lay out and copy a fixed number 2 4 or 8 of pages onto one sheet of copy paper 2 in 1 4 in 1 or 8 in 1 Combination Specifications o 0 aoaaa Application Selection Screen Scan and store originals into memory Use EDH Store mode is also available in this case use platen glass or EDH AMS is automatically selected Original Copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions APS Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat Storing image in Overlay Memory Layout Horizontal or
279. it use of Key Operator functions to a person who is authorized to handle the responsibility Copier Service Repairs amp Supplies Copier service and repairs should be performed only by an authorized service representative To maintain personal safety and to avoid machine damage never disassemble the machine for any reason To ensure optimal copy quality use only supplies that are recommended by Konica Minolta Business Technolojies Inc For convenience use the form located at the end of Section 14 Maintenance amp Supplies to record all service repair and supply orders Machine Labels Information labels are affixed to the copier to provide quick and easy instructions on basic copying loading paper adding toner and clearing mishandled paper In addition safety labels are attached to various internal areas of the copier to provide cautionary information that must be heeded to prevent personal injury or damage to the copier Sample machine safety labels are shown in Section 2 Safety Information Control Panel with Interactive Touch Screen The Di5510 Di7210 control panel is user friendly and easy to operate The far right portion of the panel displays the Copy Scan Print indicator and keys to select the mode as well as the Timer indicator and buttons to select Energy Saver Interrupt and Panel Reset modes Adjacent to this section is the keypad to select Print Quantity Clear Quantity and Stop The next section on the left displays th
280. job Exceeding 999 minutes 9997 Shorter than 1 minute lt 1 The following message will be displayed on the second bar when the reserved job does not exist RESERVED JOB DOES NOT EXIST TANDEM CONNECTED INFORMATION Displays the tray information an current status of the other machine when two copiers are connected and operate in tandem mode Information Paper size loaded in each tray Paper out indicator when depleted in the tray Current status OPERATING STOP PAPER SUPPLY JAM ERROR To change the order of reserve jobs 1 Touch the desired reserve job key to highlight it 2 Touch JOB PRIORITY The highlighted reserve job is advanced by one in printing order unless the job preceding the selected one is already in progress 3 To return to the Basic Screen touch OK on the Job Status Screen To clear reserve jobs 1 Touch the desired reserve job key to OB STATUS DISPLA highlight it 2 Touch JOB CLEAR TOTAL PAGE S MINUTE S CONTROLLER NO MODE STATUS Piatt PSS MO do IAPOHMATION 1 COPIER 2 PRINTER 3 The Job Clear Setting Screen will be 0 displayed Touch YES The highlighted foe nFF ESEVE DD IS elearen S es os Oa eC 4 To return to the Basic Screen touch OK on the Job Status Screen 6 31 Basic Operations Reserve continued Job Status Screen continued To check user name n
281. k on white to white on black and vice versa O Original Copy paper 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Folding Stapling amp Folding Three Folding O Incompatible Special Originals None O Incompatible Applications Non Ilmage Area Erase Repeat All lmage Area Stamp Overlay Memory Application Selection Screen JOB 01 FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT A BC D Sheettc Transparenc AUTO fit er gh me aes Insertion interleave ei waton D p Combination pa Book Copy E Image Shift Program FramelFold Stamp Booklet gram alors amerre FC tame Cetin canoer or ABCD ABCD Original Reverse Image copying 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Reverse Image 3 Select additional copying features as desired 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Enter print quantity 6 Position original s FACE UP in the EDH or FACE DOWN on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 7 Press Start After copying is completed touch Reverse Image on the Application Se
282. k sub machine or Please check sub machine will be displayed as required e The tandem mode cannot be selected while the secondary copier is in the off state due to Auto shut off Press Energy Saver to release it e Selected tandem mode will be released automatically when the secondary copier activates Auto shut off Press Energy Saver to release it then select the tandem mode again to restart the procedure e When any problem occurs in the secondary copier such as a paper misfeed or lack of paper the sec ondary copier will be unavailable for printing however the problem will not cause tandem mode to be released Take the appropriate troubleshooting measures to ready the secondary copier for copying e Tandem printing job cannot be started if 10 reserve jobs not in tandem mode are entered on the sec ondary copier Wait until the reserve jobs are completed on the secondary copier e Selected tandem mode will be released automatically when the primary copier activates Auto low power Auto shut off Press Energy Saver to release Auto shut off if required then select the tandem mode again to restart the procedure 5 Select the desired copying conditions on the primary copier NOTE Ordinary copying operation is still available on the secondary copier during the tandem mode setting 6 Enter print quantity on the primary copier using the keypad When a print quantity amount of 100 is entered the primary and secondary copiers w
283. keypad To correct an entry touch 1 CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character then enter the correct job name 5 If the job name is correct touch OK to display the Scanner Setting Screen NOTE If an entered job name has already been used the popup menu appears to ask you whether to rewrite the data or to re enter new name Touch YES to rewrite or NO to create new name Network Function Image Store Delete Mode continued To Store Image Data in HDD continued 6 Select the desired scanning conditions Print quantity cannot be entered 7 Position original s FACE UP in the EDH or FACE DOWN on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 8 Press Start to scan original s When scanning is completed the Image Data Storing Screen will be displayed When Store mode is used touch to deselect STORE on the Scanner Setting Screen after all originals are scanned The Image Data Storing Screen will be displayed 9 The machine automatically begins storing data in the HDD The Basic Screen displayd SCANNER gt HDD icon resumes when the storing function is completed Image Data Storing Screen popup menu displayed NOTE To suspend the storing job touch CANCEL on the Image Data Storing Screen If the popup menu shown below is displayed touch YES to delete the data or touch NO to continue The popup menu displays when the Memory Switch No 43 is
284. l paper self adhesive sheets etc will cause machine trouble Paper in PK 2 PK 5 Punch Kit Option Paper Size 11 x17 8 5 x11 Paper Weight 20lb 24 Ib recommended Thin paper 16 Ib 19 Ib Thick paper 25 Ib 45 Ib Some 45 Ib paper types may not be punched easily Number of Punch Holes 3 Hole Diameter 0 315 0 020 8 0 mm 0 5 mm Hole Pitch 4 253 0 020 108 mm 0 5 mm NOTE Special paper OHP transparency labels tabbed sheets cannot be punched Using special paper will cause machine trouble Paper in PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch Kit Option Paper Size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R Paper Weight 20lb 24 Ib recommended Thin paper 16 Ib 19 Ib Thick paper 25 Ib 45 Ib Some 45 Ib paper types may not be punched easily Number of Punch Holes 2 Hole Diameter 0 315 0 020 8 0 mm 0 5 mm Hole Pitch 2 756 0 020 70 mm 0 5 mm NOTE Special paper OHP transparency labels tabbed sheets cannot be punched Using special paper will cause machine trouble 4 12 Paper Information Paper in ZK 3 Z Fold Kit Option Paper Size Paper Weight Punch mode Number of Punch Holes Hole Diameter Hole Pitch Z Folding mode Folded Width Punching mode 2 holes 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R 3 holes 11 x17 8 5 x11 Z Folding mode 11 x17 Z fold 8 5 x14 double fold All other paper sizes w
285. lain or colored sheet into the finished set as a Back cover The Back blank mode inserts a non copied plain or colored sheet into the finished set as a Back cover When either Back copy or Back blank is selected its icon will appear as the last fixed key with one active blank key preceding it in the page setting area of the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen The tray source will be the same as that for front cover and can be selected and displayed on the Sheet Cover Insertion Screen The insertion type can be selected separately for front cover back cover and insertion sheets This allows multiple combinations such as blank front cover and copied insertions See the following illustration for details 9 4 Applications Sheet Cover Insertion continued Basic Functions Combination samples SURVEYOR S yy 2 SURVEYORS ay att REPORT SURVEYOR S RERORT SURVEYOR S REPORT REPORT Originals Copies Originals Copies FRONT COVER COPIED FRONT amp BACK COVERS COPIED SURVEYORS sunvevor s P SURVEYORS ll sunvevor s P lt gt Originals Copies Originals Copies FRONT COVER BLANK FRONT amp BACK COVERS BLANK a ey
286. lass In this case consult your service representative about an appropriate place for installation 9 23 Applications Non Image Area Erase continued General copying Set original Non Image Area Erase Application Selection Screen JOB 01 FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Transparency Non image AUTO He Y Interleave Area Frage Maal it Layout E g gt A A Al Book Copy EJS Eb Repeat fsalf Image Shift AA Program FrameiFold FH Stamp Sob ab El pap Erasure ae g Overlay rf ALL CLEAR CANCEL OK 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Non image Area Erase 3 Select additional copying features as desired 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Enter print quantity 6 Position original s FACE DOWN on the platen glass IMPORTANT KEEP THE EDH OPEN THROUGHOUT THE PROCEDURE When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 7 Press Start After copying is completed touch Non image Area Erase on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 24 Applications Reverse Image Use Reverse image to reverse the image from blac
287. laten glass available when using Image Insert Book Copy Platen Store Mode Folding Stapling amp Folding Three Folding Transparency Interleaving Basic Screen OUTPUT A A a a La l ha 1 1 oblique staple 2 parallel staples NOTE Using excessively curled paper or some types of thin paper in Staple sort mode may cause poor results in arrangement of the stapled sets 7 6 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine with Finisher continued Staple Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray continued 1 Touch STAPLE SORT on the Basic Screen to highlight it The Staple Position icon will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area When not changing the staple position proceed to step 7 Basic Screen Output Mode popup menu Ee 0 gn origina FREE mip EXIT TRAY BINDING STAPLE OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt vob 01 ourour _ copy MODE SHORE OUTPUT RIGE SLEFT f croup Z COYER te atone C nour Z Seer Gl TANDEM pone A E sour a punci fi RECALL E SAUNAS ZODIE Z STANDARD 7 CANCEL E E oo 5 OWT ox 3 e E Staple position Binding mode AA l RIGHT p f AL amp LEFT da Sse gt fy wT i H2 G A E
288. le the secondary copier is in Auto low power mode the power saving mode will be released automatically e The tandem mode will not be selected when the secondary copier is turned off by Auto shut off Release the Auto shut off mode by pressing Energy Saver e If Auto low power is activated on the secondary copier during the tandem job setting the power saving mode will be released automatically when printing job starts e If Auto shut off is activated on the secondary copier during the tandem job setting the tandem mode will be released automatically e If Auto low power Auto shut off is activated on the primary copier the tandem mode will be released automatically O Panel reset may function while tandem mode is selected Initially the tandem mode will be released automatically if Panel reset is activated on the primary copier Key operator can set the primary copier to select the tandem mode as initial setting Apply this setting to the primary copier only if desired Setting on both copiers will deactivate the tandem mode O The Di5510 Di7210 is provided with an Allocation recovery mode which functions when trouble occurs in either the primary or secondary copier to allow the trouble free copier to complete the job 12 2 Tandem Mode Tandem Mode Operation continued O When the two copiers in tandem mode have the same ECM password registered copying will be available by entering the ECM password in the primary copier only The pa
289. lection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 25 Applications Repeat Image Use Repeat image to create labels business cards tickets etc by repeating the selected image down the page Vertical Horizontal Width Setting mode Repeat the selected image area of 10mm 150mm in both vertical and horizontal widths measured from the rear left corner of the original area indicated on the left edge of the platen glass Auto Detection mode Selecting this mode will automatically set the equal repeat area to the size of the original placed onto the platen glass by activating Non image area erase Repeat mode Select the repeating times of the original to be arranged in one copy sheet Auto Detection Mode Specifications Use the platen glass Non Ilmage Area Erase will function automatically Scanning area 11 x17 10 mm x 10 mm Repeat image area Original image area detected by Non Image Area Erase Copy mode 1 1 mode only When selecting 1 2 mode Platen store mode will function automatically O Repeat Mode Specifications Scanning area 11 x17 10 mm x 10 mm Repeat image area A portion of the selected copy size equally divided according to the mode 2 4 or 8 Repeat designated on the screen If detected image size is larger than the size figured out as above the copy result may not be satisfactory O Incompatible Conditions with Vertical Horizontal Width Setting Mode Basic copying conditions
290. lection Screen will be displayed 3 Touch OVERLAY to highlight it 4 Touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen 5 Make additional application selections or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 6 The Store mode is automatically selected and APS and AMS are released Set the desired Copy mode Copy density Lens mode and Copy size on the Basic Screen 9 44 Applications Overlay continued 7 Enter the desired print quantity 8 Position the overlaying original in the EDH or on the platen glass then press Start to scan 9 The second and subsequent pages are to be overlaid in printing Place them in the EDH or on the platen glass then press Start IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS IN REGULAR ORDER OF PAGINATION Option Press Mode Check to view selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 10 Touch STORE to deselect the store mode then press Start to print After copying is completed touch Stamp Overlay on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 45 Applications Overlay Memory Use Overlay Memory to scan and store several images in HDD then recall the desired image from the HDD to overlay onto each page copied in the job Installation of the optional HDD HDD 2 is required Image Store ABCD gt lt Store in HDD Ove
291. lications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy 2 4 8 Repeat in Repeat Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory o alo 7 56 5 CaM 711 Original A Original B Original C apy Copied set 9 21 Applications Program Job continued Application Selection Screen Basic Screen with popup menu displayed o ES eee ae FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT STATUS Non image a AUTO Area Erase mel Layout g outPuT_ FUNCTION Reverse All image fall image Al EM Arca RENAL Repeat fad image snin OUTPUT DECISION This JOB is decision p aru STAPLE ROTATION Program F fE Framelrold Stamp ay brat Sor CANCEL This JOB is cancelled i al Job Erasure f Sic Overlay CLEAR E oE o 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Program Job The inco
292. lities window I T 4 a E3 5 Web Utilities Environment Setup NOTE See p 11 18 for detailed procedure to access the Web Utilities 2 Click on Environment Setup 3 Display the Scan Transmission Setting window Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then click on Apply Click on Scan transmission setting The Scan Transmission Setting window will be displayed NOTE The Scan transmission setting key appears in the window only when the optional Printer Controller is installed in the machine 11 30 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Setting Scan Transmission Function continued Scan Transmission Setting Window oak 7 OR tes Queda B E 3 O a Address hetp f10 11 92 201oformj y es Scan transmission setting Email Registration Japanese is not available Group Setting Maximum 18 Characters Maximum 200 Characters I Registered as daily use when checked Registration Entry List HDD Registration Japanese is not available Maximum 18 Characters 4 digt 0001 9999 Registration Entry List FIP Registration Japanese is not available Maxinnunt 18 Characters Maximum 63 Characters Maximum 96 Characters Maximum 47 Characters Maximum 31 Characters Registration Eniry List Back 4
293. ly Timer Function enina a E T EE 5 5 Timer mierni sae e a a eden a a e a eee e a ES Aesitiey 5 5 Co nter Lista er a aa e raa a ate eds de raa Aa at ata saentecageds ecpened duieeedeate hatte tases 5 7 To Display the Counter List cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeseeeeesnaeeeseaeees 5 7 TO Print the COUNTS MEST cs ceccevsecce cates a a ea aaa aa a 5 7 Section 6 Basic Operations How to Make a Basic COpy ccecccceceeeeeeneeeeeneeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeseaeesecaeeseeaeesnaeessnaeeeeaes 6 2 The Basie Screehizss i akne eee aaa iA ee A olan ea 6 2 Setting Job During Warm Up ceccecececeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeaeeseaaeeseaaeeeseeessiaeeetaes 6 4 To Stop Scanning Printing cececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseaeeeseaeeessaeees 6 5 Recalling Previous Job Settings c ccccceseceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseaeeeteneeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeees 6 6 Copy Mode ceive ier eM aa ees iets att ae eG a anar AEEA TAi 6 7 Copy Mode Specifications ccccccecceeeeeeceeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseaeesseaeeesneeeeseaeeees 6 7 Copy Mode Using EDH 0 ccccccceceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeeeseaeeeeeeeseceeeneneeene 6 8 1 2 Copy Mode Using Platen Glass ccccceccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeesseaeeeeeaeeees 6 9 Using the Multi Sheet Bypass Tray cccccccceseeeeeneeeeeneeeseneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeenceeeseneeen 6 11 Copy Density nieren ater ea ia esat
294. mW and the wavelength is 775 800 nm For Denmark Users ADVARSEL Usynlig laserstraling ved abning nar sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion Undga uds ttelse for str ling Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene Dansk Dette er en halviederlaser Laserdiodens h jeste styrke er 15 mW og b lgel ngden er 775 800 nm 2 14 Safety Information Regulations continued For Finland Sweden Users LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS Laitteen Kayttaminen muulla kuin tassa kaytt6ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle nakymatt6malle lasersateilylle Tama on puolijohdelaser Laserdiodin suurin teho on 15 mW ja aallonpituus on 775 800 nm VARNING Om apparaten anv nds pa annat s tt n i denna bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstralning som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1 Det h r r en halvledarlaser Den maximala effekten f r laserdioden r 15 mW och v gl ngden r 775 800 nm F VARO Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina n kym tt m lle lasers teilylle Al katso s teeseen VARNING Osynlig laserstr lning n r denna del r ppnad och sp rren r urkopplad Betrakta ej str len or Norway Users ADVERSEL Dersom apparatet brukes p annen m te enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisni
295. machine to come in contact with splashes of rain water or any liquid O TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY Install the machine away from direct sunlight heat sources stoves heaters and cold temperatures air conditioners Avoid any environment that is outside 50 86 F 10 30 C with 10 80 humidity O VENTILATION Do not allow the machine to come in contact with dust or ammonia gas or fumes from printing or cleaning solutions etc otherwise image quality will be poor Install the machine ina well ventilated area for comfort otherwise an ozone odor will be detected during large copy runs When in use the copier generates ozone in amounts too small to be hazardous to the human body O VIBRATIONS If the machine is constantly vibrated or jolted trouble may occur Install the machine on a level horizontal floor free from vibrations O SPACE ALLOTMENT Install machine in an area with adequate space for performing copier operations replacing supply items and conducting preventive maintenance See Site Requirements Section 3 O MACHINE RELOCATION TRANSPORTATION Be sure to contact your service representative when moving or transporting the machine If you move the machine with the Hard disk drive or Memory unit installed machine trouble may be caused by vibration 2 8 Safety Information Machine Installation and Power Requirements continued A CAUTION FAILURE TO HEED THE F
296. mpatible function keys will be dimmed to show inactivity 3 Select additional copying features as desired 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Store mode is selected automatically Select basic copying and special original features on the Basic Screen and Special Original popup menu as desired 6 Position original s FACE UP in the EDH or FACE DOWN on the platen glass select the tray you want to use then press Start to scan 7 When scanning for the current JOB is completed the popup menu will be displayed in the Basic Screen To store the current JOB images touch DECISION To delete the images touch CANCEL 8 Repeat steps 3 to 7 until all JOB originals are scanned IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN EACH ORIGINAL SET IN THE CORRECT ORDER OF PAGINATION 9 Select the desired output mode 10 Enter the desired print quantity 11 Touch STORE on the Basic Screen to exit the Store mode To delete the scanned data without printing press Stop then touch CANCEL on the popup menu to ensure that you delete the data 12 Press Start The copier starts the printing job After copying is completed press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 22 Applications Non Image Area Erase The Non image area erase mode is used to copy non standard or special originals such as books magazines paste ups graphs thin or thick materials etc from the platen glass The exposed glass area outside the borders
297. n 7 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations NOTES 1 If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid Weekly Timer master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit code 13 31 Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued Timer Setting 2 Use this function to set the On Off times in hours and minutes for each day of the week or set the collective time for the entire week i e the same On Off time for each day Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Weekly Timer On Off Time Setting Screen and p 0 WEEK 1 3 Mon Ti ue Wed 4 6 Thu Fri 7 9 Sat Sun RETURN CANCEL OK Weekly Timer On Off Time Collective Setting Screen Weekly timer ON OFF setting Timer setting 1 2 3 Timer action ON OFF setting 4 Lunch hour off setting 5 Timer interrupt password set SET 3 6 9 SET CANCEL 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 9 Weekly timer Enter your 4 digit Weekly Timer master key code then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen See note 2 NOTES 1 If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid Weekly Timer master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit code 3 Touch 2 Timer
298. n To cancel the setting touch ZOOM again select the desired ratio then touch OK 4 Position original s FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the EDH as required 5 When all settings are acceptable press Start 6 21 Basic Operations Lens Mode continued Vertical Horizontal Zoom Use the Vertical Horizontal zoom mode to reduce or enlarge vertical and horizontal dimensions independently O Vertical Horizontal zoom range 0 250 4 000 Basic Screen with the popup menu for zoom setting gn original o D E O O oB 01 STATUS OUTPUT ZOOM 0 25 4 00 LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION rs 1 000 PoE TS oul sca 4 0 ei STORE FREE 1 Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen to display the popup menu for setting the zoom ratio 2 Touch Verti to select a vertical ratio 3 Use the keypad on the popup menu to enter a 4 digit vertical zoom ratio or use arrows to scroll to the desired ratio 4 Touch Horiz to select a horizontal ratio 5 Use the keypad to enter a 4 digit horizontal
299. n When the arrow key flashes touch the key to scroll to the JAM key then touch it to display the Jam Position Screen 2 To view Help Screen instructions touch GUIDE and remove paper original 3 The JAM will change to PRINT JOB or SCAN JOB 4 Press Start The print scan job will be reprocessed 5 Touch FREE JOB to continue setting the reserve job If scanning is not completed when the misfeed occurs but reserve settings have already been made the reserve job can be performed after the cleared job is completed Simply insert the original document and press Start 6 33 Basic Operations Reserve continued When Paper is Depleted for the Job in Progress If the paper supply for a print job in progress becomes depleted while you are setting a Reserve job the PRINT JOB key on the screen will change to flashing ADD PAPER key When more than four jobs have been specified and key of the print job in trouble is not currently displayed on the screen the arrow key to scroll to that job will flash Basic Screen STATUS FUNCTION ADD PAPER JOB 01 OUTPUT c Ui F SPECIAL OREINA ouTpUT APPL F STAPLE F ROTATION EE SORT STORE
300. n a name is duplicated The Name Duplication Screen will be displayed Touch OK to re enter new name 13 19 Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 continued E C M Data Edit 1 continued To Add ECM Data 1 Touch Add on the ECM Data Edit Screen The ECM Data Add Screen will be displayed 2 Touch the desired item key to highlight it then enter the data by using the touch screen keypad Password 8 digits max See note 1 Name 8 characters max See note 2 Limit 999 999 copies max NOTES 1 We recommend that you make a list of all ECM passwords and account numbers 2 If an invalid user name is entered continue by entering the valid name 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and to verify whether the same password or name has been already used for another account number When a password is duplicated The Password Duplication Screen will be displayed Touch YES to re enter new password or NO to create duplicate password NOTE If duplicate password is created the number of copies will be counted only for the ECM password with the smallest number We recommend you do not use duplicate ECM passwords When a name is duplicated The Name Duplication Screen will be displayed Touch OK to re enter new name Delete Confirmation Screen Reset Confirmation Screen
301. n cases where the image is light and background is dark the background will not be changed O Original Copy paper 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 O Incompatible Copying Conditions None Special Original popup menu Pe ee Ae 0 oe PMDN ENHANCE SREMA ORIGINAL i STATUS RIGHT Normal E FUNCTION outis C OKs UP Increase a6 Mixed Non STDP BE awpine EA Ej ongina EE size FECAL Z Folded Tab STANDARD Folde al E Photo k Original S paper D CANCEL 5 Text S IDLE Option In each enhance mode the copy density level can be shifted three levels darker or three levels lighter Density Shift See p 6 14 to p 6 15 if this setting is desired 8 4 Special Original Text Photo Enhance continued Original Auto mode Photo mode A BC A BC ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE FGHIJK FGHIJK FGHIJK LMNOP LMNOP LMNOP Original Auto mode crea
302. n the Basic Screen to deselect the Store mode when the store function is completed i e after all originals are scanned then press Start to print NOTE To suspend the scanning or printing job press Stop on the control panel The popup menu will be displayed to ask you how to complete the current job Touch CONTINUE to continue the job EXIT to cancel the job and delete the data or EXIT after storing data to HDD to store the data in HDD without printing Basic Screen FREE yop 01 OUTPUT z A STAPLE CONTINUE EXIT E B oE ale EXIT after storing di lata to HDD STATUS FUNCTION APPLI J ROTATION 9 After scanning all the originals the machine automatically starts to output and store the data in HDD The Basic Screen displayed SCANNER gt HDD icon will resume when completed Network Function Image Recall Mode Use this function to recall the image data from the HDD PC to the built in DIMM for printing NOTE Installation of the optional HDD HDD 2 is required to recall data from HDD To recall data stored in the HDD PC enter the password specified at the time data was stored then designate it by the job name Scanner Server Setting Menu Screen Image Data Password Entry Screen of follo SCAN SERYER Image store password
303. n the Stapling amp Folding mode each copied set is stapled at two positions saddle stitched then folded and output to the Booklet tray of the finisher O Use EDH O Max number of folded sheets 20 Ib Bond in both modes Folding 3 sheets less than in Staple amp Folding mode because they are not cinched first Stapling amp Folding 20 sheets 19 sheets when using thick cover paper Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A4R Paper weight 16 24 Ib Special stock 20 Ib paper is recommended Booklet tray capacity When the Booklet tray capacity is exceeded the finisher will stop operating Select the appropriate print quantity by referring to the following capacities Approx 100 sheets max Folding 33 sets max of 3 sheet folded booklet 33 x 3 99 sheets Stapling amp Folding 20 sets max of 5 sheet folded booklet 20 x 5 100 sheets 6 sets max of 15 sheet folded booklet 6 x 15 90 sheets Approx 75 sheets max 8 5 x11 R A4R Folding 25 sets max of 3 sheet folded booklet 25 x 3 75 sheets Stapling amp Folding 15 sets max of 5 sheet folded booklet 15 x 5 75 sheets O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions with Booklet selected APS 1 1 2 1 Rotation Sort Staple sort Group Cover sheet feeding Three Folding Z Folding Rotation Sort Rotation Group Punch O Incompatible Special Originals with Booklet selected Mixed Original Whole Area in Non STD size Tab Paper O Incompatible Applications with Bo
304. n you touch ENTER REPEAT WIDTH BY KEYPAD which allows you to specify the repeat width using the touch screen keypad Check BOOK MARK in the message area of the subsequent screen if desired so that the screen may be directly accessed from the Mode Check Screen to change the setting you made When all settings are made for each function the OK key can be touched to complete the settings and return you to the Application Selection Screen If no other Applications are desired the OK key can be touched again to complete your selections and bring you back to the Basic Screen With the Basic Screen displayed you can press the Start key to perform the operation To restore the original copying conditions touch CANCEL To clear all Application settings touch ALL CLEAR Basic Screen Application Selection Screen Aye 0 App atio 0 JOB 01 STATUS FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Sheet Cover Transparenc Non image AUTO fH COPY SIZE FUNCTION Insertion i interleave Area Erase Ig gt i Layout E i gt r Al it S Chapter Image Insert Efa mage A B Zi mage il 25 E AA j APPLI Combination Ba Book Copy 5 Repeat gt AAA Image Shift Z f ROTATION Booklet Program F fE FrameiFold fH p Stamp att Erasure i sie Overlay
305. nce more if there no buzzer 4 E C M function setting 9 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment RETURN Previous screen 1 CHECK BUTTON Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 10 Control panel adjustment to display the Control Panel Adjustment Screen 3 Touch the symbol at the upper right corner then lower left corner on the screen The present coordinates will be displayed in the message area of the screen 4 Check that the X coordinate and Y coordinate displayed in the first line of the message area fall within the standard value displayed in the second line 5 Touch the CHECK BUTTONS at the upper left and lower right corners on the screen to check if the buzzer tone functions normally 6 If the coordinates fall out of the range of the standard value in step 4 or the buzzer tone does not sound in step 5 repeat the adjustment procedure from 3 to 5 or contact your service representative 7 Press 1 of the control panel keypad to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 8 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 38 Key Operator Mode Tray Auto Select Setting 11 Select whether the tray size setting will be detected or not det
306. ncrease or decrease magnification in fixed amounts If required the eight initially set Preset ratios shown below can be adjusted in the Key Operator mode In addition three User Set ratios are adjustable by the Key Operator All ratios remain effective until they are replaced O 8 Preset ratios 0 500 0 647 0 733 0 785 1 214 1 294 1 545 and 2 000 O 3 User Set ratios Programmable by Key Operator and selected from 0 250 4 000 O To copy 5 5 x8 5 originals to 5 5 x8 5 copy paper select 5 5 x8 5 Copy Size then select 1 000 magnification Basic Screen with the popup menu for preset ratio setting gn original o D EIR 0 STATUS LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION B SNE j FREE vob 01 OUTPUT ENLARGE D _ Letter Legal x x20 fSEegaif iix A A 2000 1545F 1294F 1214ff ar arin ana Letter Letterf Letter 0 5 oer py 0785 0733 0847 o500 a a Zoom 4000 1000 0 500 1 Touch RE to display the popup menu for selecting the desired preset userset ratio 2 Select the desired magnification The selected key is highlighted and
307. nd developing fixing unit otherwise you may be injured 2 3 Safety Information Machine Labels continued Label Locations continued CAUTIO A ATTENTION P A CAUTION UTIO ON Azt A PRECAUCION e NONN The shift tray moves to and fro while printing DO NOT put your hand in between the tray and tray supporting part otherwise you may be injured Also DO NOT put your hand in the paper exit outlet while the tray is moving otherwise you may be injured A CAUTION OT 104 Shift tray A CAUTION AATTENTION A PRECAUCION A CUIDADO S DO NOT put your hand between the main body and tray Ly oS zA otherwise you may be A CAUTION Shy EAA Bee DO NOT put your hand between the main body and tray otherwise you may be injured Main body tray 1 and 2 2 4 Safety Information Machine Labels continued Label Locations continued Finisher with Cover Inserter E only A CAUTION facauTion CAUTION DO NOT insert your finger into ANATTENTION fAATTEMON oers the bottom of the upper part sa PREcAUcion PRECAUCION of the feeder when returning A ATTENZIONE T igi iti acum ome to its original position otherwise you may be injured TS CAUTION A ATTENTION JaartenTion 7 voRsicHT
308. ndividually for the front and back pages aun Incompatible conditions Basic copying conditions None Special Originals None Shift amount in Image Shift mode 0 250 mm in 1 mm increments setting in 0 1 mm increments using up down arrow key is also available by key operator setting to be set collectively or Page Space functions only when Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat is previously selected Original copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R Applications AUTO Layout Storing image in Overlay Memory Application Selection Screen FILE EDIT SheetiCover Transparency Insertion Interleave Chapter Image Insert fa 4 vation 2 Combination pa Book Copy E gt Booklet Program Georg Job IMAGE EDIT Non image Area Erase mi i Reverse Image A All image Area Image Shift FramelFold Stamp Erasure ft Sie Overlay Image Shift Selection Screen PAGE SPACE selected image Shift RA Repeat AA raft FRONT FRONT BACK 2 3 5 6 UP SHIFT 15 0mm gt PAGE SPACE MUCC OELII Pz EET 15 0mm 10 0mm t E BACK BOTH SIDES aca LEFT CA3 SHIFT Reduce amp Shift PAGE SPACE t 10 0mm omm 1 4 suet 7j 8j 9 0 A v Image Shift Sel Reduce ode se FRONT gt 10 0mm BACK
309. ng kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstr ling som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1 Dette en halvleder laser Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 15 mW og b lgelengde er 775 800 nm 2 15 Safety Information Regulations continued Laser Safety Label A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A RAYONNEMENT ER DE CLASSE 1 LASER KLASSE 1 L 7521 Bin AoH Saa 1 MS 1 RMP SR1 BHR KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC 1 6 1 Marunouchi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0005 Japan MANUFACTURED KHK THIS PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR CHAPTER I SUBCHAPTER J 2 16 Safety Information Regulations continued Ozone Release NOTE Locate the Machine in a Well Ventilated Room A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of this machine An unpleasant odor may however be created in poorly ventilated rooms during extensive machine operations For a comfortable healthy and safe operating environment it is recommended that the room well ventilated REMARQUE Placer l appareil dans une pi ce largement ventil e Une quantit d ozone n gligable est d gag e pendant le fonctionnement de l appareil quand celui ci est utilis normalement Cependant une odeur d sagr able peut tre ressentie dans les pi ces dont l a ration
310. ng Menu Screen NOTE The HDD management password is not initially set Contact your service representative if desired 3 Touch the desired menu key to display the subsequent screen for each function To view the password list or delete the password and the corresponding image data 1 Touch 1 Password list delete to display the Password List Delete Screen 2 Touch to highlight the password key to be deleted then touch DELETE The popup menu will appear for confirmation 3 Touch YES to delete the selected password and all the corresponding data or touch NO to cancel 4 Touch RETURN to return to the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen To delete the password and data automatically 1 Touch 2 JOB auto delete period setting to display the Job Auto Delete Period Setting Screen 2 Touch Auto delete ON to highlight it then enter the number of weeks to keep the data using the touch screen keypad The maximum period of time is 52 weeks 3 Touch OK to complete the setting To check the current state of HDD capacity 1 Touch 3 State of HDD capacity to display the State of HDD Capacity Screen The bar chart on the screen shows the current state of HDD capacity 2 Touch RETURN to return to the HDD Management Setting Menu Screen 4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 5 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 55 Key Operator Mode Scan Transmission Setting 1
311. ng trash basket of Punch kit 2 Booklet mode outlet FN 10 Finisher only ejects finished copied sets when selecting Folding mode Stapling amp Folding mode or Three folding mode 3 Booklet tray FN 10 Finisher only holds sets ejected in Folding mode Stapling amp Folding mode or Three folding mode 4 Primary Main tray holds sets ejected in Non sort mode Sort mode offset Staple sort mode Group mode offset or Z Folding mode 5 Secondary Sub tray holds sets ejected in Non sort mode or Group mode with face down up mode 3 8 Machine Information Machine Configuration continued Optional Equipment continued 530 NORO N 3 Cover sheet conveyance m lever 14 4 Sub tray conveyance lever 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch kit option 1 Entrance lever 4 Sub tray conveyance lever 3 Cover sheet conveyance lever 5 Stacker conveyance aH 2 PK 2 Punch vi a kit option 1 Entrance lever 9 Trash basket 8 Stacker unit 7 Stacker unit knob 6 Lower lever 11 Stacker unit handle FN 10 Finisher with PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch kit Entrance lever opens downward to remove mishandled paper PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch kit option punches file holes in the output copies Cover sheet conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper Sub t
312. night For example 6 a m is 06 00 hours 6 p m is 18 00 hours 2 The Panel Reset key is used to change numbers determined by the SET touch key 13 29 Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued How to Access the Weekly Timer Setting Mode Key Operator Mode Screen Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen System initial setting Paper type Special size set Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting 1 Weekly timer password 4 E C M function setting 3 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment RETURN CANCEL Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen 1 Weekly timer ON OFF setting Timer setting Timer action ON OFF setting Lunch hour off setting Timer interrupt password set RETURN 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 9 Weekly timer The Weekly Timer Master Key Code Screen displays if a code is required 3 Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4 digit Weekly Timer master key code then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen See note 2 4 Select the desired Weekly Timer function and make settings as required 5 To exit the Weekly timer mode touch RETURN on the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen 6 To exit the Key Operator mode touch RET
313. not be stapled O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R O Paper capacity for 20 Ib 500 sheets 5 5 x8 5 3 000 sheets 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 FN 121 FN 115 2 500 sheets 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 FN 10 1 500 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 Basic Screen 3 Bui 30mm BINDING RIGHT lt amp LEFT al BINDING UP a BINDING Fy STAPLE a E COUNT SET _ OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt SORT alll COYER SHEET al PUNCH J E STAPLII vi amp FOLDING FOLDING ZDZ THREE FOLDING 0 1 HDD STORE TANDEM RECALL STANDARD CANCEL OK ORIGINAL COUNT 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu 2 Touch GROUP then OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen The GROUP icon will be displayed in the OUTPUT icon area 3 Enter the desired print quantity 4 Position originals in the EDH and make copying selections as required When using Store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 37 5 Press Start A CAUTION When the selected print quantity exceeds the Finishers maximum capacity remove the printed sheets while paper is exiting to avoid paper mishandling 7 9 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine with Finisher continued Out
314. nt ON Front amp Back Print OFF BOOK J610 MARK Jf Application L Stamp Overlay INSERT PRINT SETTING COPIED INSERT Print ON Print OFF Skip page BLANK INSERT i Print OFF Skip page 8 pt COYER PRINT FRONT amp BACK PRINT ON 1 and press 0 INSERT PRINT I COPIED INSERT PRINT OFF CHARACTER SIZE with INSERT PRINT SETTING selected PAGE NUMBERING PL P2 P3 3229 FINE ADJ OF CHARACTER POSITION SIZE 1 5 2 5 3 5 1 2 3 PRINTED RINTE STARTING No BLANK INSERT _ SKIP PAGE OK ent MARK Application LStemp Overlay PRINTING POSITION ricn T LEF ricn Lower LEFT lett 9 42 Applications Stamp continued 7 Touch STARTING No on the Set Numbering Page Numbering or Watermark Numbering Type Selection Screen to display the Starting No Setting Screen Use the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key to enter the desired starting number then touch OK to return to the previous screen Use to enter a minus number to print from halfway through e g 2 to print 1 from page 4 Starting No Setting Screen Original 2 3 gt Copy 5 8 A v 1 2 oK zoo m ro Numbering or Watermark Numbering Type Selection Screen will display the Starting No Setting Screen wit
315. o display the ECM Setting Menu Screen See note 2 NOTES 1 If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid ECM master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 8 digit code 4 Touch 1 E C M data edit The ECM Data Edit Screen will be displayed To change add or delete the ECM data and to reset the copy count of an individual account follow the procedure for each as described below To Change ECM Data 1 Touch A or Y key on the right side of the list to highlight the ECM data to be changed then touch Change The ECM Data Change Screen will be displayed 2 Touch the desired item key to highlight it then enter new data by using the touch screen keypad Password 8 digits max See note 1 Name 8 characters max See note 2 Limit 999 999 copies max NOTES 1 We recommend that you make a list of all ECM passwords and account numbers 2 If an invalid user name is entered continue by entering the valid name 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and to verify whether the same password or name has been already used for another account number When a password is duplicated The Password Duplication Screen will be displayed Touch YES to re enter new password or NO to create duplicate password NOTE If duplicate password is created the number of copies will be counted only for the ECM password with the smallest number We recommend you do not use duplicate ECM passwords Whe
316. o display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 7 Panel contrast Key sound adj to display the Panel Contrast Key Sound Adjustment Screen 3 Adjust the Panel contrast Backlight contrast or Buzzer volume as desired Touch Dimmer to make the panel or backlight contrast dimmer than currently displayed or touch Brighter to make the panel or backlight contrast brighter than currently displayed Touch Small or Big to regulate the buzzer volume of the touch keys 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen 5 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations NOTES 1 If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 The control panel contrast feature can be adjusted from the Help screen provided the feature setting is activated by your service representative When the Control panel contrast key is pressed the Contrast Adjustment Screen will be displayed Contact your service representative if the feature is required 13 27 Key Operator Mode Key Operator Data Setting 8 Use this screen to enter the name and extension number of the Key Operator indicated on the Help Screen that develops from the Basic Screen O Setting options 5 digit Key Operator telephone extension Max 8 character Key Operator name Key Operator Mode Screen K
317. o the main body otherwise machine trouble may be caused 14 8 Maintenance amp Supplies Adding Toner A CAUTION Keep toner cartridge away from children Although the toner is non toxic do not inhale it or allow it to enter your eyes In case the toner comes in contact with eyes please consult your physician When toner supply is low the message Please add toner and ADD TONER icon Eao Toner will be displayed on the touch screen 1 Open the Toner access door 2 Pull the Toner cartridge holder lever forward and withdraw the Toner cartridge holder 3 Remove the empty toner cartridge 4 Shake the new Toner cartridge several times to loosen toner 5 Remove the Toner cartridge cap 6 Set the new Toner cartridge into the Toner cartridge holder NOTE Fit the bottom of the Toner cartridge into the rear part of the Toner cartridge holder with the cartridge label face up 7 Push the Toner cartridge holder lever backward and return the toner cartridge holder to its original position 8 Close the Toner access door securely 14 9 Maintenance amp Supplies Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN 121 FN 10 Finisher Use only the staples supplied by us Contact your service representative to reorder 2 Pull out the stacker unit by holding the stacker uni
318. of simplex originals so that the reverse sides of the duplex copies appear upside down In 2 1 copy mode Rotation rearranges the reverse sides of duplex originals when the reverse side is upside down so that they can be read as normal simplex copies Introduction Features of the Di5510 Di7210 continued e Image Shift Creates or removes a binding margin at the top bottom right and left edges shift amount from 0 250 mm in 1 mm increments reduces image to prevent image loss reduce amp shift amount from 0 250 mm in 1 mm increments e Interrupt Copying Interrupts copying in progress to perform copying from the platen glass e Job Status Displays the Job Status Screen to view the machine status changes the operation order of reserve jobs deletes the unused reserve job or displays the previous job list e Lens Mode Preset Zoom Selects Preset ratios four reduction and four enlargement ratios Zoom ratios can be selected from 25 0 400 0 in 0 1 increments e Machine Status Confirmation Displays the current machine status on LCD for confirmation e Magnification Sets user programmable ratios under User Set 1 User Set 2 and User Set 3 e Manual Shut off Shuts off the main power when pressing Energy Saver key e Mixed Original Copies mixed size originals from the EDH in APS or AMS mode APS automatically selects the copy size of each original AMS mode allows you to select one paper size for all origin
319. oklet selected Sheet Cover Insertion Combination Transparency Interleave Program Job Non Image Area Erase Reverse Image Repeat O Incompatible conditions without Booklet Sort Staple sort Group Rotation Sort Rotation Group Three Folding Punch Z Folding Transparency Interleave Reverse Image OOO 7 14 Output Modes Folding and Stapling amp Folding Modes continued Folding Stapling amp Folding 3 sheets max 20 sheets max 19 sheets max when using thick cover paper Output Mode popup menu Folding Be Ae 0 mr EXIT TRAY BINDING RIGHT amp LEFT BINDING a UP a BINDING Fy STAPLE OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt COYER SHEET T HDD STORE TANDEM sort jpunce EJI pecai STANDARD STAPLING AZ f Z FOLDING FoLoNGL E 22 CancEL THREE ae DJI ox aaa a e e e E _ ale 0 BINDING OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt HDD STORE RIGHE ES 7 COYER ae O RAIES seer EJ TaNoeM Rone dA sont al punce E ET Let meem STANDARD STAPLING_AS S Z CANCEL 3 rowine J TFOLDING OK Output Modes Folding and Stapling amp Folding Modes
320. oles punching only Non STD Size O Incompatible Applications Transparency Interleave O Incompatible with Punch mode using PK 2 Punch kit Cover Sheet mode Mixed Original with APS Sheet Cover Insertion Copy insertion mode in Chapter Cover sheet mode in Booklet Program Job o O 2 756 4 252 o 70 mm L o 108 mm t 2 holes 3 holes 7 17 Output Modes Punch Mode continued Output Mode popup menu machine with PK 2 PK 5 Punch kit ae Bl Punch Position popup menu machine with ZK 3 Z Fold kit ele ode E O PUNCH 2HOLE PUNCH G3HOLE ae A EE yuh Al Aj A CANCEL OK Punch Position popup menu m
321. ollow in sequence Example 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set ist TAB y Printed Section 1 Section 3 Management _ s 5 J side Introduction RD ONE FINISHED SET 2nd TAB 3rd TAB Example 9 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for 3 finished sets 1st TAB Section 3 Management Section 1 IThyntroduction Section 1 Section 1 Introduction Introduction j My i 3rd TAB 1st TAB 2nd TAB 2nd TAB 3rd TAB THREE FINISHED SETS NOTE Service can set the Tray 1 or 2 to have the tabbed sheets loaded Contact your service representative if desired 14 6 Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Paper continued Loading Tabbed Sheets in LCC C 403 C 404 Load offset tabbed sheets so that the tab extensions are on the right at the rear not front of the tray The tab extension width should be 0 5 12 5 mm or less When loading tabbed sheets in the tray be sure to specify the paper type as TAB in the Key Operator mode otherwise mishandled paper may occur See p 13 25 to p 13 26 The top sheet is designated face up as the first tab of the finished set Subsequent offset tab sheets follow in sequence Example 3 Tabbed sheets loaded in position for one finished set 1st TAB Section 1 Introduction Introduction Printed _ set ONE FINISHED SET Example 9 Tabb
322. on or enlargement mode an appropriate paper size is selected according to the ratio selected 11 EDH APS The copier automatically selects the same size copy paper as the original placed on the EDH In reduction enlargement mode an appropriate paper size is selected according to the ratio 12 Platen AMS The copier detects the size of the platen original and selects the appropriate magnification ratio to correspond to the selected paper size 13 EDH AMS After detecting the original size placed on the EDH the copier automatically selects an appropriate ratio for the copy when copy size is selected manually 13 44 Key Operator Mode Memory Switch Setting 13 continued 14 Select tray when APS cancel Select the tray to be automatically selected when APS is released 15 Platen original size detect Select the series of the original paper size detected from the platen glass 16 EDH original size detect Select the series of the original paper size detected from the EDH 17 Platen orig size detect SMALL Select the minimum original size detected from the platen glass 18 Rotation Select to activate the Rotation function activate Rotation only when APS AMS functions or activate Rotation only when APS AMS Reduce functions 19 Staple mode reset function Staple mode is automatically canceled after a job is completed with Staple sort mode ON Sort mode is selected 20 Job offset operating Set the cop
323. only Automatic Duplex Unit 16 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Multi Sheet Bypass Tray 13 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 FN 122 Finsher 13 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Cover Inserter E 13 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES 13 45 Ib Punch Kit ZK 3 Z Fold Kit 13 45 Ib 16 24 Ib Z Folding mode OT 104 Shift Tray 13 110 Ib 200 g m thick paper Some 45 Ib paper types may not be punched easily NOTE Reliability and copy quality are not guaranteed for all special papers Use only paper that is recommended by us 4 14 Section 5 Copier Management Energy Saver Mode 5 2 Entering an ECM Password 5 4 Weekly Timer Function 5 5 Counter List 5 7 Copier Management Energy Saver Mode There are two modes for the Energy Saver described below Low Power mode enables you to conserve energy by maintaining a lower fixing temperature during periods of copier inactivity Shut Off mode conserves even more energy by partially turning OFF the power supply Auto Low Power This function automatically lowers the power after a specified period of copier inactivity The Auto Low Power function can be set to 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes 120 minutes 240 minutes Initially the mode is set to function after 15 minutes of copier inactivity For th
324. ons to complete the job on the primary copier When the power is turned off on either the primary or secondary copier The tandem mode will be released automatically in either case Restart the procedure from the first step 12 6 Section 13 Key Operator Mode To the Key Operator 13 2 System Initial Setting 1 13 4 Copier Initial Setting 2 13 11 User Setting Mode 3 13 13 ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 13 16 Lock Delete Program Memory 5 13 24 Paper Type Special Size Set 6 13 25 Panel Contrast Key Sound Adjustment 7 13 27 Key Operator Data Setting 8 13 28 Weekly Timer 9 13 29 Control Panel Adjustment 10 13 38 Tray Auto Select Setting 11 13 39 Energy Saver Setting 12 13 40 Memory Switch Setting 13 13 41 Machine Management List Print 14 13 49 Call Remote Center 15 13 50 Side 2 Lens Adjustment 16 13 51 Finisher Adjustment 17 13 52 HDD Management Setting 18 13 54 Scan Transmission Setting 19 13 56 Non Image Area Erase Setting 20 13 58 Background Adjustment 21 13 59 Timing Adjustment 22 13 60 Centering Adjustment 23 13 62 Key Operator ECM Form 13 64 ect one of follo
325. ooting Copying Hints continued IN MIXED ORIGINAL MODE A MESSAGE TO LOAD A REQUIRED PAPER SIZE DISPLAYS EVEN THOUGH THAT SIZE IS LOADED IN ONE OF THE TRAYS Paper sizes loaded in the trays must be consistent with the tray position size otherwise the tray key on the Basic Screen will blink THE BASIC SCREEN DOES NOT DISPLAY SETTINGS AS DESCRIBED IN USER S MANUAL Check with the Key Operator as Initial Settings may have been changed PLEASE CHECK ORIGINAL This message displays when the copier detects a non standard paper size on the platen glass Select copy size and press Start 1 000 magnification will be selected automatically If this message continues to display after selecting copy size select 1 000 magnification even if it is already indicated then press Start If desired ask your service representative to enable the machine to default to 1 000 magnification in this situation SHEET INSERTION RESULT IS NOT AS EXPECTED Blank insertion Be sure manuscript originals do not already include blank sheets in the locations designated for sheet insertion Copy insertion To ensure that chapter sheets in 1 2 mode always appear on the right hand side in the finished set insertion sheets must be designated on the page setting screen with odd numbers not even If required make an even numbered original page odd by inserting a blank sheet in front of that page so that the blank sheet is even and the insertion sheet is odd
326. opy EJS E Repeat gt RAA Image Shit Booklet Program REE SYGvertay pen E FG H E FG H clear canceL ok Original Normal Copy All lmage Area Copy 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch All image Area 3 Select additional copying features as desired 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Select the desired copy size 6 Enter the desired print quantity 7 Position original s FACE UP in EDH or FACE DOWN on platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 8 Press Start After copying is completed touch All image Area on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 33 Applications Image Shift To Adjust Position of Copy Image Use Image Shift to create a new binding margin on originals copied in the 1 1 or 2 2 mode or adjust existing margins on originals copied in the 1 2 or 2 1 mode Page space function is available only when Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has been already selected Use this function to create the desired amount of blank space between the two images on a page If image loss seems likely select the Reduce amp Shift mode See p 9 37 g i
327. orm Printing side lt Three Fold gt 3 Weekly timer Control panel adjustment RETURN 5 Paper type Special size set Panel contrast Key sound adj Key operator data setting Decimal point off 1 STEP 1mm Decimal point on 1 STEP 0 1mm Face up Face down Division of a number of copies During of a number of copies Panel reset timer Complete job OFF 3 seconds 5 seconds 10 seconds Reserve copy by folder select Reserve copy by original set ON OFF OFF ON Outside page numbering OFF 15 seconds 30 seconds 60 seconds 90 seconds ON It is cancel every JOB ON It is not cancel every JOB OFF Permission Delete Overwrite Prohibition Delete Overwrite It is cancel every JOB It is not cancel every JOB OFF ON OFF ON Face down Face up Permission Prohibition No mask Mask No mask Mask No mask Mask Not keep Keep Printer tray PI tray OFF ON PDF PACKAGE TIFF PDF PACKAGE TIFF DIVISION TIFF PDF PACKAGE TIFF QUTSIDE INSIDE Key Operator Mode Screen 2 elect one of following ite Tray auto select setting Energy saver setting Memory switch setting Side 2 lens adjustment Finisher adjustment HDD management setting Scan transmission setting Non image area erase setting RETURN Machine management list print Call remote center He 13 42 Key Operator Mode Memory Switch Setting 13 continued Memory Switch Setting Screen Selec
328. ot copier information zk Touch USER NAME CHECK to display the User Name Check Screen Check the user name indicated on the right side of the Job No and operation mode 2 To return to the Job Status Screen touch OK USER NAME CHECK MEMORY 999 CONTROLLER PAGE S 9 INFORMATION NO MODE STATUS PAGE COMPLETE RESERVE JOB DOES NOT EXIST RESERVE JOB DOES NOT EXIST RESERVE JOB DOES NOT EXIST RESERVE JOB DOES NOT EXIST RESERVE JOB DOES NOT EXIST 3 To return to the Basic Screen touch OK on the Job Status Screen To display previous job list 1 Touch PREVIOUS JOB LIST to display the Previous Job List Screen 2 Touch to scroll to the next page if needed Up to 16 previous jobs 4 pages can be displayed Touch to return to the previous page 3 To return to the Job Status Screen touch OK Previous Job List Screen No MODE STATUS PAG S COMPLETE PREYIOUS JOB DOES NOT EXIST COPIER CANCEL 20 100 PRINTER COMPLETE 10 20 COPIER COMPLETE 20 100 4 To return to the Basic Screen touch OK on the Job Status Screen To display noncomplete job list 1 Touch NONCOMPLETE JOB LIST to display the Noncomplete Job List Screen 2 Touch to scroll to the next page if needed Up to 16 noncomplete jobs 4 pages can be displayed Touch to return to the previous page 3 To return to the Job Status Screen touch OK
329. ote 2 NOTES 1 If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid Weekly Timer master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit code 3 Touch 5 Timer interrupt password set to display the Timer Interrupt Password Setting Screen 4 Use the touch screen keypad to enter a 4 digit password and then touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen NOTE When the password setting is 0000 Timer Interrupt can be used simply by turning the copier OFF then ON In this case you will be asked to enter the duration of use a period of time to turn the copier power on If other Weekly Timer setting changes are required select the desired menu item from 1 5 5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 6 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 37 Key Operator Mode Control Panel Adjustment 10 Use this feature to check the LCD touch screen and realign the position of the touch sensor that may have shifted Key Operator Mode Screen Control Panel Adjustment Screen System initial setting 5 Paper type Special size set CHECK BUTTON Copier initial setting Panel contrast Key sound adj User setting mode Key operator data setting Press two marks on upper right lower left respectively The buzzer when pressing two check buttons represents to complete the adjustment right Re adjust o
330. ouch lt gt to select or as desired enter the value then touch SET Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area If provided touch NEXT or BACK to move to the next or previous adjustment item Touch RETURN to restore the Centering Adjustment Menu Screen 5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 6 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 63 Key Operator Mode Key Operator ECM Form No Password Count Limit No Password Count Limit 13 64 Section 14 Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Paper 14 2 Adding Tonet 14 9 Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN 121 FN 10 Finisher 14 10 Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN 115 Finisher 14 11 Empty Trash Basket of PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch Kit 14 12 Empty Trash Basket of ZK 3 Z Fold Kit 14 13 Preventive Maintenance 14 14 Cleaning the Left Partition Glass 14 15 Cleaning the Document Glass and Inner Surface of the EDH 14 15 Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Paper Paper Indicator l A paper indicator always appears on the tray key of the Basic Screen to indicate the paper level Paper Empty Indicator or _ The Paper empty indicator flashes on the tray key of the Basic S
331. ouch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Chapter The Chapter Insertion Setting No Screen will be displayed The 1 2 copy mode is automatically selected 3 Use the keypad on the control panel to enter the page number of each title page 4 Touch SET To clear an incorrect entry touch DELETE or press C clear The insertion location will be deleted To enter the correct page number touch SET and use the keypad 5 Repeat this for each title page number you want to appear on the right hand side When setting more than 15 locations touch the arrow key to move to the next page Be sure to touch SET after each page number entry up to a total of 30 entries Option Touch Booklet on the Chapter Insertion Setting No Screen to use this function To change the selection of paper tray for copying title pages touch Copy Insertion on the screen In this case you can touch CHANGE OF THE INSERTION TRAY to change the currently selected paper tray displayed on the screen 6 When all entries are made touch OK to return to the Application Selection Screen 7 Select additional copying features as desired 8 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 9 Enter the desired print quantity 10 Position originals FACE UP on the EDH 100 originals can be set When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 Option Press Mode Check to view the select
332. ouch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password To display menus 11 to 20 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch the Lower arrow key 2 Touch 15 Call remote center to display the Call Remote Service Center Screen 3 Touch 1 Call for service center The Start Call Screen will be displayed 4 Touch Start to call 5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 6 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 50 Key Operator Mode Side 2 Lens Adjustment 16 Use this function to set the adjustment data of the magnification ratio for each tray as Side 2 Key Operator Mode Screen 2 Side 2 Lens Adjustment Screen one 11 Tray auto select setting Side 2 lens adjustment 12 Energy saver setting Finisher adjustment Memory switch setting HDD management setting 14 Machine management list print Scan transmission setting Call remote center Non image area erase setting 2 RETURN CANCEL OK Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password To display menus 11 to 20 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch the Lower arrow key 2 To
333. ouping function display the Group Setting window Click on Group Setting on the Scan Transmission Setting window The Group Setting window will be displayed Fie Edt view Teale Help Heak v earch Favorites Breda JD 3AA Adress E Htip 1011 32 207 eoform ipscan enhtnl Command Croun F ee Group Registration Japanese is not available Group En ry List Registration Reset Maximum 18 Characters Group Member Setting ABC DEF GH IRE NNO PaRS TU wx Othe Dai Use ALL ALL 37 Enay abedets sexyyze Demail c0 jp Alcia Akta alpha a a E Aomori Aomon April Apal Augest Augest baby baty 7 beta ba 7 TE 340 Kkatayama konica co jp ke katayama konica co jp To group the E mail data Enter the desired group name Click on an alphabetical order key to display the E mail data to be included in the group click on the check box heading the data then click on Registration The registered content will be displayed Click on Back to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window Group Member List Aprl Mapri abeyzcom Angst Angos aberyz com Febrisray May 11 33 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Setting Scan Transmission Function continued To display the Group Entry List Click on Group Ent
334. over Inserter E PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch Kit e 1 oblique staple e 2 parallel staples e Punch FN 10 Finisher Cover Inserter E e 1 oblique staple e 2 parallel staples e Stapling amp Folding 2 staples in the center Folding e Three Folding FN 10 Finisher Cover Inserter E PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch Kit e 1 oblique staple e 2 parallel staples e Stapling amp Folding 2 staples in the center Folding e Three Folding e Punch Specifications for Manual Stapling 1 oblique staple and 2 parallel staples O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 A4 A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mm x 297mm O Paper weight 16 24 Ib 20 Ib paper is recommended O Staple capacity 50 sheets max 20 lb paper O Output tray Primary main tray Specifications for Manual Punch O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x11 A4 8 27 x11 69 210mm x 297mm O Paper weight 16 24 Ib 20 Ib paper is recommended O Punch capacity 200 sheets max 24 Ib paper or within 30mm thick O Output tray Primary main tray O The machine with ZK 3 Z Fold Kit requires PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch Kit to use this function 7 27 Output Modes Manual Finishing continued Specifications for Manual Stapling amp Folding mode O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A4 A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mm x 297mm O Paper weight 16 24 Ib 20 Ib paper is recommended O Staple capacity 20 sheets max 20 Ib paper 19 sheets max
335. ox will be displayed If the machine is using the ECM function enter the 8 digit ECM password Choose Auto Output Proof Output or Wait Output as desired Click on Back to cancel the output setting NOTE If incorrect ECM password is entered the print job cannot be completed successfully and the message displayed in the Result of job print dialogue box will inform you that the wrong password was entered See p 13 16 for details of the ECM setting Selecting Auto output Enter the desired print quantity then click on Apply The machine starts to output the specified number of copied sets then the Result of job print dialogue box will appear when completed NOTE The web browser does not allow you to cancel the printing job if it is currently in progress Use the machine to stop printing 11 17 Network Function HDD Job Information Mode continued Check Screen CHECK MODE BASIC amp SPECIAL ORIG Copy Quant it 10 Main tray Duplex Mode 1 1 EDH Photo Mode DSE meee Z Folded Original CSRS ee 1 000 STD size Size A4 B4 A4 Paper Type Recycle OHP Output Mode Staple Sort Se Ew ee Selecting Proof output Enter the desired print quantity then click on Apply A sample copy will be output and the Mode Check Screen will be displayed on the touch screen of the machine Check the sample copy change the copy conditions if required t
336. pleted touch Repeat on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine NO 9 28 Applications Frame Fold Erasure Use Frame Fold Erasure to eliminate black copy marks along borders Frame erasure amount 1 300 mm in 1 mm increments Initial frame erasure value 10 mm Fold erasure amount 1 99 mm in 1 mm increments Initial fold erasure value 10 mm Original copy paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions None Incompatible Special Originals None Incompatible Applications Repeat All lmage Area aoaoanaaniaan Application Selection Screen Frame Fold Erasure Selection Screen e amo 00 p 809 20810 and or fold era e amo 99 MARK f Application LFrame Fold JOB 01 FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT SheetiCover Transparency Non image mj AUTO E He al Insertion Interleave Area Erase limi gt lla Layout Chapter Image Insert fa Rage Al lt FRAME gt Frame Erasure FRAME 2 3 UP ENTE Lomm Frame Erasure 5 6 Each side 8 9 A v CANCEL mation 2 p Combination pa Book Copy E5 Image Shift A Fold Erasure Program Frame Fold Stamp Booklet ogam ae EE ay clear CANCEL
337. ppears as E K C Electronic Key Counter in the Web Utilities windows Web Utilities Window Environment Setup Menu Window TEESE Eede gt O A A Qarn fayrevortes geda A D g a FEE Adress Feto 1110 11 32 201aoformiconieren eml mnra 8 manae amp Web Utilities aa Web Utilities Hoot inormation Bebecticrdin Hep vepinfomaton Environment Setup EP EFENI NA Key Operator Password Environment setup Tnput Password ii meesme 1 Open the Web Utilities window NOTE See p 11 18 for detailed procedure to access the Web Utilities 2 Click on Environment Setup 3 Display the E C M Function Setting window Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then click on Apply The Environment Setup menu window will be displayed 11 22 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Setting E C M Function Environment Setup continued File Edt view Favorites Tools Help E C M Function Setting Menu Window back h ravertes Gren GS aara r gt OR al Address het 10 11 32 20 ooform ooier_en ten Ele Edt vew Favorites Tools Help se ype your user name and password 101132201 Ream By Password UserName Pesonord TT Save tis password n your passwordist esak gt O A Qsearch Favorites Bristory Gye ec Link I Address http 10 11 2129 eoform copier jahtml E K C function setting ne 7 EKC data add
338. propriate place for installation Vertical Horizontal Width Setting mode Auto Detection mode 2 4 8 Repeat mode BCD BCD Copy 2 Repeat BCD BCD Copy AUTO BCD BCD Copy 4 Repeat DDDD DDDD Copy 8 Repeat Application Selection Screen elect Appl icacio i JoB 01 FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT All image Area Repeat P Jo EHER eitte eano ok Repeat Mode Selection Screen o BOOK 201 MARK Jf Application L Repeat YERTJHORIZ WIDTH SETTING AUTO DETECTION REPEAT 7 AB T YERT WIDTH gs A A A A 80m y AA AAA AA AAAA HORIZ WIDTH A AAA A A A A A A A A Wace 80m y AUTO 2 Repeat 4 Repeat 8 Repeat To 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Repeat to display the Repeat Mode Selection Screen 9 27 Applications Repeat Image continued 3 To select the Vertical Horizontal width setting mode 1 Touch Vertical Horizontal 2 Specify the vertical and horizontal widths of the scanning area using up down arrow key from 10 150 mm in 1 mm increments Keep touching the key to increase decrease the value continuously Or touch ENTER REPEAT WIDTH BY KEYPAD to display the popup screen to enter the valu
339. put Modes Using Secondary Sub Tray In addition to the Primary main tray FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 Finisher is equipped with a Secondary sub tray that can be selected on the Output Mode popup menu The Secondary sub tray provides 4 types of output mode as specified below also to be specified on the Output Mode popup menu 1 Face down non sort exit 3 Face down group exit 2 Face up non sort exit 4 Face up group exit O Paper size 11 x17 5 5 x8 5 O Paper weight 16 24 Ib O Paper capacity for 20 Ib 200 sheets Output Mode popup menu Non sort Face down a Bl mip EXIT TRAY BINDING OUTPUT lt SUB TRAY gt HDD STORE OuTeuT RIGHT i amp LEFT BINDING al EEUE B TANDEM UP STANDARD CANCEL croup Z OK Output Mode popup menu Non sort Face up Ae Maite EXIT TRAY BINDING OUTPUT lt SUB TRAY gt HDD STORE OUTPUT RIGHT r amp LEFT FACE UP gt BINDING al TANDEM UP BINDING TAa IP STANDARD CANCEL croup Z OK Output Mode popup menu Group Face down
340. py quantity and copy limits for each account can be visually confirmed on the screen If ECM needs to be activated on your machine contact your service representative The following ECM settings can be made 1 E C M data edit Change add or delete ECM data and reset the copy count of the individual account 2 E C M all count reset Clear the copy count for all accounts 3 E C M function setting Turn the ECM function on or off and set conditions to stop immediately stop after job is completed or display a warning message when copy limit is reached 13 16 Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 continued How to Access the ECM Setting Mode Key Operator Mode Screen ECM Master Key Code Screen e of following ite 1 System initial setting _8 Paper type Special size set 2 Copier initial setting 2 Pane contrast Key sound adj 3 User setting mode Key operator data setting 4 5 E C M master key code paaa E C M function setting 3 Weekly timer Lock delete program memory Control panel adjustment RETURN CANCEL ECM Setting Menu Screen elect one of following ite IJ E C M data edit E C M all count reset E C M function setting RETURN 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 If the Key Operator pas
341. ramelFold Stamp Erasure f Sic Overlay ALL 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Stamp Overlay The Stamp Overlay Selection Screen will be displayed 3 Touch OVERLAY MEMORY to display the Overlaying Image Selection Screen NOTE Without HDD the OVERLAY MEMORY key will be dimmed on the Stamp Overlay Selection Screen to show inactivity 4 Touch IMAGE STORE to display the Image Name Entry Screen Overlaying Image Selection Screen Image Name Entry Screen Ei BOO aaa OR MARK JJ Application L Stamp Overlay BOOK 20810 MARK JJ Application LStemp Overlay ABCD1111 2003 23 ABCD1112 2003 11 23 ABCD1113 2003 11 23 G H I J ABCD2221 2003 11 27 ABCD2222 2003 11 27 ABCD2223 2003 11 27 af Riisf Tt B L v IMAGEOO1 EFGH1111 2003 11 27 EFGH1112 2003 11 27 EFGH1113 2003 11 27 F P z 5 ABCD3331 2003 11 29 ABCD3332 2003 11 29 ABCD3333 2003 11 29 1 2 6 7 8 3 EJES 5 Enter the desired image name up to 8 characters from the touch screen keypad The date when you made this entry will be stored automatically To correct an entry touch 1 CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character then enter the correct image name 6 If the image name is correct touch OK The Basic Screen to store the overlaying image will be displayed If the popup menu with YES and NO keys is displayed instead of the Basic Screen the entered name is duplicated Touch YES to enter a new name
342. rated Confirm that the radio button heading Save this file to disk is marked in the File Download dialog box then click on OK In the dialog box designate the folder for saving the machine setting file then click on Save Filo cdt Wiem Favores Toole Help Flo cdt view Fovortes Tools Hel Ena gt OA A Qah Gree J SD g Hoek 7 Odd Ox wnes Guede B E B 4 fdress E rtp 10 11 30 201fooforn oarantras Adress E Ftto 110 11 32 201 ofon nhm Setting data Import Export Setting data Import Export Import Import File Downioad x axi Youtransmit a fle and can register ostirg Youtransmit a fle and can register senting Tpush import button a setting file will be push inport button a setig le will be p omaiLtet p Impor u Pel txt Export Export You can save setting data in dle You can save setting data in file Please choose a data type to save and pu Please chocse a data type to save and pu EKC data TAB separated EKC data TAB seperated e lename fic reel ae eit EEEE Fedw fae d Cree Environment Setup mena Environment Setup meru Main Page Main Page 11 36 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Transmitting Editing Machine Setting File Environment Setup continued NOTE The file name is automatically assigned as described below Select the data to be exported changing the name
343. ray conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper Stacker conveyance lever opens to remove mishandled paper Lower lever opens to remove mishandled paper Stacker unit knob can be turned to ease removal of mishandled paper from the Stacker unit Stacker unit folds or staples amp folds copies into booklet styled sets and also folds max 3 copies in three Trash basket holds waste paper punched out Cartridge housing holds staple cartridge and is to be replaced when supplying staples 3 9 Machine Information Machine Configuration continued Optional Equipment continued 4 Secondary Sub tray cover 3 Secondary 1 Finisher door Sub tray eeFr 2 Primary Main tray a aa FN 115 Finisher 1 Finisher door opens to the internal Finisher to allow clearing mishandled paper and replenishing staples 2 Primary Main tray holds sets output in Non sort mode Sort mode offset Staple sort mode or Group mode offset 3 Secondary Sub tray holds sets output in Non sort mode or Group mode with face down up mode 4 Secondary Sub tray cover opens to allow clearing mishandled paper 3 10 Machine Information Machine Configuration continued Optional Equipment continued 5 Upper lever 7 Upper knob SS ey Right lever f ROY 10 Stacker unit handle SAS lt 8 Left lever L oN 9 Stacker unit 11 Cartridge housing 10 Stacker unit handle
344. re mode 8 Press Start The copier starts the printing job 6 37 Basic Operations Interrupt Mode Use the Interrupt mode to interrupt copying in progress to perform a simple job When interrupt copying is completed the settings for the initial job restore automatically and the Basic Screen displays Press the Interrupt key when the copier is in the following conditions e Continuously printing data stored using Store mode e Scanning the originals using Store mode e Scanning the originals using Store mode while printing in Reserve mode If desired Key Operator can change the timing to stop current machine operation for interrupt copying Note that the compatible copying conditions vary according to the timing selected See p 13 41 p 13 48 O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Reserve O Incompatible Special Originals None O Incompatible Applications Storing image in Overlay Memory Control Panel Basic Screen Help Align original on ED le 0 Program Memory STATUS OUTPUT copy MODE COPYDENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION i Sees Mode Check 1 To stop the current copying job press Interrupt For particular jobs in progress copying will cease only after certain phases of the immediate operation are completed as indicated by LED conditions described below e Collectively printing dat
345. re removed from the primary main tray of FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 FN 122 Finisher the tray goes up automatically To avoid injury DO NOT put your hand on the top of the printed sheets Be sure to hold both sides of the printed sheets when removing them and DO NOT leave your hand onto the printed sheets while the primary tray goes up O SHIFT TRAY PAPER CAPACITY To prevent paper misfeed do not exceed the paper capacity of the shift tray OT 104 Shift Tray paper weight 16 Ib 24 Ib Paper capacities below are stated for 20 Ib bond or the same size This tray also accepts wide types of the regular sizes stated below 100 sheets 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R 5000 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 1 250 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 2 19 Safety Information Finisher Capacity Requirements continued O SHIFT TRAY AND PAPER EXIT OUTLET e The shift tray moves to and fro while printing Do not put your hand in between the tray and tray supporting part otherwise you may be injured Do not put your hand in the paper exit outlet while the tray is moving otherwise you may be injured 2 20 Section 3 Machine Information Machine Configuration 3 2 Site Requirements 3 15 Control Panel Layout 3 18 Touch Screen 3 20 Initial Settings 3 21 Panel Reset Mode 3 21 Automatic Paper Selection APS 3 21 Automatic Magnification Selection AMS 3 21 Automatic Exposure Sel
346. reen 5 Select additional copying features as desired 6 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 7 AMS is automatically selected When selecting any tray other than the one that is set and displayed on the Basic Screen touch the desired tray key 8 Enter the desired print quantity 9 Place original s FACE UP in the EDH When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 10 Press Start After copying is completed touch Combination on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 11 Applications Booklet Use the Booklet mode to make a multiple page signature booklet on both sides of paper from any tray unless it is specified as Thick or Tab Paper paper type in the Key Operator mode Original images are scanned into memory and automatically arranged in booklet format in correct order o o o g g Application Selection Screen n adi Chapter Image Insert Efe Allimage Lat binding Booklet Scan and store original into memory then print all the pages collectively Original pages should be a multiple of 4 in 1 1 mode or a multiple of 2 in 2 2 mode otherwise blank pages will be automatically inserted to compensate AMS is automaticall
347. replenishment will not be stapled 7 Insert the cartridge housing then push down in to secure it in place 8 Return the stacker unit to its original position 9 Close the Finisher door 14 11 Maintenance amp Supplies Empty Trash Basket of PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch Kit When the trash basket becomes full Trash basket of Punch kit is full Please empty trash basket message displays on the touch screen Follow the procedure below to empty the trash basket PK 2 1 Open the Finisher door and withdraw the trash basket 2 Empty the trash basket 3 Return the trash basket to its original position then close the Finisher door securely 14 12 Maintenance amp Supplies Empty Trash Basket of ZK 3 Z Fold Kit When the trash basket becomes full Trash basket of Z Fold kit is full Please empty trash basket message displays on the touch screen Follow the procedure below to empty the trash basket 1 Open the Z Fold Kit front door with the Finisher door and withdraw the trash basket 2 Empty the trash basket 3 Return the trash basket to its original position then close the Z Fold Kit front door securely 14 13 Maintenance amp Supplies Preventive Maintenance After a set number of copies have been made on your copier Preventive Maintenance PM
348. return to the Select Size popup menu Touch Lead edge or Rear edge to select the image starting position 4 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 6 26 Basic Operations Binding Mode When copying in 1 2 or 2 2 mode specify the binding mode on the Output Mode popup menu to obtain the desired copy result Right amp Left binding Normal duplex copies Up binding Duplex copies arranged upside down on the reverse side Binding mode Copies RIGHT SLEFT a BINDING Bome gt Output Mode popup menu without Finisher Output Mode popup menu with Finisher ERRA Q 0 GD G 0 4 BINDING OUTPUT MODE HDD BINDING APLE OUTPUT lt MAIN IRAY gt HDD OUTPUT STORE OUTPUT Richt e coven STORE TANDEM aae Group S SHEET TANDEM gt croup raceup E 7 m RECALL sons L 7 sont 3 Ponc E RECALL pe Y STANDARD SUT
349. riginals of the reserve job will clear the settings selected for reserve job 2 When Mode Check is pressed during Interrupt Copying the information displayed reflects the initial copy job settings Check mode will not display Interrupt copy job information 6 39 Basic Operations Rotation This function allows you to utilize APS or AMS and copy the original size documents described below onto size 8 5 x11 or 5 5 x8 5 irrespective of the copy paper feeding direction By default Rotation requires APS or AMS to function however the Key Operator may set the function to always function or when APS AMS or reduce functions See p 13 41 to p 13 48 O Rotation copying uses memory O Copy size 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 R landscape type feeding only O Original size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions V H zoom Rotation Sort Rotation Group Tandem mode g g Incompatible Special Originals None Incompatible Applications Book Copy Non Image Area Erase Repeat except 2 4 8 Repeat AUTO Layout Storing image in Overlay Memory Rotation and APS In APS the copier automatically copies onto the same paper size as the original s in 1 1 For example when size 8 5 x11 copy paper is loaded in the tray in landscape orientation and the copier detects that the original is placed in portrait orientation Rotation and APS function together to rotate
350. rlaying image Recall overlaying image Output rn ABCD i a ABCD 3 5 Output 3 34 Recalled image Overlay originals Copies in Overlay Memory mode To Store Overlaying Image Data in HDD The following procedure describes how to store overlaying image data in HDD g g g g g Use the platen glass only Copy mode 1 1 mode only Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Using EDH 1 2 2 2 2 1 AMS Rotaion Reserve Mode Interrupt Mode Selecting Output Mode Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Z Folded Original Tab Paper Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Non Image Area Erase Reverse Image Repeat AUTO Layout Image Shift Stamp Overlay 9 46 Applications Overlay Memory continued To Store Overlaying Image Data in HDD continued Application Selection Screen Stamp Overlay Selection Screen ect desired STAMP OVERLA a 800K P apress O MARK JJ Application LStemp Overlay STAMP WATERMARK OVERLAY JOB 01 FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT GENT i PAGE SI Amage NUMBERING WATERMARK Ra OVERLAY HE 5 o T 7 SET WATERMARK OYERLAY NUMBERING PRIETENE NUMBERING MEMORY F
351. roup month NAME ADDRESS KANA DAILY USE abcdefg xxyyzz email co jp abcdefg Akita Akita Akita alpha a a alpha 1 Aomori Aomori Aomori April April April 1 1 Augest Augest Augest 1 1 baby baby baby beta b b beta 1 Dedouja Dedouja Dedouja Februaray Februaray Februaray 1 GameGoy GameGoy GameGoy gamma c c gamma 1 HDD data setting file e Begin the file name with IP_HDD e Max 48 files can be edited e A line should include ENTRY NAME and BOX NUMBER being separated by a tab e ENTRY NAME should be 18 bytes or less e Use up to 4 digits numbers 0 9 only to specify a BOX NUMBER FTP data setting file e Begin the file name with IP_FTP e Max 48 files can be edited e A line should include PROFILE NAME HOST ADDRESS FILE PATH LOGIN and PASSWORD being separated by a tab PROFILE NAME should be 18 bytes or less HOST ADDRESS should be 63 bytes or less FILE PATH should be 96 bytes or less LOGIN should be 47 bytes or less PASSWORD should be 31 bytes or less 11 39 Section 12 Tandem Mode Tandem Mode Operation 12 2 To Stop Scanning Printing 12 5 Troubleshooting 12 6 Tandem Mode Tandem Mode Operation Tandem mode enables your Di5510 Di7210 primary master copier to work in tandem with the Di5510 Di7210 secondary sub copier for the purpose of providing faster completion of large copying jobs Two units working in tandem distribute a job in half the time of non tandem mode NO
352. rrent status of transmission When the data transmission is completed the Basic Screen will be displayed reflecting the settings made for that job 2 Enter the desired print quantity then press Start to print Check Screen Selecting PROOF OUTPUT CHECK MODE BASIC amp SPECIAL ORIG 7 f R CE EE 10 Exit Tray Main tray 1 Touch OK The Basic Screen is Duplex Mode 1 1 EDH ENAERE Photo Mode restored and the data is transmitted TETES a BEE Z Folded Original 7 A bs Mode 1 000 Hest STD size When the data transmission is s completed the Mode Check Screen mien will be displayed after a set of sample A e Law copy is output 2 Check the sample copy then change the copy conditions if required Enter the desired print quantity then press Start to print Recall Job Selection Screen popup menu displayed Selecting AUTO OUTPUT elect job to be recalled 1 Touch OK The popup menu to enter WEDA 2003 10 08 the print quantity will be displayed x 2 Enter the desired print quantity then OK touch OK The Image Data Recalling Screen will be displayed to show the current status of transmission When the
353. rt 6 6 Basic Operations Copy Mode Copy Mode Specifications Incompatible functions 1 1 Folding or Stapling amp Folding with Booklet Chapter Booklet 1 2 Transparency interleave 2 1 Folding or Stapling amp Folding with Booklet Chapter Booklet Repeat AUTO layout Non image area erase Server function 2 2 Chapter Repeat Transparency interleave Non image area erase Server function EDH capacity 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 100 sheets copying can be resumed after removing paper from bins EDH original size requirements 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 A4R 8 27 x11 69 210 mm x 297 mm Copy paper weight requirements 20 Ib 24 Ib 14 lb 19 Ib should be tested before it is used Copy paper size requirements 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R 5 5 x8 5 paper is available in landscape type feeding only Sort mode paper size machine with FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 FN 122 Finisher or OT 104 Shift Tray 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R A4R 8 27 x1 1 69 210 mm x 297 mm Staple Sort mode paper size machine with FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 FN 122 Finisher 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 A4R 8 27 x11 69 210mm x 297mm Folding or Stapling amp Folding mode paper size machine with FN 10 Finisher 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R A4R 8 27 x11 69 210 mm x 297 mm Cover Inserter paper
354. rtion locations touching SET after each entry e When a page number is larger than the total original count a sheet is inserted as the last page e Insertions occur in sequence even if page numbers are entered out of sequence e To clear an incorrect entry touch DELETE or C clear then enter the correct page number e When setting more than 15 locations touch the arrow key to move to the next page Option Touch Booklet on the Image Insertion No Setting Screen to use this function 5 When all page number entries are made touch OK The Application Selection Screen will be restored Select additional copying features as desired 6 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen The Store mode is automatically selected 7 Enter the desired print quantity 8 Scan the EDH images 1 Position originals FACE UP in the EDH 2 Press Start to scan originals 9 Scan the platen glass images 1 Open the EDH 2 Position an original FACE DOWN on the platen glass then close the EDH IMPORTANT PLACE AND SCAN THE ORIGINALS ACCORDING TO PAGINATION 3 Press Start to scan the original 4 Remove the original and repeat for each original Be sure to press Start for each original Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired then EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 10 Start printing 1 Touch STORE to deselect it 2 Press Start After copying is complete
355. ry List The registered group names and members will be displayed in a list Click on Reset to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window To change the registered content in a group Click on Group Entry List to display the list then click on a group name to be changed Group Sening PESE Gipha Nagata PlayStation this Tumama The Group Setting window of the selected group will be displayed Change the contents as desired then click on Registration The registered content will be displayed Click on Back to return to the Scan Transmission Setting window To delete a group Click on Group Entry List to display the list then click on a check box heading the group name to be deleted Click on Delete The Group Delete confirmation window will be displayed Check the group name to be deleted then aes Ges Ba GO Sl H ee click on Yes To cancel the procedure click on No In either case the Group Entry List window will be restored 11 34 Network Function Environment Setup Mode continued Transmitting Editing Machine Setting File Environment Setup Follow the procedure below to transmit the following setting file from the machine to a PC export using the web browser edit the setting data on the PC then return the file to the machine import e E C M data max 1 000 files e Three Scan Transmission Setting data E mail data max
356. s e AES Automatic Exposure Selection Automatically adjusts exposure to compensate for quality of the original e AMS Automatic Magnification Selection Automatically selects an appropriate magnification ratio when Copy Size is selected manually Automatically selected when AMS key is touched e APS Automatic Paper Selection Automatically selects copy paper size to match the original documents e ATS Automatic Tray Switching Automatically switches trays to allow copying to continue without interruption if the selected tray empties while copying is in progress e Auto Layout The original image on the platen glass or in the EDH is copied and centered on a sheet e Auto Low Power Automatically lowers the power after a specified period of copier inactivity e Auto Shut Off Automatically shuts off the main power after a specified period of copier inactivity e Book Copy Copies both pages of an open book or book size sheet separately onto two letter sheets in 1 1 mode or separately onto each side of one letter sheet in 1 2 mode You can use the Book Copy mode with the Front or Front Back cover mode The cover page s will be scanned and copied normally before image division is performed on the other pages e Booklet Creates letter R or ledger size booklets from letter size originals in 1 2 or 2 2 copy mode e Chapter Starts chapter pages on the right side front pages of the finished document Only duplex mode 1 2 is compat
357. s not available 1 Sort exit 2 Staple sort exit 3 Non sort exit 4 Group exit Stapler Finisher FN 10 This finisher is equipped with three exit trays and a cover inserter E option Secondary sub tray Four output types can be specified on the Output Mode popup menu 1 Face down non sort exit 2 Face up non sort exit 3 Face down group exit 4 Face up group exit Primary main tray Four output types can be specified by STAPLE SORT and SORT keys on the Basic Screen and by the setting on the Output Mode popup menu Face up exit is not available 1 Sort exit 2 Staple sort exit 3 Non sort exit 4 Group exit 1 13 Introduction Copier Features continued Optional Equipment continued Stapler Finisher FN 10 continued Booklet tray Stapled and folded or simply folded booklets are to be delivered onto this tray These two finishing modes can be specified on the Output Mode popup menu Shift Tray OT 104 Three output types can be specified by SORT key on the Basic Screen and by the setting on the Output Mode popup menu 1 Sort exit 2 Non sort exit 3 Group exit Punch Kit PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Used when selecting PUNCH on the Output Mode popup menu Z Fold Kit ZK 3 Used when selecting PUNCH or Z FOLD on the Output Mode popup menu Cover Inserter E Used when selecting COVER SHEET on the Output Mode popup menu or when stapling copies manually Large Capacity Cassette C 403
358. se contact your service representative Keep this manual permanently located with the machine so that this safety information is readily available Machine safety labels are attached to the internal area of the machine The purpose of safety labels is to alert you of imminent or potentially hazardous situations or conditions Be sure to heed all safety label information If the safety labels become illegible due to soilage etc please contact your service representative for information about label replacements Sample safety labels are shown on the following page TO AVOID GETTING BURNED do not touch any part of the machine that you are advised not to touch by a warning or caution label DO NOT REMOVE WARNING OR CAUTION LABELS Clean labels as needed to maintain legibility If any warning or caution label is removed or becomes illegible from soilage please contact your service representative for information about label replacements The following standard safety categories are commonly used on product labelling DANGER Danger indicates an imminent hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury Note The DANGER category is not required for this product and is only included here for general user information A WARNING Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury A CAUTION Caution indicates a potentially hazardous
359. se contrast QRSTU QRSTU QRSTU mode VWXYZ VWXYZ VWXYZ Original Auto mode Text mode 1 Touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL on the Basic Screen to display the Special Original popup menu 2 Touch Text Photo or Increase Contrast as required 3 Touch OK to return to the Basic Screen NOTE To cancel the change before returning to the Basic Screen touch CANCEL To recall the standard setting of the Special Originals touch RECALL STANDARD 4 Select additional copying features as desired 5 Enter print quantity 6 Position original s FACE UP in the EDH or FACE DOWN on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make the Proof copy if desired then touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 7 Press Start After copying is completed press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 8 5 Special Original Special Original Mixed Original Use the Mixed original mode with the EDH or with Store mode to copy ledger 11 x17 legal 8 5 x14 letter 8 5 x11 and 5 5 x8 5 or legal 8 5 x14 letter R 8 5 x11 R and 8 5 x11 and 5 5 x8 5 originals Each original in the mixed set will be copied to paper of the same size APS mode or to paper of desired size with appropriate ratio automatically selected AMS mode O Use EDH g Platen store mode is available O Origin
360. seaes 13 41 Machine Management List Print 14 ecccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeaeeeeeeees 13 49 Call Remote Center 15 cccccccccssssecesecsseeeeeessaeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesssesaeeeesssseeeeesseeas 13 50 Side 2 Lens Adjustment 16 cccccccccssssceeessssseeeeeeseneeeeeseceeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeesesseeeees 13 51 Finisher Adjustment 17 ccccccceceeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseccceaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeesseccecneeeeeeeeeeseess 13 52 HDD Management Setting 18 c cccesceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeseaaeeseaeeseaeeeseeeeseeeess 13 54 Scan Transmission Setting 19 ccccccecssssccceeeseseeeeeseneeeeeeessneeeeeseeneaeeessceneeesessenaaees 13 56 Non Image Area Erase Setting 20 c ccccscceseseeeceeeeeeneeeeeeaeeseeaeeseaeeseeaeeseeeeseneees 13 58 Background Adjustment 21 00 0 ceeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeseaaeeeeeteaeeeeeesaaeeeeenaa 13 59 Timing Adjustment 22 snn aeia E E E E A AEEA 13 60 Centering Adjustment 23 cececeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeeeseeeesseaeeneaes 13 62 Key Operator ECM Form cesccceseesseceseeceeeceececeeeseaeeesneseaeeeseesaeeesneesaeessaeseanersnetsgs 13 64 Section 14 Maintenance amp Supplies Loading Papel sacaos heel ete ni ee aed ed ane eee a ee 14 2 Paper Indicator IuJHEIE oo eeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeesaees 14 2 Paper Empty Indicator or LL
361. selected automatically When selecting any tray other than the tray that is set and displayed on the Basic Screen touch the desired tray key To release AMS select the desired magnification then select copy size 10 If the copier is equipped with FN 10 Finisher Folding Stapling amp Folding output mode is available Follow the procedure below 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu then touch MAIN TRAY to highlight it 2 Touch STAPLING amp FOLDING or FOLDING as desired NOTE Selecting FOLDING or STAPLING amp FOLDING will automatically switch the output tray to Booklet tray Notice that the arrow pointing to the MAIN TRAY shifts to the Booklet tray Output Mode popup menu ode Ae 0 on 0 2 BI OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt HDD STORE OUTPUT z maler COYER BINDING QE IREEs SHEET TANDEM B4 BINDING 2 sont J runen RECALL 4 a STANDARD BARE H STAPLING AZ A ao CANCEL J a THREE a roime OI Stoic ok
362. setting to display the User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen 3 Touch the USERSET you want to change then enter a ratio from 0 250 4 000 using the keypad If a ratio under 0 250 is entered 0 250 will be displayed If a ratio over 4 000 is entered 4 000 will be displayed 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the User Setting Mode Menu Screen 5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 6 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 15 Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 This function can only be accessed by the Key Operator after an 8 digit ECM master key code is entered The Electronic Copy Monitor allows you to monitor all copying activity by controlling ECM password accounts This feature can track copier usage for individual users and or accounts as well as limit copier access to only authorized users Copy quantity limits for specific accounts can also be set Use the ECM Key Operator Form provided at the end of this section to record ECM password information The ECM stores up to 1 000 ECM passwords each of which represents a separate account that can be used for billing and record keeping The number of users assigned to each account may depend upon the billing system in operation and the number of individuals and departments using the copier When the ECM is activated copying can be performed only after a valid ECM password is entered Co
363. shown in this section Initially i e at installation the Basic Screen displays the following condition to meet Energy Star requirements Initial Setting Copy Mode 1 1 Copy Density AES Lens Mode 1 1 Copy Size APS Output Mode offset sort When Initial settings are changed by the Key Operator the new initial settings display when the copier is powered on when Panel Reset timer is reached or when Panel Reset key is pressed The following initial settings can be changed by the Key Operator Copy Mode EDH 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 Copy Density AES manual Lens Mode AMS ratio 0 250 4 000 Copy Size APS trays 1 2 3 4 or LCC Output Mode Non sort Sort Group Staple sort Stapling amp Folding Folding Punch Three folding cover sheet Special Original Original Direction Duplex Binding Text Photo Enhance Special Original Original Form Rotation OFF Setting procedures are described on the following pages NOTE The most commonly used settings are established at installation Before changing any of the copier settings be sure that you understand the overall and long range effect of the change 13 11 Key Operator Mode Copier Initial Setting 2 continued Key Operator Mode Screen Copier Initial Setting Screen ey operator mode me Copier initial setting OUTPUT copy MODE COPYDENSITY LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION ect one of fo System initial setting
364. situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate bodily injury NOTICE Notice provides information on the correct handling or use of the machine to prevent breakage of the copier or some machine part etc It does not indicate concern for personal safety 2 2 Safety Information Machine Labels Label Locati ons A CAUTION A CAUTION A DO NOT INSERT your finger into the two EDH h portions otherwise you may be injured ATTENTION A CUIDADO inge IA WARNING This area generates high voltage If touched electrical shock may occur DO NOT TOUCH 74 A CAUTION amp ATTENTION 4 PRECAUCION amp CUIDADO di Temp rature lev e A PRECAUCION A CUIDADO Alta temperatura Nao toque Ald A CAUTION The fixing unit is very hot To avoid SPETS getting burned DO NOT TOUCH A CAUTION A ATTENTION My a precaucion me A CUIDADO A CAUTION The conveyance fixing unit is heavy Use care and draw it out gently otherwise you may be injured A CAUTION DO NOT put your hand between the main body a
365. ssword will be transmitted to the secondary copier O Interrupt copying is available only on the copier with Interrupt pressed O If the primary copier is installed with HDD the image data stored in HDD can be output in tandem mode copying O Corresponding tray sizes on the primary and secondary copiers should be the same when using multiple trays for a single job O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Rotation Sort Rotation Group Group Rotation O Incompatible Special Originals None O Incompatible Applications Transparency Interleave SET NUMBERING and WATERMARK NUMBERING in Stamp Output Mode popup menu cae He i OUTPUT lt MAIN TRAY gt mT EXIT TRAY BINDING HDD OUTPUT RIGHT x COYER A sup pute L sRoup 7 SHEET TANDEM 7A TAY AIA BINDING ie ESAE SE ees e SENNIE PLI E c 4 STAPLII GE Z FOLDING Lar ane al 1 ed around 44 lt gt CA
366. sure toner in storage is out of the reach of children or anyone incapable of using supplies safely Although toner is nontoxic do not inhale toner or allow it to come in contact with eyes If inhalation or eye contact occurs immediately consult a physician Please refer to the appropriate material safety data sheet for additional toner safety information O PAPER Check paper to be sure it is according to the specifications outlined in Section 4 Do not use stapled paper or paper that conducts electricity silver carbon etc otherwise an accident may occur as a result of fire To avoid machine trouble do not use heat sensitive paper colored transparency or paper specifically designed for ink jet printers such as photo paper O CLEANING MATERIALS Check the type of cleaning material used on your machine to be sure it is recommended by Konica If necessary check with your service representative Never use cleaning materials for purposes other than cleaning and be sure to keep all cleaning materials out of the reach of children or anyone who is incapable of using them safely O ENERGY SAVER Use Energy Saver mode for short periods of machine inactivity When not using the machine for long periods of time turn power off unless the weekly timer function is operating O DISPOSAL OF THE COPIER Dispose of this copier according to your local regulations 2 11 Safety Information Regulations FCC Regulations WARNING
367. sword is not valid check with your service representative 2 Touch 4 E C M function setting The ECM Master Key Code Screen displays if a code is required 3 Use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 8 digit ECM master key code then touch OK to display the ECM Setting Menu Screen See note 2 4 Select the desired ECM function and make settings as required To exit the ECM mode touch RETURN on ECM Setting Menu Screen 5 Touch RETURN on the Key Operator Mode Screen to return to the Basic Screen NOTES 1 If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid ECM master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 8 digit code The ECM master key code can be set to less than 8 digits by the Memory switch setting of the Key Operator function 13 17 Key Operator Mode ECM Electronic Copy Monitor Function Setting 4 continued E C M Data Edit 1 Use this setting to display the list of copy count and copy limit for each account to change add or delete the ECM data and to reset the copy count of the individual account O ECM No Designated by Key Operator O ECM Password Unique 8 digit numeric code programmed by Key Operator for user O User Name Max 8 characters O Copy Limit 0 to 999 999 copies ECM Setting Menu Screen ECM Data Edit Screen NO NAME COPY PRINTER COUNT DUPLEX TOTAL 000000 000000 000000 SCANNER 1 E C M data edit LIMIT
368. t List Print Menu Screen 3 Touch the desired item on the screen The Basic Screen will resume automatically 4 Press Start to start printing the selected list To suspend printing press Stop Press Utility and C in order to return to the Management List Print Menu Screen 5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 6 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 49 Key Operator Mode Call Remote Center 15 When activated the Remote Diagnostics option is automatically monitored by your service representative In case of machine trouble select the Call Remote Center option Your service representative will contact you to determine the appropriate means for resolving the problem O Setting options Call for JAM concerns Call for SC concerns Toner bottle supply call Paper supply call Call for image quality Call for others Key Operator Mode Screen 2 Call Remote Service Center Screen Select one of following items 1 Call for service center ollowing ite Tray auto select setting Side 2 lens adjustment Energy saver setting Finisher adjustment Memory switch setting HDD management setting 2 Call for Totaling center Machine management list print Scan transmission setting Call remote center 20 Non image area erase setting yj t RETURN RETURN Start Call Screen Call for JAM concerns RETURN 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then t
369. t for removal of mishandled paper Drum unit forms the copy image Fixing unit fuses the toner onto the copy paper Total counter indicates the total number of copies and prints made 3 5 Machine Information Machine Configuration continued Optional Equipment PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2HOLES Punch kit Cover inserter E LJ See the User Manual for Finisher FN 122 for details Pi7200e Printer controller OT 104 FN 122 Finisher M64 1 M128 1 O M256 1 M512 1 Memory unit oO FN 121 Finisher HDD 2 Hard disk drive a t c Work table ee ee ee ee a Key counter E m Q oO oO FN 10 Finisher Di5510 Di7210 main body y TE C 403 Large 4 capacity cassette SY y Va C 404 Large 3 2 ZK 3 Z Fold kit capacity cassette FN 115 Finisher 3 6 Machine Information Machine Configuration continued Optional Equipment continued 2
370. t handle 3 Pull up the cartridge housing then remove it while sliding it along the stapler rail 4 Remove the empty cartridge from the cartridge housing 5 Insert the new cartridge into the housing then remove the lock tape from the cartridge NOTE Do not remove the staples remaining inside the housing otherwise the first sheet output after the replenishment will not be stapled 6 Insert the cartridge housing while sliding it along the stapler rail then push down in to secure it in place 7 Return the stacker unit to its original position 8 Close the Finisher door 14 10 Maintenance amp Supplies Inserting a New Staple Cartridge into FN 115 Finisher Use only the staples supplied by us Contact your service representative to reorder 1 Open the Finisher door 2 Pull out the stacker unit by holding the stacker unit handle 3 Pull up the cartridge housing then remove it while pulling it forward 4 Open the bottom of the cartridge housing while pressing two locks on both sides then remove the empty cartridge from the cartridge housing 5 Firmly insert the new cartridge into the housing while the arrow indication on the cartridge appears as shown below 6 Remove the lock tape from the cartridge then close the bottom of the housing NOTE Do not remove the staples remaining inside the housing otherwise the first sheet output after the
371. t it if highlighted 2 Enter the desired print quantity 3 Position original s in the EDH or on the platen glass and make copying selections as required 4 Press Start to begin copying in Non sort mode Copies will exit face down with the page heading toward the front of the copier A CAUTION When the selected print quantity exceeds the Finisher s maximum capacity remove the printed sheets while paper is exiting to avoid paper mishandling 7 4 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine with Finisher continued Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray Use this mode when you want to output multiple copies of the original set and have each sorted set offset upon exit The staple mode can be selected with the sort mode With the Primary main tray initially selected on the Output Mode popup menu FN 121 FN 10 FN 115 outputs the printed sheets FACE DOWN in the proper order O Paper size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R 5 5 x8 5 5 5 x8 5 R O Paper capacity for 20 Ib 500 sheets 5 5 x8 5 3 000 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R FN 121 FN 115 2 500 sheets 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R FN 10 1 500 sheets 11 x17 8 5 x14 Basic Screen OUTPUT 3 L 30mm 1 Touch SORT on the Basic Screen to highlight it 2 Enter the desired print quantity 3 Position originals in the EDH and make copying selections as required When using Store mode see p
372. t items x change function NO ITEM SETTING CONTENTS 1 Panel reset timer onds 2 AUTO RESET key function Full auto A 3 EDH Onginal effect EDH selected 4 Job memory auto recall 30 OFF 5 Finisher mode by Full auto Sort 6 Initial by Key counter insert ON 7 Erasure outside area of orig Area outside of orig erased Change Setting Contents RETURN 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password To display menus 11 to 20 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch the Lower arrow key 2 Touch 13 Memory switch setting to display the Memory Switch Setting Screen 3 Use the procedure below to select the desired item and change the setting 1 To select the desired item touch the arrow keys A and at the right of the Memory Switch Setting Screen 2 To scroll touch the arrow keys at the lower left of the screen 3 Touch Change Setting Contents to change the setting of the highlighted item 4 Repeat above steps 1 to 3 to make several changes in succession 4 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 5 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations T
373. ters only numbers and four symbols and Any other symbols will be rejected with an error message displayed in the window e Max 1 000 E C M entries can be registered An error message will be displayed if the above limit is exceeded e An error message may be displayed when the data entry has not been completed due to the machine operation in progress Please click on Apply while the machine is in an idle state The registered content will be Ba Se as ortos Te TA EEI rates Brede GIE A T displayed in the window Eeee The new E C M data will be transmitted to the machine immediately so that is valid for the user operations Click on Back to return to the E C M Function Setting menu window or any menu item to jump to the desired window 5 Edit the E C M data Click on E K C data list in the E C M Function Setting menu window see p 11 29 or from the menu in any subsequent window The E C M Data List window will be displayed NOTE The Another user count in the list indicates the count accumulated for the jobs performed by non registered users This data cannot be edited other than resetting the counter E C M Data List Window Enke gt O A A seah Favores Grn D 30 a 7 Moss ETEA 32201 cton ketur enhn P ieii z ea EKC data list Sava this table as a fle econo foocooo cana nooo 1995999 aocoo
374. the Key Operator Mode Screen displays without the password requirement 3 If the Key Operator Password Entry Screen is displayed use the keypad on the touch screen to enter your 4 digit key operator password Touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note If the Key Operator password is not valid check with your service representative 4 To display menus 11 to 23 of the Key Operator Mode Screen touch the lower arrow key To return the previous screen touch the upper arrow key 5 Make setting changes from the Key Operator Mode Screen as described on the following pages NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password Key Operator Mode System Initial Setting 1 Set the following initial conditions of the copier e Date amp Time setting Current date and time Summer time Time difference e Language select setting Language used in LCD English e IP address setting IP address to be accessed from PC e E mail transmission setting E mail address to be informed of machine trouble or request for supplies Date amp Time Setting 1 Set the current date and time the summer time and also the time difference O Default setting Summer time off System Initial Setting Menu Screen Date amp Time Setting Screen Date amp Time setting Present time Language select setting 09 07 03 16 08 Setting time i 2 3 IP address setting 4 E Mail transmission
375. the popup menu fades automatically and then the selected ratio will be displayed on the Basic Screen To cancel the setting touch RE again then select the desired ratio 3 Position original s FACE DOWN on the platen glass or FACE UP in the EDH as required 4 When all settings are acceptable press Start 6 20 Basic Operations Lens Mode continued Zoom Mode Use the Zoom mode to reduce or enlarge the copied original image in 0 001 0 1 increments O Zoom range 0 250 4 000 Basic Screen with the popup menu for zoom setting gn original o D E O O STATUS FREE Jog01 OUTPUT ZOOM 0 250 4 000 LENS MODE COPY SIZE FUNCTION EE iii SPECIAL STORE Yerti 1 Touch ZOOM on the Basic Screen to display the popup menu for setting the zoom ratio 2 Use the keypad on the popup menu to enter a 3 digit zoom ratio or use arrows to scroll to the desired ratio 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Scree
376. then outputs sorted sets normally e Rotation sort mode rotates every other sorted set by 90 upon exit provided the same paper size is loaded in two trays one tray with paper loaded in portrait orientation and the other tray with paper loaded in landscape orientation e Group mode copies each original page in amounts determined by the print quantity setting then outputs grouped sets normally Rotation group mode rotates every other grouped set by 90 upon exit provided the same paper size is loaded in two trays one tray with paper loaded in portrait orientation and the other tray with paper loaded in landscape orientation e g 8 5 x11 and 8 5 x11 R Output Mode popup menu 0 0 Ae BINDING OUTPUT MODE HDD STORE TANDEM OUTPUT croup Z raceup E RECALL STANDARD ROTATION kE CANCEL OK To Set Face Down Non Sort Exit 1 Confirm that the OUTPUT APPLI key is not highlighted If OUTPUT APPLI is highlighted touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Output Mode popup menu Select to highlight FACE DOWN and deselect all the other keys then touch OK 2 Confirm that the SORT key is not highlighted If SORT is highlighted touch SORT to deselect it 7 31 Output Modes O
377. this case copy conditions selected for the current job will be cleared To continue the job using the same user password change the copy limit of the password or clear the copy count Touch After job to stop the machine after the current job is completed when copy limit is reached Touch Warning only to display a warning message when copy limit is reached The selected key will be highlighted 7 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the ECM Setting Menu Screen If other ECM setting changes are required touch the desired key from 1 3 8 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 9 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations N ow NOTES 1 If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid ECM master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 8 digit code 13 23 Key Operator Mode Lock Delete Program Memory 5 Use this function to lock unlock or delete a Job that has been programmed A locked Job is indicated by a lock icon g on the Lock Delete Program Memory Screen The settings of a locked Job cannot be changed O Setting options Lock Program memory Unlock Program memory Delete Program memory Lock delete is available for all 30 stored jobs O A blank key indicates that no Job is programmed ook ok kok ok 2k kkk kkk indicates that a Job is programmed but unnamed Key Operator Mode Screen Lock Delete Program Memory Screen
378. tically determine the magnification ratio according to the shift amount specified for the front page The shift amount and magnification ratio determined for the front page will be automatically applied to the back page 3 Touch BACK and make direction and amount change if any positioning adjustment is required With BACK selected the magnification ratio will not be changed while the direction and amount can be altered 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Application Selection Screen 6 Select additional Application functions or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 7 Enter the desired print quantity 8 Position original s FACE UP in EDH or FACE DOWN on platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 9 Press Start After copying is completed touch Image Shift on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 38 Applications Stamp Stamp allows you to print regular stamps numbering page numbering date and time watermark and watermark numbering onto the output copies These 6 types of stamps can be used individually or in multiple combinations e STAMP prints the letters selected from 8 options onto the scanned image at the location designat
379. ting 5 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen If other Weekly Timer setting changes are required select the desired menu item from 1 5 6 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 7 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations NOTES 1 If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 If an invalid Weekly Timer master key code is entered continue by entering the valid 4 digit code 13 36 Key Operator Mode Weekly Timer 9 continued Timer Interrupt Password Setting 5 Use this password setting mode to establish a 4 digit password requirement for using Timer Interrupt function The default password of 0000 allows the timer function to be interrupted without the requirement for password entry Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen Timer Interrupt Password Setting Screen Weekly timer ON OFF setting Timer setting Timer interrupt password setting 4 digit Timer action ON OFF setting 3636 Lunch hour off setting Timer interrupt password set RETURN CANCEL OK 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen See note 1 2 Touch 9 Weekly timer Enter your 4 digit Weekly Timer master key code then touch OK to display the Weekly Timer Setting Menu Screen See n
380. tinued To Reduce and Shift Copy Image Use Reduce amp Shift mode instead of regular Image shift to prevent image loss when creating a binding margin O aan Basic copying conditions Change magnification V H zoom APS Special Originals Mixed Original Applications Book Copy Non Image Area Erase Repeat AUTO Layout Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory Shift amount in Reduce amp Shift mode 0 250 mm in 1 mm increments setting in 0 1 mm increments using up down arrow key is also available by key operator setting to be set collectively for the front and back pages however the shift amount for the back page can be altered in order to position the image exactly the same as on the front page In Reduce amp Shift mode AMS is automatically selected and cannot be released Original copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 8 5 x11 R Incompatible conditions with Reduce amp Shift mode Front ABCD EFGHI JKLMN 5 OPQR sTuV WxXxYZ 2 Originals 13 14 15 16 17 18 J Back Left gt Right Left lt gt Right ABCD 12345 EFGHI 6789 ar 10 11 12 13 14 15 as 461718 wx yzil Front Down Back Left binding margin 10 11 12 13 14 15 I 16 17 18 Back Down 9 37 Applications Image Shift continued To Reduce and Shift Copy Image continued Application Sel
381. tion is initially set to 1 1 This setting is changeable Original Copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Rotation Rotation Sort Rotation Group Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Combination Transparency Interleave Image Insert Book Copy Program Job Repeat AUTO Layout Reduce amp Shift in Image Shift STAMP SET NUMBERING WATERMARK WATERMARK NUMBERING QUQ0u00 Originals scanned Copies in OVERLAY mode 1st scanned original 2nd and later ABCD m LL lig ls gt Application Selection Screen Stamp Overlay Selection Screen elect Appl icat io 0 elect desired STAMP OVERLA 0 rola EE MARK Jf Application L Stamp Overlay WATERMARK OVERLAY FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Non image Area rae La hmi Reverse All image Chapter image ENED 4 area GENT 4 H STAMP WATERMARK lg OYERLAY g a 5 PAGE NUMBERING Image Shift WATERMARK OYERLAY NUMBERING MEMORY DATE TIME SET NUMBERING FramelFold Sta t Booet 7 m BO ALL 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch Stamp Overlay The Stamp Overlay Se
382. tray is user adjustable and holds 500 sheets of either 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x1 1 8 5 x11 R or 5 5 x8 5 Tray 2 is service adjustable and holds 1 000 sheets of either 8 5 x11 or 5 5 x8 5 Tray 1 is service adjustable and holds 1 500 sheets of either 8 5 x11 or 5 5 x8 5 NOTE Tray 1 2 3 4 and LCC are available for loading wide types of the regular sizes specified above 11 12 Front doors Right Left open to the internal copier to allow clearing of mishandled paper FN 121 Finisher option sorts staple sorts and groups into finished sets With PK 2 PK 5 PK 5 US 2 HOLES Punch kit option installed file holes can be punched in the output copies Sub power switch turns copier power On Off when pressed LCD touch screen displays interactive operation screens Conirol panel controls copier operations OT 104 Shift tray option sorts and groups into finished sets and offsets each set upon exit Main power switch turns machine power On Off to operate it as copier scanner server printer LCC Large capacity cassette C 403 option holds 4 000 sheets FN 115 Finisher option sorts staple sorts and groups into finished sets 3 3 Machine Information Machine Configuration continued 22 FN 10 Finisher amp option 23 Cover Inserter E option 20 C 404 Large capacity cassette 21 ZK 3 Z Fold Kit option External Machine Call outs continued
383. turned on in the Key Operator Mode See p 13 41 to p 13 48 Con 11 6 Network Function Image Store Delete Mode continued To Delete Image Data Scanner Server Setting Menu Screen Image Data Password Entry Screen of follo SCAN SERYER Image store password athe IMAGE RECALL A B K L u v 0 1 1 CHARACTER DELETE Job Name Entry Screen popup menu displayed Job Name Entry Screen JOB NAME DATE ABCD1111 2003 08 03 2 2003 08 17 JOB NAME DATE ABCD1111 2003 08 03 ABCD2222 2003 08 17 EFGH3333 2003 08 19 CHARACTER DELETE 1 Press Mode to light up the Scan LED The Scan Server Setting Menu Screen will be displayed 2 Touch IMAGE STORE DELETE to display the Image Data Store Delete Site Selection Screen 3 Enter your Image data password from the touch screen keypad To correct an entry touch 1 CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character then enter the correct password 4 If the password is correct touch OK to display the Job Name Entry Screen 5 Touch the or key on the right side of the job name list to highlight the name of the data to be deleted then touch JOB DELETE The popup menu will appear to confirm that you
384. ty Unless the cord or lead has adequate capacity smoking and overheating may occur Should smoking and or overheating occur contact an electrician immediately If you require further information about power requirements power consumption extension cords adapters and connectors please contact your service representative and consult your electrician 2 9 Safety Information Machine Handling and Care A WARNING FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING WARNING MAY RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY AND OR MACHINE DAMAGE O MACHINE CONTACT Never touch internal high voltage area indicated with a WARNING label Never touch the drum surface Never put your hand into the developing unit when removing mishandled paper CAUTION FAILURE TO HEED THE FOLLOWING CAUTIONS MAY RESULT IN MACHINE DAMAGE OVERHEATING AND OR PERSONAL INJURY O MACHINE CONTACT Never touch internal high temperature or magnetism areas indicated with a CAUTION label Never insert your hand into the fixing unit when removing mishandled paper Never touch the inside of the main body for any purpose except removing mishandled paper or adding toner Use care when pulling out the conveyance fixing unit O MACHINE CARE AN Do not drop paper clips staples or other small metallic objects into the copier or spill water or any other liquid into the machine Do not use the machine surface to support vases books etc These items will interfere with the work space and m
385. uch 16 Side 2 lens adjustment to display the Side 2 Lens Adjustment Screen 3 Touch to highlight the desired tray key then touch arrow keys to select an adjustment data The selected data will be displayed on the highlighted tray key 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Key Operator Mode Screen 5 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 51 Key Operator Mode Finisher Adjustment 17 Use this mode to make fine adjustments to each function of the finisher Key Operator Mode Screen 2 11 Tray auto select setting Side 2 lens adjustment 12 Energy saver setting Finisher adjustment 13 Memory switch setting HOD management setting 14 Machine management list print Scan transmission setting 15 Call remote center 20 Non image area erase setting ele RETURN Stapling amp Folding Stopper Position Adjustment Screen N ojjj SET NEXT BACK RETURN Punch Adjustment Mode Screen Punch kit Yertical pos adj Punch kit Horiz pos adj 1 2 3 Punch unit Vertical pos adj 4 Punch unit Horiz pos adj RETURN Punch Kit Horizontal Position Adjustment Screen
386. uch OK to complete the setting and return to the User Setting Mode Menu Screen 8 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 9 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations 13 14 Key Operator Mode User Setting Mode 3 continued User Lens Mode Ratio Setting 3 The preset and userset ratios available on the Basic Screen are used to reduce and enlarge the original image to accommodate copy paper size Normally users are allowed to change the three USERSETs in the bottom line on the User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen The preset keys in the top and middle lines can be programmed in 2 5 DIP SW mode for special purposes but ordinarily it is recommended that they remain unchanged O Setting options Userset or Preset ratio O Default setting USERSET1 4 000 USERSET2 2 000 USERSETS 0 500 User Setting Mode Menu Screen User Lens Mode Ratio Setting Screen 1 User density level 1 setting 1 4 7 CANCEL OK 2 User density level 2 setting User lens mode ratio setting Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 4 000 2 000 0 500 RETURN 1 Press Help to display the Help Screen then touch Key Operator Mode Enter the 4 digit Key Operator password then touch OK to display the Key Operator Mode Screen NOTE If an invalid password is entered enter the valid 4 digit password 2 Touch 3 User setting mode to display the User Setting Mode Menu Screen then touch 3 User lens mode ratio
387. up menu 2 Touch to highlight the desired original direction key 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 4 Make other compatible selections 5 Position original s in the EDH or on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 6 Press Start After copying is completed press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 8 2 Special Original Original Binding Mode When copying in 2 1 or 2 2 mode specify the binding direction of the originals on the Special Original popup menu to obtain the desired copy result Duplex original binding direction 2 1 RIGHT amp LEFT I BINDING p Simplex copy 1 2 1 3 eo BINDING 4 3 Duplex originals Duplex copy Select condition to scan originals COUNT SET sss ORIGINAL DUPLEX SPECIAL DIRECTION BINDING ENHANCE ORIGINAL ORIGINAL i FUNCTION TA HA UP Increase Mixed Non STDP BINDING i Contrast Original ES size RECALL 7 Folded Tab STANDARD Folde al E Photo Original S paper D CANCEL E Text
388. up menu 0 Oo Ae m _ BINDING OUTPUT MODE HDD OUTPUT STORE TANDEM RECALL STANDARD ROTATION _ GROUP FACEDOWN F CANCEL OK To Set Face Up Non Sort Exit 1 Confirm that the SORT key is not highlighted If SORT is highlighted touch SORT to deselect it 2 Touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Output Mode popup menu 3 Touch FACE UP to highlight it 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 7 34 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine without Finisher continued Face Up Exit continued Output Mode popup menu O 0 BINDING OUTPUT MODE HDD STORE TANDEM RECALL STANDARD ROTATION _ GROUP FACEDOWN F CANCEL OK To Set Face Up Rotation Sort Exit 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Output Mode popup menu 2 Touch FACE UP to highlight it 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 4 Touch SORT to highlight it Output Mode popup menu Ae BINDING OUT
389. urrent job 4 Press Start The original for the reserve job will be scanned NOTE When the message Please load size paper in any tray except tray is displayed load the specified paper into the appropriate trays 5 Repeat step 1 to 4 to reserve more than one job When setting the fourth copying job touch the active FREE JOB key at the far right to scroll to the next reserve setting screen Up to nine reserve job settings are available 6 When completed the Basic Screen for the current printing job is restored To scroll to the next previous screen touch the arrow keys displayed at the right side of the folder keys NOTE When trouble occurs on a reserve job which is not currently displayed on the screen the arrow key to scroll to that job will blink See p 6 33 to p 6 34 7 Copying of the reserve job will start automatically after completing the current job 6 29 Basic Operations Reserve continued Job Status Screen Touch the STATUS key on the Basic Screen to display the Job Status Screen see below The Job Status Screen allows you to perform the following functions e Confirm machine status e Change order of reserve job e Delete reserve job e View previous job list e View noncomplete job list e View tray information and machine status of the other machine in tandem mode To return to the Basic Screen touch OK on the Job Status Screen Basic Screen Job Status Screen i MEMORY 99
390. us Sereen nn aa a a e aa eaaa aia oaa Eiaa 6 30 Mishandled Paper During the Reserve Setting rererere 6 33 When Paper is Depleted for the Job in Progress eeeccceeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaes 6 34 Store MOE ive eaten het eect te eel eee eee Pee ai ave iaiia iae ieaiaia ent 6 35 Platen Store Mode ccccccccceeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeesaaeeeeaaeeseaaeeseaeesseaeeeseeeeseaeeeeseeeeeaes 6 35 EDH Store Mode iriiri nicer aaeeei aan ia eat eineareesuieeheidaeeteaes 6 37 Interrupt Modes tik ack ohn AE ee A A ee a ees eer 6 38 RotatON isc case ete an retin ee edited E E AE T 6 40 Rotation And APS cnir pe e aa a aa aa e Aaaa aaia ERAS 6 40 Rotation and AMS cccccccceeeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeseaaeeseaaeeseaeeeseaeeeseeeeseeeeteeeeseaes 6 41 To Release Automatic Rotation 00 2 ceeccceeeeeeneeeeeeesneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeaas 6 42 Check Mode and Proof Copy cecccececeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeseeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeesaeesseneesseaeeeseaees 6 43 Help ModE tits asc ceacteb E Naan del shige iaunct ameristar es 6 46 Section 7 Output Modes Output Mode for Machine with Finisher 0 cccccceceeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeeeseaeeeeeeeee 7 2 Primay Main Tray A2i8 ise aie ee ae a Ree ee eh 7 2 Secondary Sub Trays eiiiai aineina aaea epa E rae Aerea iiaea E 7 3 Non Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray ccccceeesseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeesenees 7 4 Sort Mode Using Primary Main Tray
391. used as a stand alone copier or as a high speed network printer when connected to the optional Pi7200e Printer Controller The Di5510 Di7210 can also be used as a print server on a network operating system Separate user s manuals and installation instructions are included with the optional Pi 7200e device Digital technology and memory capability of the Di5510 Di7210 provide many advantages over the conventional photocopying process In conventional photocopying a scanned image virtually remains intact as it is represented on the drum and then copied onto the output media While many conventional settings can be made before outputting the copies to effect image reduction lens adjustment image erasure and job store etc the conventional photocopying process cannot transform the image into bits or store image data into memory In the Di5510 Di7210 a scanned image is electronically digitized into data bits that are represented in code form and stored into memory Stored data can be retrieved from memory and output in various ways as controlled by software The digitized image is represented as pixels on a screen or as dots per inch dpi on hard copy The Di5510 Di7210 resolves image in the copier printer mode at 600 dpi Di5510 Di7210 digital technology enables you to e feed originals only once to make multiple copies thereby preserving the condition of originals store images in memory and perform Sheet Cover insertion Chapter
392. ustment Menu Screen Touch the desired menu key to display the adjustment screen for each function Make fine adjustment on the screen Touch lt gt to select or as desired enter the value then touch SET Check the entered value on the left side of the second line in the message area If provided touch NEXT or BACK to move to the next or previous adjustment item Touch RETURN to restore the Finisher Adjustment Menu Screen 5 Touch RETURN to restore the Key Operator Mode Screen 6 Touch RETURN to return to the Basic Screen and perform copying operations AUN 13 53 Key Operator Mode HDD Management Setting 18 Use this function to manage the image data stored in the optional HDD HDD 2 and to check the space available for new data e Password list delete Display the password list on the screen or delete the image data JOB by deleting the corresponding password from the list e JOB auto delete period setting Specify the period of time 1 to 52 weeks to keep the data It will be deleted automatically when specified period has passed e State of HDD capacity Check the space in percentage Key Operator Mode Screen 2 HDD Mai nagement Password Entry Screen Tray auto select setting Side 2 lens adjustment 1 HOD manage password 4 Energy saver setting Finisher adjustment Memory switch setting HDD management setting Machine management list print Scan transmission sett
393. utput Mode for Machine without Finisher continued Face Down Exit continued Basic Screen Ee 0 BINDING OUTPUT MODE HDD STORE TANDEM croup Z raceu E RECALL STANDARD ROTATION Batts E CANOEL OK To Set Face Down Rotation Sort Exit 1 Confirm that the OUTPUT APPLI key is not highlighted If OUTPUT APPLI is highlighted touch OUTPUT APPLI to display the Output Mode popup menu Select to highlight FACE DOWN and deselect all the other keys then touch OK 2 Touch SORT to highlight it Output Mode popup menu Ae BINDING OUTPUT MODE HDD OUTPUT STORE Q TANDEM p hem vew E RECALL o STANDARD i ROTATION E CANCEL OK To Set Face Down Group Exit 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu 2 Touch GROUP and FACE DOWN to highlight them 3 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 7 32 Output
394. value continuously The image display on the screen allows you to view the binding margin to be created on the printed sheets The following icons will appear to show the currently selected conditions gt gt amp gt 6 UP DOWN RIGHT LEFT UP amp RIGHT UP amp LEFT DOWN amp RIGHT DOWN amp LEFT 9 35 Applications Image Shift continued To Adjust Position of Copy Image continued 5 When Booklet or 2 Repeat mode of Repeat has been already selected the PAGE SPACE key appears clear on the screen to show its availability with PAGE SPACE indication displayed in the image area If desired touch PAGE SPACE to highlight it then enter the desired amount using the touch screen keypad or up down arrow key 6 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Application Selection Screen 7 Select additional Application functions or touch OK to return to the Basic Screen 8 Enter the desired print quantity 9 Position original s FACE UP in EDH or FACE DOWN on platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 10 Press Start After copying is completed touch Image Shift on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 36 Applications Image Shift con
395. w 1 Click on the check box es to select the E C M data min aed of the counter to be cleared If all the counters are to be cleared click on SelectAll 2 Click on the radio button heading the Reset the count of selected item s Copy Print or Reset the count of selected item s Scan 3 Click on Apply The Count Reset Confirmation window will be displayed NOTE To cancel resetting the E C M data click on Back or any E C M Function Setting menu item to jump to the desired window 4 Click on Apply to immediately reset the counters to zero The message Setting was changed will be displayed NOTE If an error message is displayed after clicking on Apply a counter has not been reset due to a machine operation in progress The machine must be in an idle state when you click on Apply Click on Back to return to the E C M Data List window Fie Ede view Favontes Tools Het b Enke gt O A A seach Favores Grin D 3a Address E Ft67 1011 22201 ectorn ekcture en html HE EKC data list These counters will be reset Copy Print SEEE E om File Edt View Favortes Toos Help Sik gt OD A Asad Groots Get GS SS a Address http 10 11 32201 eoform ekefune enhtml E K C data list Setting was changed 11 26 Network Function
396. when using Store mode APS and AMS are automatically released Changing Magnification is available O Non image area erase is automatically selected Release it manually when using EDH to scan originals O Original Copy size 11 x17 8 5 x14 8 5 x11 R 8 5 x11 5 5 x8 5 O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions APS AMS Rotaion 2 2 2 1 Rotation Sort Rotation Group O Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Z folded Original O Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Chapter Combination Booklet Image Insert Reverse Image Repeat All lmage Area Image Shift Overlay Storing image in Overlay Memory Available when Non Image Area Erase is released NOTE The AUTO layout function may not operate properly if the lighting in the work place is directly over the platen glass In this case consult your service representative about an appropriate place for installation N ABCD ABCD 3 a Set original AUTO layout copying Application Selection Screen FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Transparency Non image AUTO Ha Interleave Area Erase d Layout H Book Copy Elg Program FramelFold ff Stamp ber Job al Erasure a g Overlay Praf x 9 31 Applications AUTO Layout continued 1 Touch APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Application Selection Screen 2 Touch AUTO Layout The incompatible function ke
397. will be displayed 2 Touch to highlight the desired mode key 3 Touch OK The Basic Screen will be restored with OUTPUT APPLI highlighted 2 Select additional copy conditions as desired 3 Enter the desired print quantity from the control panel keypad 4 Position original s FACE UP in the EDH or FACE DOWN on the platen glass 5 Press Start TIP Output Icons on the Basic Screen Non sort Sort Group A CAUTION When the selected print quantity exceeds the Shift tray s maximum capacity remove the printed sheets while paper is exiting to avoid paper mishandling 7 13 Output Modes Folding and Stapling amp Folding Modes The Folding and Stapling amp Folding modes are available only when the FN 10 Finisher option is installed When any mode is selected the Booklet feature is automatically selected and indicated on the Application Selection Screen NOTES 1 When copying two sided signature originals using the Folding or Stapling amp Folding mode release the automatically selected Booklet mode on the Application Selection Screen 2 When copying dark originals or using Reverse Image mode together with Folding or Stapling amp Folding mode the folded line of the output copies may be slightly shifted The following copy results may be expected when using Folding or Stapling amp Folding mode In the Folding mode each copied set is folded and output to the Booklet tray of the finisher I
398. wing ite Li System initial setting 5 Paper type Special size set _2 Copier initial setting 7 Panel contrast Key sound adj _3 User setting mode _8 Key operator data setting 4 E C M function setting 9 Weekly timer 5 Lock delete program memory 10 Control panel adjustment RETURN 13 1 Key Operator Mode To the Key Operator The Key Operator is trained to handle all special Key Operator functions that are not accessible to the general user such as monitoring overall copier activity machine performance and service information modifying machine settings as well as controlling user activity for billing purposes A unique 4 digit Key Operator password is normally set by your service representative at installation If the unique code is not set by your service representative the copier will not display Key Operator Password Entry Screen when the Key Operator mode is being accessed a Key Operator password will not be required A service set 8 digit ECM master key code must be entered by the Key Operator to access the Electronic Copy Monitor functions and a service set 4 digit Weekly Timer master key code must be entered by the Key Operator to access the Weekly Timer functions To ensure the security of Key Operator mode it is recommended that you establish a unique Key Operator password along with the Key Operator ECM master key code and Weekly Timer master key code and keep them in a confidential file
399. with this function to print chapter number onto chapter page in addition to page number numbering or watermark numbering See p 9 39 to p 9 43 O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions 1 1 2 2 2 1 Group Punch using PK 2 Punch kit when selecting Copy insertion mode Rotation Sort Rotation Group Face Up O Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Tab Paper O Incompatible Applications Combination Transparency Interleave Image Insert Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat Storing image in Overlay Memory 1 sided originals Copies in Chapter mode Tilte page 3 gt NM 7 5 6 34 1 2 2 N 1 Title pages Title page Application Selection Screen Chapter Insertion Setting No Screen a ode o BOOK LOB 16 er page ber b eypad MARK Jf Application L Chapter PAGE SETTING Enter by keypad lt 1Z15 gt _ ADDITIONAL UNCTIO aj PS P 8 CI y Title page Booklet JOB 01 FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT SheetiCover AUTO Insertion Layout if a Reverse All image Chapter Image i Area Book Copy E Image Shift FramelFold Stamp Booklet trasue fet GEJ Overy 3 en Ena k REZA SE 4l DELETE SET gt 9 8 Applications Chapter continued 1 T
400. word 8 ABCD1111 2003 11 03 ABCD2222 2003 11 17 A EFGH3333 2003 11 19 EFGH4444 2003 11 20 A B D A B K L N K L pereeerrs uly x u v 0 3 0 2 1 2 1 1 CHARACTER DELETE JOB PREVIOUS DELETE SCREEN 1 CHARACTER DELETE CANCEL 1 Touch OUTPUT APPLI on the Basic Screen to display the Output Mode popup menu 2 Touch HDD STORE The Image Data Password Entry Screen will be displayed 3 Enter the desired Image data password in up to 8 characters from the touch screen keypad To correct an entry touch 1 CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character then enter the correct password 4 If the password is correct touch OK to display the Job Name Entry Screen Enter the desired job name in up to 8 characters from the touch screen keypad To correct an entry touch 1 CHARACTER DELETE repeatedly to delete each character then enter the correct job name 5 If the job name is correct touch OK twice to return to the Basic Screen 6 Select the desired copying conditions then enter the desired print quantity 7 Position original s FACE UP in the EDH or FACE DOWN on the platen glass When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 While using Program job the scanned and output data can be stored in HDD See p 9 21 to p 9 22 11 8 Network Function Image Store amp Output Mode continued 8 Press Start to scan and then print When the Store mode is used touch STORE o
401. y selected Copy mode 1 2 or 2 2 mode only Folding or Stapling amp Folding output mode is available when copier is equipped with FN 10 Finisher Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions 1 1 2 1 APS Group Punch using PK 2 Punch kit when selecting Cover sheet mode Rotation Sort Rotation Group Face Up Cover Inserter E with Cover mode in Booklet Incompatible Special Originals Mixed Original Tab Paper Incompatible Applications Sheet Cover Insertion Combination Transparency Interleave Program Job Non Image Area Erase Repeat Storing image in Overlay Memory 1 sided originals Jf E eee 4 Booklet copying t 2 sided originals Booklet Mode Selection Screen BOOK 2201 JOB 01 0O MARK f Application FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT Booklet BOOKLET auto fi Will sess Layout WE BINDING MODE Book Copy E s Image Shit COVERS TRAY y Tray 1 THICK1 Cover with Cover with No cover sheet Copy sheet Blank sheet
402. ys will be dimmed to show inactivity 3 Select additional copying features as desired When using EDH to scan originals touch Non image Area Erase to deselect it 4 Touch OK to complete the setting and return to the Basic Screen 5 Select the desired copy size 6 Enter the desired print quantity 7 Position original s FACE UP in the EDH or FACE DOWN on the platen glass IMPORTANT DO NOT CLOSE THE EDH WHEN USING PLATEN GLASS PLACING ORIGINAL OBLIQUELY ON THE PLATEN GLASS MAY CAUSE BLACK COPY MARKS When using Platen store mode see p 6 35 to p 6 36 When using EDH store mode see p 6 37 Option Press Mode Check to view the selection and make a Proof copy if desired Touch EXIT to return to the Basic Screen See p 6 43 to p 6 45 8 Press Start After copying is completed touch AUTO Layout on the Application Selection Screen or press Panel Reset to release the mode and reset the machine 9 32 Applications All lmage Area Use this function to make copies printed completely to the edges O Copies will be made without image cutoff on the edges O Incompatible Basic Copying Conditions Rotation Sort Rotation Group O Incompatible Special Originals None O Incompatible Applications Non Image Area Erase Reverse Image Frame Fold Erasure Application Selection Screen ABCD ABCD ABCD FILE EDIT IMAGE EDIT eca i A PAET Combination pa Book C

User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents